Panasonic KX F900 User Manual FAX MACHINE Manuals And Guides 97120075
PANASONIC Fax Machines Manual 97120075 PANASONIC Fax Machines Owner's Manual, PANASONIC Fax Machines installation guides
User Manual: Panasonic KX-F900 KX-F900 PANASONIC FAX MACHINE - Manuals and Guides View the owners manual for your PANASONIC FAX MACHINE #KXF900. Home:Computer & Office Equipment Parts:Panasonic Parts:Panasonic FAX MACHINE Manual
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 230
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
OHUEH
NO.KM[9610089C1
Service Manual
and Technical Guide
900MHz
CORDLESS
FAX
KX-F900
(for U.S.A.)
,_
] his service inlormation
is designed for experienced
WARNING
repair technicians only and _snot designed for use by the general public.
It does not contain warnings or cautions to advise non-technical
individuals
of potential dangers in attempting to service a product.
Products powered by electricity should be serviced or repaired only by experienced
professional
Any attempt to service or repair the product or products dealt with in this service information
technicians.
by anyone else could result in serious
injury or death.
Panasonic
I (_)1996
All rights Kyushu
reserved.
Matsushita
Unauthorized
Electric
copying
Co., Ltd.
and distribution
is a violation of law.
i
I
KX-F900
When you mention the serial number, write...... down the 11 digits. The serial number may be found on the bottom of the unit.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
INTRODUCTION
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
INSULATION
.......................................................................................................................................
RESISTANCE TEST ........................................................................................................................
FOR SERVICE TECHNICIANS
..............................................................................................................................
5
5
5
BATTERY CAUTION ..............................................................................................................................................
6
AC CAUTION ..........................................................................................................................................................
6
STANDARD
BATTERY LIFE ..................................................................................................................................
7
PERSONAL
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
7
SPECIFICATIONS
..................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
8
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
..................................................................................................................................
8
LOCATION OF CONTROLS
..................................................................................................................................
9
FEATURES ...........................................................................................................................................................
10
CONNECTION
11
......................................................................................................................................................
INSTALLATION
COMPONENT
..............................................................................................................................................
LOCATIONS .................................................................................................................................
MAINTENANCE
CLEANING
ITEM ....................................................................................................................................
THE UNIT ..........................................................................................................................................
TROUBLESHOOTING
14
14, 15
16
GUIDE
TROUBLESHOOTING
USER RECEIVERABLE
SUMMARY ......................................................................................................................
18
ERRORS .......................................................................................................................
19
DETAIL OF TROUBLESHOOTING
PROGRAMMING
12, 13
................................................................................................................
20~91
AND LISTS ........................................................................................................................
92~97
TEST FUNCTIONS .........................................................................................................................................
97, 98
ADJUSTMENT
TABLE OF TEST EQUIPMENTS
AND TOOL ...................................................................................................
100
ADJUSTING THE FEEDER PRESURE .............................................................................................................
101
CONFIRMATION
101
OF SEPARATION
CCD ADJUSTMENTS
DOCUMENT
SPRING ...................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
READ START POSITION ADJUSTMENT
............................................................................
CORDLESS ADJUSTMENT .......................................................................................................................
DISASSEMBLY
102-104
104, 105
107-113
INSTRUCTIONS
DISASSEMBLY
INSTRUCTIONS
..............................................................................................................
HOW TO REPLACE FLAT PACKAGE IC ..........................................................................................................
-2-
115-125
126
j
KX-F900
GIR£;UII OPI:RA]IONS
CONNECTION
DIAGRAM ................................................................................................................................
GENERAL BLOCK DIAGRAM
...................................................................................................................
128
129, 130
CONTROL SECTION .................................................................................................................................
131~136
FACSIMILE SECTION ................................................................................................................................
137~145
MODEM SECTION .....................................................................................................................................
146-152
EXPLANATION
153, 154
OF ANALOG SECTION BLOCK DIAGRAM ....................................................................
NCU SECTION ...........................................................................................................................................
155, 156
ITS AND MONITOR SECTION ...................................................................................................................
157, 158
TAM INTERFACE SECTION ......................................................................................................................
159-161
OPERATION
PANEL ..........................................................................................................................................
162
LCD COG TYPE .................................................................................................................................................
163
SWITCHING
POWER SUPPLY SECTION
................................................................................................
CORDLESS SECTION ...............................................................................................................................
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (DIGITAL BOARD) ...............................................................................................
164-166
167-183
185, 186
SCHEMATIC
DIAGRAM (DIGITAL CIRCUIT) ............................................................................................................
187
SCHEMATIC
DIAGRAM (ANALOG CIRCUIT) ...........................................................................................................
188
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (ANALOG BOARD) ..............................................................................................
SCHEMATIC
189, 190
DIAGRAM AND PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (CCD) ...........................................................................
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (SWITCHING
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (SWITCHING
POWER SUPPLY ) ................................................................................
192
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT) .......................................................................
193
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (OPERATION
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (OPERATION
PANEL) .................................................................................................
194
PANEL CIRCUIT) ........................................................................................
195
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (CORDLESS
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (CORDLESS
191
BASE UNIT) ...........................................................................................
196
BASE UNIT) .................................................................................................
197
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (RF UNIT) .....................................................................................................................
198
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (RF UNIT) ...........................................................................................................................
199
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (PORTABLE
HANDSET) ..............................................................................................
200
HANDSET) ....................................................................................................
201
SCHEMATIC
DIAGRAM (PORTABLE
SCHEMATIC
DIAGRAM AND PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (CHARGE) ...................................................................
_ERMINAL GUIDE OF IC'S, TRANSISTORS
AND DIOE)ES ............................................................................
202
203, 2o4
205
TOOLS ......................................................................................................................................................................
CABINET, MECHANICAL
ACCESSORIES
REPLACEMENT
AND ELECTRICAL
AND PACKING MATERIALS
PARTS LOCATION
..................................................................
206~211
212
..........................................................................................................
PARTS LIST ...........................................................................................
-3-
213~230
KX-F900
INTRODUCTION
Hay_
Safety
Precautions
............................................................................
Insulation Resistance
For Service
Technicians
5
Test ........................................................................
5
...........................................................................
5
Batten] Caution .........................................................................................
6
AC Caution
...............................................................................................
6
Standard
Battery Life ................................................................................
7
Personal
Safety Precautions
7
Specifications
.....................................................................
............................................................................................
Optional Accessories
8
................................................................................
8
Location of Controls ..................................................................................
9
Features
..................................................................................................
Connection
..............................................................................................
Installation
.........................................................................................
Component
Maintenance
Cleaning
Locations
.............................................................................
Item .............................................................................
the Unit ....................................................................................
4
10
11
12, 13
14
14, 15
16
KX-F900
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
n
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Before servicing, u_plugthe power cord to prevent an electric shock.
When replacing pads, use only the manufacturer's recommended components.
Check the condition of the power cord. Replace if wear or damage is evident.
After servicing, be sure to restore the lead dress, insulation barriers, insulation papers, _hields, etc.
Before returning the serviced equipment to the customer, be sure to perform the following insulation resistance
test to prevent the customer from being exposed to shock hazards.
INSULATION
RESISTANCE
TEST
1. Unplug the power cord and short the two prongs of the plug with a jumper wire.
2. Turn on the power switch.
3. Measure the resistance value with an ohmmeter between the jumpered AC plug and each exposed metal cabinet part
(screwheads, control shafts, handle brackets, etc.).
"Note: Some exposed parts may be isolated from the chassis by design. These will read infinity.
4. If the measurement is outside the specified limits, there is a possibility of a shock hazard.
The equipment should be repaired and rechecked before it is returned to the customer.
Exposed -metal
part
Ohmmeter
Resistance = more than 1M Q
(at DC 500 V)
FOR SERVICE TECHNICIANS
ICs and LSIs are vulnerable to static electricity.
When repairing, the following precautions will help prevent recurring malfunctions.
1) Cover the plastic parts boxes with aluminum foil.
2) Ground the soldering irons.
3) Use a conductive mat on the worktable.
4) Do not touch IC or LSI pins with bare fingers.
-5-
z
-I
3o
0
CJ
c
0
-i
0
z
KX-F900
BATTERY CAUTION
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended
manufacture. Discard used batteries according to following caution:
by the
Disposal of lithium batteries should be performed by permitted, professional disposal firms knowledgeable in state government federal and local hazardous materials and hazardous waste transportation and disposal requirements.
Battery continues to have no transportation limitations as long as they are separated to prevent short circuits and packed
in strong packaging.
Commercial firms that dispose of any quantity of lithium cells should have a mechanism in place to account for their ultimate disposition. This is a good practice for all types of commercial or industrial waste.
Recommend Type Number: CR2032 (BATT)
CR2032 (BATT)
Manufactured
Manufactured
by MATSUSHITA
by SONY
AC CAUTION
For safety, before closing the lower cabinet, please make sure of the following precautions.
(_ The earth lead is fixed by the screw.
(_) The AC connector is connected properly.
(_) Wrap the AC lead around the core 3 times.
(BOTTOM VIEW)
Earth Lead
(Ferrite Core)
AC Inlet
/
Earth Lead
I
O
AC
Screw
AC Connector
Earth
Lead
o
KX-F900
STANDARD
-_
BATTERY LIFE
m
z
.-I
:;o
O
If your Panason_c battery is fully charged;
While in use (,TALK)
Up to about 4.5 hours
While not in use (Stand-By)
Up to about 14 days
O
B
O
z
• Battery life may vary depending on usage conditions and ambient temperature.
• Clean the handset and the main unit charge contacts
month,
with a dry soft cloth once a
or the battery may not charge properly.
• Once the battery is fully charged, you do not have to place the handset on the main unit until
the TALK/BATT LOW indicator flashes slowly.
• The battery cannot be overcharged.
PERSONAL
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Be careful not to let your hair, clothes fingers, accessories, etc., become caught in any moving sections of the unit.
These are driven by the carriage monitor, and the slow down gear, the paper feed roller, the pressure roller, the eject roller,
the spur, the pick-up roller, etc., which are driven by the paper feed motor. These separation roller and document feed roller
which are rotated by the document feed motor and a gear which makes the two rollers rotate.
Also, the spurs are metal and sharply pointed. Be careful not to touch them accidentally by hand.
roller gear
Document rollers
)aration roller gear
feedgear
KX-F900
SPECIFICATIONS
•
Main unit
1. Applicable Lines:
Public Switched Telephone
2. Document Size:
Network
Max. 216 mm (8 1/2") in width
This specifications is for
U.S.A. version only.
Refer to the simplified manual
(cover) for other areas.
Max. 600 mm (23 %') in length
3. Effective Scanning Width:
208 mm(8 3/18')
4. Printing Paper Size:
216 mm X max. 50 m (8 1/2"X164') roll
5. Effective Printing Width:
216 mm (81/2')
6. Transmission
Approx.15 sec/page (Original mode)
Time*:
7, Scanning Density:
Approx.30 sec/page (G3 Normal mode)
Horizontal :
8 pels/mm (203 pels/inch)
Vertical :
3.85 lines/mm (98 lines/inch) -Standard mode
7.7 lines/mm (196 lines/inch) -Fine/Halftone
15.4 lines/mm (392 lines/inch) -Superfine
8. Halftone Level:
64-level
9. Scanner Type:
CCD image sensor
10. Printer Type:
Thermal printing
11, Data Compression System:
Modified Huffman (MH), Modified READ (MR)
12. Modem Speed:
9600/7200/4800/2400
13. Operating Environment:
5-35°C (41-95 °F), 45-80 % RH (Relative Humidity)
14. Dimensions (HXWX
Approx. 118X366X265
D):
mode
mode
bps; Automatic Fallback
mm (4 21/32"X13 %' X10 7/18')
15. Mass 0Neight):
Approx. 3.4 kg (7.5 lb.)
16, Power Consumption:
Standby:
Approx. 5W / Transmission:
Approx. 15W
Reception:
Approx. 35W / Copy:
Approx. 40W
Maximum:
Approx. 100W
120V AC, 60Hz (This unit will not function at 50 Hz.)
17. Power Supply:
• Handset
1. Operating Environment:
5-35°C (41-95 °F), 45-80 % RH (Relative Humidity)
2. Dimensions (HX W× D):
Approx. 39X55X271
3. Weight:
Approx. 200 g (0.4 lb.)
mm (1 17/32"X2 3/32'X10 11/16')
4. Power Supply:
Ni-Cd battery (3.6 V, 600 mAh)
5. Frequency:
902-904 MHz, 926-928 MHz (30 channels)
6. Security Codes:
1,000,000
*Transmission speed depends upon the contents of the pages, resolution, telephone line conditions and capability of
receiving unit. 15 second speed based upon CCITT No.1 Test Chart.
.Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
OPTIONAL
ACCESSORIES
Parts No.
Description
Comment
KX-A106
Standard Thermal Recording Paper
216 mm X 30 m (8 1/2"X98')
with 25 mm (1") core
KX-A116
Standard Thermal Recording Paper
216 mm X 50 m (8 1/2"X164')
with 25 mm (1") core
KX-A125
Super Thermal recording Paper
(Like plain paper)
8
roll,
roll,
216 mm X30 m (8 1/2"X98') roll,
with 25 mm (1 ") core
KX-F900
LOCAl
I
ION OF CON]-ROLS
i
Z
.-I
Front
view
0
--
uattery charger
(beneath the cover)
O
C
0
.-I
Antenna
Document
entrance
0
Z
Spare battery
cover
Paper stacker
--
Document feeder tray
Document guide(s)
Microphone
CHARGE
SPARE
Cont;rol
CHARGE
Indicator
Front lid open button
Indicator
Document
exit
panel
Dial keypad
HELP
Display panel
DIRECTORY
I
.........
, III
_1#
MENU
_ °'1
I,.4-_@@,_L____
_ _
__ _; \
Y
-I
FLASH
MUTE
Direct call stations
_e"_ll RESOW1,ON..!I'_ 9
I (Z)(D(]DiI_ -__
..-iv ;__.
RESOLUTION
\
",
!
j
' -
I
I_--_--'='
I
t___
_
_T*,T,ooP_,r_ I
®( ))
t
AUTO RECEIVE
_0
LOWER
I
-1
VOLUME |
STOP
TONE
REDIAL/PAUSE
LOCATOR/INTERCOM
SP-PHQNE
IN USE indicator
-9-
START/COPY/SET
Handset
An_ena
INTERCOM indicator
TALK/BAT1 (Battery)
LOW indicator
TALK
TONE
PROGRAM
REDIAL/PAUSE _
FEATURES
General
900MHz
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Automatic paper cutter
Answering machine interface
64-Level halftones resolution
Large 165 ft. paper roll
Help printout
Cordless
Fax activation from handset
Intercom with 2-way paging
Lighted keypad
14-day battery life
Sound ChargeF _ technology
lO-station speed dial
Spare battery charger
Facsimile
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Easy-to view LCD (16-character)
Automatic document feeder (up to 15 sheets)
Paper curl reduction technology
Resolution: Standard/Fine/Super Fine/Half Tone
Distinctive ring detection
Super thermal paper
Correct order reception printout
Integrated Telephone System
•
•
•
•
-10-
Speakerphone
Telephone directory with alpha-search
One touch dialer (10 phone-number)
50-station speed dialer
KX-F900
CONNEGIION
I
z
--I
30
O
c
m
O
z
Connect to
"LINE".
Dialing mode switch:
Set to TONE.
• If you cannot dial,
set to PULSE.
Telephone
cord
DIALING MODE
TONE
JL PULSE
line
Single telephone line
(RJ11 C)
Line-surge
protector )
_
_
PowerV, outlet
(120
60 Hz)
Power surge_
protector
)
Note:
• For additional equipment protection, we recommend the use of a surge protector. The following types are
available; TELESPIKE BLOK MODEL TSB (TRIPPE MFG. CO.), SPIKE BLOK MODEL SK6-0 (TRIPPE MFG.
CO.), SUPER MAX (PANAMAX) or MP1 (ITW LINX).
• You can connect an extension phone or a telephone answering machine to the unit after removing the stopper on the
external telephone jack (EXT).
• When you operate this product, the power outlet should be near the product and easily accessible.
NIelpful hint:
If assistance is needed, press _.
The unit will print a quick reference.
l
-11
-
I
KX-F900
INSTALLATION
1. Installing
the recording
paper
(_) on
Open
lid by lifting up the tabs located
the the
bothback
sides,
-
b
(_) Install a recording paper roll in the main unit.
• Make sure that the shiny side of the paper is
facing down and there is no stack, tape, or
glue residue on the paper roll.
,,,,..,....
correct
2
incorrect
Insert the leading edge of the recording paper
between the recording paper roller and the silver
plate.
Recording paper roller
plate
3
Closethe
ends.
backlid
by gently pressing down on both
Note:
• Only use the included roll of paper or specified recording paper, or else the print quality may be affected
and/or excessive thermal head wear may occur.
• The beginning of some recording paper rolls are secured with glue or tape.
Cut approximately 150 mm (6 inches) from the new roll of paper prior to installation.
2. Installing the paper stacker
Install the paper stacker.
-12-
J
KX-F900
I
I
3. InslailirJg [ne _pa_u battery cover on the main unit
c
0
-I
O
z
Spare battery cover
the battery
in the handset
1
Install the battery as shown observing the
proper polarity.
2
Install the battery cover.
Battery
Battery cover
i3
u
z
-I
:o
0
Close the spare battery cover.
4. Installing
1
I
KX'FgO0
I
COMPONENT
LOCATIONS
Recording Paper Cover
--
Separation
Roller
Motor
Document ........
Feed Roller
_rmal Head
Recording Paper Roller
Target Glass
Document -Feed Roller
Cutter
Mirr
Transmission
Motor
Reception Motor
LED Array
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
1. OUTLINE
MAINTENANCE
AND REPAIRS ARE PERFORMED
USING THE FOLLOWING STEPS.
1) Periodic maintenance
Inspect the equipment periodically and if necessary, clean any contaminated parts.
2) Check for breakdowns
Look for signs of trouble and consider how the problems arose.
If the equipment can still be used, perform copying, self-testing or communications
testing.
3) Check equipment
Perform copying, self testing and communications
testing to determine if the problem originates from the transmitter,
receiver or the telephone line.
4) Determine causes
Determine the causes of the equipment trouble by troubleshooting.
5) Equipment repairs
Repair or replace the defectiveparts and take appropriate measures at this stage to ensure thatthe problem does not recur.
6) Confirm normal operation of the equipment
After completing the repairs, conduct copying, self testing and communications testing to confirm that the equipment operates
normally.
7)
Record keeping
Make a record of the measures taken to rectify the problem for future reference.
-14-
2-1. MAINTENANCE
NO.
LIST
OPERATION
m
CHECK ITEM
REMARKS
1
Document Path
Remove any foreign matter such as scrap of paper.
2
Rollers
If a roller is dirty, clean it with a damp cloth, then let dry thoroughly.
See page 16.
Recording Paper
If the platen is dirty, clean it with a damp cloth, then let dry thoroughly.
See page121.
Roller
Remove the paper before cleaning.
3
If the thermal
4
Thermal Head
head is dirty, clean the printing
moistened with denatured alcohol (alcohol without water), then let dry
6
LED Array
If the LED array is dirty, clean the glass with a dry soft cloth.
Sensors
Confirm the operation of the following sensors: recording paper sensor
(SW273),
Document
sensor (Pi302),
Read position
See page 123.
See page 16.
See pages 77, 78.
sensor (PI301),
Cover open sensor (SW271), and JAM sensor (SW272).
7
Mirrors and Lens
If the mirror and lens are dirty, clean them with a dry soft cloth.
8
Abnormal, wear and
Replace the part. Be sure that all part's screws are tight.
tear or loose parts
2-2.
No.
MAINTENANCE
CYCLE
Cleaning
Items
Replacement
2
(Ref. No. 58)
Procedure
Cycle
Procedure
7 years
See page 120.
3 months
See P. 16.
(63,000 documents)
Separation Rubber
(Ref. No. 23)
Remarks
Cycle
Separation Roller
1
7 years
3 months
(63,000 documents)
Feed Roller
3 months
See P. 16.
7 years
(63,000 documents)
3 months
See P. 16.
(63,000 documents)
3 months
See P. 123.
7 years
(63,000 documents)
See page 123.
(Ref. No. 59)
Recording Paper Roller
(Ref. No. 112)
See P. 121.
7 years
(63,000 documents)
See page 121.
3 months
(Ref. No. 49, 53)
Target Glass
(Ref. No. 171)
See page 120.
7 years
Thermal Head
These values are only standard ones and may vary depending on
usage conditions.
--15--
30
0
D
c
0
0
z
surface with a cloth
thoroughly.
5
z
KX-Fg00
CLEANING THE UNIT
Cleaning the inside of the unit
If misfeeding occurs frequently, or dirty patterns or black bands appear on a copied or transmitted document, clean
the document feeder rollers, sub roller, rubber flap, white plate and glass.
1
2
3
Disconnect the power cord and the telephone line
cord.
4
Clean the rubber flap with a cotton swab moistened
with isopropyl rubbing alcohol, and let dry
thoroughly.
5
6
Clean the white plate and glass with a soft dry
cloth.
7
Connect the power cord and the telephone line
cord.
White plate
Rubber fla
Open the front lid by pressing the front lid open
button.
Sub Roller
Clean the document feeder rollers and roller with a
cloth moistened with isopropyl rubbing alcohol, and
let dry thoroughly.
Document
feeder rollers
\
Clean the front lid by gently pressing down on both
ends.
Front lid open button
Caution:
• Do not use paper products (such as paper towels or
tissues) to clean the inside of the unit.
Cleaning the charge contacts
Clean the main unit and the handset charge contacts with a dry soft cloth once a month, or the battery may not
charge properly.
Charge contacts
Charge contacts
--16--
KX-F900
TROUBLESHOOTING
GUIDE
,-I
O
Page
1. Troubleshooting Summary .....................................................................
1-1. Troubleshooting
18
.....................................................................
18
1-2. Precautions ............................................................................
18
2. User Recoverable Errors .......................................................................
19
IIll
,1O
O
,,-I
Z
Q
3. Detail of Troubleshooting
.................................................................
20~91
3-1.
Outline ....................................................................................
20
3-2.
Starting up troubleshooting
...................................................
20
items ..............................................
21
3-3. Table of troubleshooting
3-4.
Easy-check-list .......................................................................
22
3-5. ADF section ......................................................................
23-32
3-6. Communication
section ...................................................
33-53
3-7. Digital board section ........................................................
54-67
3-8. Analog board section ......................................................
68-71
3-9.
72-75
Power supply section ......................................................
3-10. Operation board section .........................................................
76
3-11. Sensor section .................................................................
77, 78
3-12. Read section ....................................................................
79-83
3-13. Thermal head section .............................................................
84
3-14. Cordless section ..............................................................
85~91
4. Programming and Lists ....................................................................
92-97
5. Test Functions .................................................................................
97, 98
17-
Ill
I
KX-F900
1. TROUBLESHOOTING
SUMMARY
1-1. TROUBLESHOOTING
After having confirmed the abnormal condition by askingthe user, troubleshootaccording to th_ ,_L_U_;L_,
,._In
Observe the following precautions when troubleshooting.
1-2. PRECAUTIONS
1) If there is trouble with the print quality or the paper feed, first check that the installation space and the print
paper meets the specifications, that the paper selection lever/paper thickness lever is set correctly, and that the
paper is set correctly without any looseness.
2) Before troubleshooting, first check that the connectors and cables are connected correctly without any looseness.
Especially, if the abnormality occurs randomly, check very carefully.
3) When connecting the AC power cord with the unit case and checking the operation, exercise utmost care in
handling the electric parts in order to avoid electric shock and short-circuits.
4) After troubleshooting,
double check that you have not forgotten any connectors, left any loose screws, etc.
5) And always test to verify that the unit is working normally.
18-
KX-F900
2. USER RECOVERABLE
ERRORS
If the unit detects a problem, the following
messages will app_af in the display.
DISPLAY MESSAGE
:ICALL
I
• There is something wrong with the unit.
COVER
I
• The back lid is open. Close it.
DOCUMENT
[
CHECK
CHECK
NO
MEMORY
RESPONSE
OUT
OF
PAPER
J
I
JAMMED
ERROR
REDIAL
TIME OUT
REMOVE
DOCUMENT
TRANSMIT
ERROR
OVERHEATED
-I
• The document is not fed into the unit properly. Reinsert the document.
If the misfeeding occurs frequently, clean the document feeder rollers inside the unit.
If the problem remains, adjust the feeder pressure,
• Memory (phone numbers, parameters, etc.) has been erased.
Re-program.
• The receiving unit is busy or ran out of recording paper. Try again.
• The unit ran out of recording paper. Install a new recording paper.
PAPER
POLLING
UNIT
CAUSE AND REMEDY
SERvIcE
I CHECK
I
I
I
l
I
I
I
• A recording paper jam occurred.
Check with the other
• The receiving unit is busy or ran out of recording paper. Try again.
• The document is jammed. Remove the jammed document.
• Attempted to transmit a document longer than 600 mm (23%"). Press the STOP button
and remove the document. Divide the document into two or more sheets and try again.
• A transmission
error occurred. Try again.
• The unit is too hot. Let the unit cool down.
-19-
r-
I1"1
"r
O
O
.-.I
z
¢)
&')
c
Ill
Clean the jammed paper.
• The other fax machine does not provide the polling function.
party.
O
(=
Im
i
KX-F900
3. DETAIL OF TROUBLESHOOTING
3-1. OUTLINE
Troubleshooting is to make quality and reliability recover by finding out the broken component and exchange or
adjustment or cleaning. We have to find out symptoms and then arrange troubleshooting method.
If it's tough to finding out just a broken component, we should so arrange that block or section are specified, for
example "digital board" or image sensor".
A claim tag from customer or dealer gives us many kinds of expression for same trouble. Because they are not
technician or engineer. But we should carefully read it on our supposition comes from experience, and sufficiently
test the function related to that tag. Returns from customer or dealers often have to claim tag. In this case we need
to find out the symptoms. Therefore please test the unit following simple-check-list.
A problem difficult to find out
may lurk, so we need to test repeatedly, for example make copy 10 pages or receiving 10 pages ..........
3-2. STARTING
UP TROUBLESHOOTING
• Find out the symptom and troubleshooting
method
Power
on.
AC
LCD
IFchange
faitnly
LCD
I
no reaction
I
LCD
I
good
12:00AM
No reaction means that power line
is broken (short-circuit).
I
See digital board section.
(See page 54)
See digital board section.
(See page 54)
Yes, I know
Not yet
r
4'
Find out any symptom with
check list (See page 22).
20-
See table of
troubleshooting
item.
I
3-3. TABLE OF TROUBLESHOOTING
FUNCTION
SEE THIS PAGE
No character or faint response in the LCD
Skewed sending image
Expanded print
Image is distored
Printing
1
ITEMS
SYMPTOM
Unit doesn't work at all
KX-F900
Black or White lateral line on printing
Page
Page
Page
Page
30
30
27
28
-I
O
c
r-
Ill
No feed
ADF
(Auto Document Feeder)
Page
Page
Page
Page
23
24
25
26
Paper jam
Multiple feed
Skew
Page
Page
Page
Page
23
24
25
26
Abnormal sound from the product
Page 31
Can not cut the recording paper
Page 29
Voltage output is abnormal
Page 72
Keys are not accepted
Page 76
"PAPER JAM" is displayed
"CHECK COVER" is displayed
Page 77
Can not fax communicate
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
33
33
68
68
68
Page
Page
Page
Page
87
85
86
86
Paper jam
Multiple feed
Skew
No feed
Paper feed
Abnormal
mechanical sound
Cutter
Power supply
Operation panel
Sensor
Communication
FAX,
(Analog board)
TEL
Error code is displayed
Can not talk
DTMF tone doesn't work
Monitor sound, volume
Cordless
No link
Battery won't charge
No voice reception
No voice transmission
21
"1O
O
-I
z
c
Ill
I....Kx-egoo
3-4. EASY-CHECK-LIST
FUNCTION
FAX operation
Copy operation
Telephone operation
Operation panel
Sensor
JUDGEMENT
REFERENCE
transmission
OK /
NG
receiving
OK /
NG
FINE mode
OK /
NG
HALF TONE mode
OK /
NG
Monitor sou nd
OK /
NG
Ringer sound
OK /
NG
Dial operation
OK /
NG
Volume operation
OK /
NG
VOX detection
OK /
NG
SERVICE CODE 815
Key check
OK /
NG
SERVICE CODE 561
LED check
OK /
NG
SERVICE CODE 557
LCD check
OK /
NG
SERVICE CODE 558
Sensor check
OK /
NG
SERVICE CODE 815
OK /
NG
Handset Transceiver/receiver
OK /
NG
Remote control
OK /
NG
Portable handset
OK /
NG
Clock
gain correctly?
External TAM
Cordless operation
transmission/receiver
compare to your watch.
Change to FAX receiving by dialing -)(-._
(Refer to user mode #41 on page 52.)
Link
OK J
Battery charge
OK J NG
-22-
NG
KX-F900
I
3-5. ADF (Auto document feed) SECTION
(1) No document feed
In document setting, confirm
that beep tone or not.
NO
Check the separation
spring is distorting.
Check the sensor
lever movement.
sor
lever. the seneplace
_
]
,_ oK
Check the sensor
and digital board.
(pages 54 and 77)
I ( page120
leaning of) separation
tive
Replace
parts.the defec-
roller.
OK
Does the separation roller
rotate?
__
connector.
Check the Motor and
_ END
_
J
OK?
_
Replace the motor
and connector.
YES
Check the separation spring
and. pad?
_
Check the gear.
OK
END
NO
_
YES
OK
Replace the separation
roller unit.
,
Replace
the gear.
YES
END
YES
Replace the operation cover
unit.
To digital(page
board54)
section.
NO
I
of Q1 +24 V?
ls the voltage at emitter
pins 73-77 of ICl outs the phase signal from
put?
___
I
_L
___ unit
Check
power (page
supply72)
section.
YES
Replace IC7.
Repair.
ls
solder
77the
of IC1
OK?at pins 73I
l
I
I --_ofQ1+24V?
Isthev°ltageatc°llect°r
No
YES
Replace IC7.
L
J
Is the voltage at pin 11 of
IC7 less than 2V?
J
[ N----O--- /,
NO /
,_ YES
[
Replace Q1.
YES
-23-
_1
I
_
, I aeplaoe
END II m°t°r I
OK?
I
-I
3o
O
c:
El
r-
m
(/)
-r
O
O
-.I
m
z
¢)
¢)
c_
m
KX-FgO0
I
(2) Paper JAM
r
Check feed route.
I Checks the paper jam lu_ markings
J
I
stuck on the sheet.
up ubjeui.s
OK
Cleaning or replace of
defective parts.
,
END
l
i
OK
Cleaning the each rollers.
(pages 120 and 121 )
I
Check each sensors
movement.
._ END
Confirms that the location tip of the read start
sensor flag works smoothly.
NO
I
_! Repair or replace the
sensor lever
_ END
I
OK
I
To Sensor section,
(page 77)
reacts while the flag is
I Check
moving.il the senso_
Check the separation, feed and pinch rollers are
attached correctly.
Check each rollers
mount.
NO
Repair defective parts.
-_ END
>
Check the white plate.
I
Operation-]
cover
_
NG
I
Wh.ite Plate
OK
Document
Replace the white plate.
_-'_
NG
Operation Board Cover
Fig. A
-24-
KX-F900
I
(3) Multiple feed
f
Confirms whether the pad is dirty or not and
is attached correctly.
Check separation pad.
NO
OK
Cleaning or replace the
. END
defective parts.
0
c
OK
Check the separation
spring is distorting.
Ill
-!0
0
-I
z
OK
I
Cleaning the each rollers.
(pages 120 and 121)
._ END
cm
I'll
1
l
r-
rEND
pad, roller and pressure
eplace the separation
spring.
25--
(3) Multiple feed
l
Confirms whether the pad is dirty or not and
[ is attached correctly.
Check separation pad.
OK
NO
_1 defective
parts.
Cleaning or
replacethe
I
OK
is distorting.
I spring
heckthe
separation
1.
OK
Cleaning the each rollers. I
(pages 120 and 121)
,_ END
I
/
Replace the separation
pad, roller and pressure
spring.
END
[
|
J
-26-
• END
KX-F900
1
(4) Skew
Checks whether the document is folded or
Document setting OK?
I
whether
a different
document
is set at
ape or staples
are size
attached.
Also checks
the same time.
NO
OK
Reset document.
END
-.I
O
C
Checks whether there are same foreign
objects, or missing parts.
Check feed route.
F
m
OK
Cleaning or replace the
defective parts.
END
NO
Check the balance of
both separation pressure
springs.
-r
O
O
.-I
z
Q
¢}
tIll
OK
I
Replacethe
separation
pressure spring.
Cleaning the each rollers.
(page 120 and 121)
END
]I
OK
>END
1'
Check the white plate.
(Refer to Fig. A of page 24)
J
1
Replace white plate.
I
END
NG-'_
Check CCD unit.
NO
J defective
epair or parts.
replace the
END
27
I
OK
END
f.....
KX:-F'O0
.......
I
(6) Black or white vertical lines appear.
I Please copy the test chart.
To thermal head section.
NO_
YES
(page 84)
Please the white plate and target glass thoroughly.
If the dirt cannot be removed, change the white plate.
Cleaning feed route.
NO
-_ END
Replace white plate,
CCD unit etc.
OK
END
To digital board section.
(page 54)
28
KX-F900
(7) (.;an noi cu[ the recording
Check the cutter unit.
paper.
I
I
Cleaning the cutter unit.
(page 121)
-I
0
c
Check the each sensor
levers movement.
r
rn
-I0
0
Replace the defective
parts.
n
z
ffJ
ci
m
Check the each sensor.
Replace the defective
parts.
NG
Test the cutter movement.
I
I
]p
YES
I
[
Check the connector,
gear and arm.
1
Replace the cutter unit.
I
]
I
and
arm. the motor, gear
Replace
OK
Replace
END
29-
the digital board.
/
i ,x:Fooo
I
(8) Skewed sending image
NG
Check the setting of
recording paper
Reset the recording paper.
OK
_v
I
Replace
recording the
paper roller.
]
(9) Expanded print
button
Check locked.
the front lid open
NG
Lock the front lid open
button.
OK
l (pages
leaning120
theand
each
121)
rollers, j
30--
I
KX-F900
(10) When copying u_ printing _,=,abi,u_=ilal sound IS heuld lroll= inu uldt.
In the document convey
-ance element.
(Next page)
-.I
=0
O
C
O0
In the printing section.
I-
I1'1
Confirm the EXIT-GUIDE
unit.
Remove the exit-guide toward you by hand and conlim_ it the carriage is moved
by hand.
-tO
O
,-4
z
¢)
Q
c:
m
I part.
ix/changethe
Confirm if the thermal head, page guide,
recording paper roller, etc. parts are attached
correctly and fix or change the abnormal part.
abnormal
1
Check the drive gear for damage, inserted foreign
objects and also if the pendulum gear spring is
attached correctly.
Recording paper
conveyance. Confirm
the drive section.
NO
Check the other rotation sections, operations,
oscillation sections and fix or change the abnormal
part.
I part.
Fix or change the abnormal
31
KX-F900
I
Confirm the document's
conveyance drive section.
objects or abnormal instatlations.
Check the drive gear for damage, inserted foreign
NO
;
Re-grease
Fix clean or change the
abnormal part.
(Refer
pagelarge
206)amounts to other parts.
Do not to
apply
END
Change the gear and
gear chassis.
-32-
KX-F900
3-b. L;L)MMUNICATION SECTION
Communication
connection (modem)
(Print defect in FAX communication)
Symptom
General Classification
Referring to the printer
Print a communication
Hint
TEST : If only the print communication
is NG and other
printing is OK, there is a high possibility that
-I
3o
O
c
Izl
there is a problem in the digital board's modem
and analog board buss.
i,,,=
(_ Paper is not output
m
The transmitted sending side's signal was not received.
If the DTMF tone is not heard, change the IC11
modem.
If the DTMF tone is heard, there is a problem in the
signal pass route.
Another problem
Ir
Confirm the repair method in the DEFECTIVE
FACSIMILE
SECTION. (Refer to page 34)
Refer to the
A communicationerror
has arose.
_
/"
error code
(Refer to page 41
(_) The picture is out of
order
The sending side's signal was cut during receiving.
(_ The picture was cut
Communication
off halfway
error causes :
1. User (unit)
2. Circuit condition
3. Other party (unit)
It is possible that there are other causes than the user.
Try communication
in redial a few times.
Also, try communication
-33-
speed in 4800 bps or lower.
Z
-tO
O
-I
m
¢)
¢)
C
O
Ill
l
KX-F900
(1) Defective facsimile section
(_) Transmit problem
TX Problem
t
USER STOPPED
*
Message on LCD
STOP key was pressed?
J NO
• Need to service.
• Operation panel section.
(Refer to page 76)
Paper jam?
1
No problem
I YES
1"°
Only some of document
go through?
YES
All of document go
through, but communication result is error.
YES
ADF section.
(Refer to page 23)
Press down READ SENSOR gently, and release
it to be come up immediately.
NG
I NO
Clean up separation
roller using damp cloth.
And try again.
(Rubbing alcohol)
I page.
o feed at all even one
ADF section.
(Refer to page 23)
1
J NG
/
Replace separation roller
with new one.
J
Need to service
• Check, sensor is installed properly?
-34 ¸-
I
] ransmit Error _
TX Problem
KX-F900
Message on LCD
Pre-Feeding of document?
I
YES
l
OK
YES
Document goes through.
i
NO
Doesn't start TX
(Doesn't start feeding?)
_
t
Using auto dial to send?
I
• Increase "596:Transmit
level set" from -10 dBm
to -5 dBm or some.
L
.-I
O
C
NO
r"-
m
(t}
NO
Do you press START key
immediately after dialing?
NG
YES
YES
O
O
.-I
u
z
Q
Q
c
Ill
Ask other party, changing
RX equalizer & increasing TX level•
Decrease TX
level from -10
dBm to - 15
dBm or some.
Check other party's
machine• (Paper out,
Auto answer off...etc.)
NG
Confirm sent image on
RX side has many errors?
J OK
l
• Increase "596:Transmit
level set" from -10 dBm
to -5 dBm or
some• or
• Decrease "596:Transmit level set" from -10
dBm to -12 dBm or
some.
OK
NG
• Decrease "596:Transmit level set" from -10
dBm to -15 dBm or
some•
Check modern TX level.
Change "594: Oversea
DIS detection" to "Detect
at the 2nd time".
parameter of RX error
to more
than. a
I line
Ask value
RX party,
increase
(No available)
I
]
"ALL".
I select"
onfirm to"592:CNG
TX
speed select" to
Change
"717:Transmit
7200,4800
or 2400 bps.
1
Ask other party, increasing TX level.
-35-
I
I......
Kx_,.oo-]
(2) Receive problem
Confirm below before starting troubleshooting.
• Recording paper is installed properly?
I
RX problem
1
I
YES
Can RX something anyway?
NO
Many errors on image?
t YES
J No: Looks OK
I
I
I
Increase "595: RX error limit
value" to some•
NO
FAX ring count (#07)is 2,3 or 4?
YES
Change FAX ring count to 1.
Increase "593: Time between
CED & 300 bps" to some
value.
l
I
I
l
Change"718:Receive
speed
select" to 7200, 4800 or 2400
bps,
l
Ask sender below change.
• Increase "596:lransmit
level set"
]
Error code No. 68 (Echo)?
NO
YES
Decrease "596:Transmit
level set" from -10 dBm to 12 dBm or some.
l
t
select" to 7200, 4800 or 2400
hange"718:Receive
speed
bps.
1
l
• Increase TX level•
I Ask
sender TX
below
change.
• Change
equalizer•
1
Confirm below before starting troubleshooting.
CHECK THERMAL PAPER
CHECK COVER
OVERHEATED (doesn't return automatically,
PAPER JAM
COVER OPEN, etc., it is necessary to reset)
Please refer to "2. User Recoverable Errors" (Refer to page 19) for the above items.
Also, when it actually becomes a hardware deformity, please check each sensor.
-36-
I
I
KX-F900
1
C_ Unit can copy, but can not transmiUreceive
Connect the unit to the
loop simulator.
Switch : TX side T-R
: Connect oscilloscope
-I
l
O
(:
r-
Modem test start
m
(TEST CODE NO. 554)
.1O
O
-I
z
D
1
Is the four signal at
Tip-Ring output?
1"°
Is the signal at pins
44 of ICl 1 output?
Check solder at-thee--pin 8 of IC10 and Q8.
_
NO
Is the voltage at pin 8
of IC10 24 V?
YES
Check the solder at
pins 116 of IC1.
l
Replace IC11.
___connect
the PBX and
EL. line and off-hook.
YES
between pins 44 of
YE_S Check
the Tip-Ring.
trace
IC11 and
l
L
J
_o_
tlhl lii_a_ It:tn iin-_ i _
I YES
Check the trace
between T1 and pin
45 of IC11.
Replace IC11.
J
L
KX-F900
@ Unit can copy, but can not transmit/receive
long distance
or international
communication
The following 2 causes can be considered for this.
Cause 1:
The other party is executing automatic calling, the call has been received by this unit, and this time until response with a CED
or DIS signal has been too long. (In almost case, this unit detects CNG signal and can respond to CED or DIS.) (According to
the ITU-T standard, the communication procedure is stopped when there is no response from the other party within 35sec, so
that the other party releases the line.)
(Time until Response)
Line Connection
Time
False ring
3 sec
l
i--1
I sec
I---1
- .____FaIcslel
_1ngeSic?d T1_ e
Ringing Time
(about 4 sec/ring)
(about 17 sec depending on the
setting user program mode #30)
sCEn_Signal _sD_St
Other party
FAX machine
detects the
.gnal
75 msec
DIS signal.
Max 35 sec
Other party FAX
machine dials
(Cause and Countermeasure)
As shown in the above chart, the total handshaking time must be reduced, but because of the long distance connection and
linking of several stations, the line connection time can not be reduced. Accordingly, the following countermeasures should
be tried.
(A) The TEL/FAX DELAYED RING count should be 1. (user parameter: code No. 06)
(B) As the count of 35 sec is started directly after dialing or directly after the START button has been pressed for models
with a START button, the other party should be called manually, if possible.
Another possibility is entry of two pauses at the end of the auto dial number of the transmission side, In this way, the start
time for the count can be delayed by 2 pauses (about 10sec).
Cause 2:
Erroneous detection because of echo or erroneous detection because of an echo canceler.
FAX 1
j
/o-J
_
FAX 2
t
_
Station
1
S2
Sl
iStation 2
i
I
S I i
s
2 Line Type
2 Line Type
The sea bottom cable or satellite
communication path. (4 Line Type)
(Echo/Echo Canceler)
The signal from FAX1 reaches FAX2 via the stations 1 and 2, but the reflection signal at station 2 also returns via station 1
(echo). As the distance between station 1 and station 2 is long, the echo returns to FAX 1 max. 600msec after transmission,
so than there is the possibility that this signal is detected erroneously as the signal from FAX2 and that trouble is caused. In
the case of a normal call, there is also the possibility that the echo of the own voice will make the call difficult to understand.
For this reason, each station (station 1, station 2) attaches echo cancelers ($1, $2) in case of international lines or long distance lines. For the echo canceler, the level of the transmission signal from FAX 1 is compared with the level of the reception
signal from the FAX2, and when transmission signal is larger, $1 is closed, while $2 is opened when it is smaller. In other
words, with transmission from FAX1, $1 is closed and $2 is open, so that the echo does not return to FAX1.
-38-
I
KX-F900
(Cause and Countermeasure)
(Cause A)
When the training signal is transmitted from FAX1 during the communication procedure at the time of transmission from
FAX1 to FAX2, there is a delay until the echo canceler operates and $1 is closed, so that a part of the head of the training
signal may drop out, normal reception by FAX2 may not be possible, and transmission may not be started.
(Cou ntermeasu re A)
When the international line mode becomes ON service mode (code No. 521), a dummy signal is attached to the head of
the training signal to prevent this problem. As this normally is ON, it is necessary to reconfirm that this has not becomes
OFF. When the international mode is switched OFF, the transmission side will try the training signal three times at each
speed (9600BPS, 4800BPS and 2400BPS), and in case of NG, it will drop the speed by one rank (fall-back). When the international mode is switched ON, each speed will be tried only twice. In other words, the slower speed with fewer errors
are reached more easily. This is done as the line conditions may deteriorate and the picture may be disturbed more easily
during communication in case of international lines or long distance communication, even when the training has been OK.
The default value is ON as preference is given to clearer pictures rather than speed.
(Cause B)
The echo canceler operation is stopped with a signal of 2100Hz (i.e. $1 and $2 become ON).
Accordingly, when FAX1 has executed automatic reception, a CED signal is output, and if this signal should be 2100Hz,
$1 and $2 will become ON. Then the echo of the DIS signal output afterwards may be received and FAX1 may execute
erroneous operation, preventing start of communication.
(Countermeasure B)
In service mode, the CED signal frequency is set to 1100 Hz (code No.520) or the time setting between the CED signal
and the DIS signal is set from 75msec to 500msec in service mode (code No.593). This is done because the echo canceler operation stop mode is cancelled with an interval of 250msec or more.
(Cause C)
KX-F900 shall be assumed for FAX1 and a set of a different company shall be assumed for FAX2.
In case of transmission from the KX-F900 to FAX2, FAX2 executes automatic reception and transmits a CED signal (2100
Hz), followed by a DIS signal. As here the echo cancelers stops as described in cause B, the echo of the DIS signal returns to FAX2. On the other hand, the KX-F900 detects the DIS signal and transmits a DCS signal. In other words, it is
possible that the echo of the DIS signal and the DCS signal transmitted from the KX-F900 reach FAX2 one after the other,
FAX2 executes erroneous detection, and communication are not started.
(Countermeasure C)
When international DIS detection setting is made effective in service mode (code No.594), the KX-F900 does not respond
to the first DIS signal and returns a DCS signal only for the second DIS signal.
In other words, there is an interval of 250msec between transmission of the first and the second DIS signal, so that the
echo cancelers operation recovers and no echo is generated for the second DIS signal.
Note:
When the other FAX does not respond with a DCS signal after DIS signal transmission,
times for trial.
-39-
the DIS signal is transmitted three
.-I
O
C
00
I-
Ill
"IO
O
-I
z
Q
Q
c
o
m
KX-F900
Summary:
Long distance and international communication
operatio_
COUNTERMEASURE
SYMPTOM
1. The TEL/FAX DELAYED RING count should be 1.
(user parameter: code No. 06)
2. If possible, manual transmission should be made from
the transmission side.
3. If possible, two pauses should be inserted at the end of
the auto dial number of the transmission side.
Does not receive in automatic mode.
4. If possible, the Function Selector Switch should be
switched to FAX.
1. Confirm the international line mode ON.
(service mode: code No. 521)
2. International DIS detection setting is made
effective. (service mode: code No. 594)
Does not transmit.
1. The time setting between the CED signal and the DIS
signal is set to 500msec. (service mode: code No. 593)
2. The CED frequency is set to 1100Hz.
(service mode: code No. 520)
Does not receive.
(_) Unit can copy, but the transmission
(Long distance or international
and reception image is incorrect
communication
operation)
This depends widely on the transmission and reception capability of the other FAX set and the line conditions.
The countermeasures for this set are shown below.
Transmission Operation:
The transmitting speed is set to 4800BPS (service mode: code No. 717) or select overseas mode. (Individual correspondence according to the other set is desirable.)
Reception Operation:
If 80% or more of the reception should be incorrect, set the receiving speed to 4800BPS. (service mode: code No. 718)
-40-
(2) Communication
KX-F900 .....
error functions
(_ Operation:
1. Press the MENU button 3 times.
2. Press the START/SET button and v button 4 times.
3. Press the START/SET button.
4. Print out.
(_ Error code table:
CODE
RESULT
MODE
SYMPTOM
Countermeasure
1
' --I
PRESSED THE STOP
KEY
TX& RX
Communication
was interrupted with the STOP button
DOCUMENT JAMMED
TX
Document paper is jammed
NO DOCUMENT
TX
PRINTER OVERHEATED
RX
No document paper
Thermal head is overheated
PAPER OUT
RX
Out of thermal paper
THE COVER WAS OPENED
PAPER JAMMED
NO RESPONSE
TX & RX
Cover is open
RX
Recording paper is jammed
TX
Transmission
41
COMMUNICATION
ERROR
TX
DCN is received after DCS transmission
42
COMMUNICATION
ERROR
TX
FTT is received after transmission of 2400BSP training signal
3
43
COMMUNICATION
ERROR
TX
No response after post message is transmitted three times
4
44
COMMUNICATION
ERROR
TX
RTN and PIN are received
5
is finished when T1 TIMER is expired
1
2
46
COMMUNICATION
ERROR
RX
No response after FTT is transmitted
6
48
COMMUNICATION
ERROR
RX
No post message
7
49
COMMUNICATION
ERROR
RX
RTN is transmitted
8
PIN is transmitted
50
COMMUNICATION
ERROR
RX
51
COMMUNICATION
ERROR
RX
PIN is transmitted
8
RX
Reception is finished when T1 TIME is expired
9
10
NO RESPONSE
(to PRI-Q)
8
53
COMMUNICATION
ERROR
TX
DCN is received after transmission
54
COMMUNICATION
ERROR
RX
DCN is received after DIS transmission
of NSC and DTC
11
57
COMMUNICATION
ERROR
TX
300BPS error
12
58
COMMUNICATION
ERROR
RX
DCN is received after FTT transmission
13
59
COMMUNICATION
ERROR
TX
DCN responds to post message
14
64
COMMUNICATION
ERROR
TX
Polling is not possible
15
68
COMMUNICATION
ERROR
RX
No response at the other party after MCF or CFR is transmitted
13
70
COMMUNICATION
ERROR
RX
DCN is received after CFR transmission
13
72
COMMUNICATION
ERROR
RX
Carrier is cut when image signal is received
16
FF
COMMUNICATION
ERROR
TX& RX
Modem error
12
TX=TRANSMISSION
RX=RECEPTION
-41 -
I
KX-F900
I
(_ Countermeasure
f
)
Transmission is finished when T1 TIMER is expired.
Turn ON the FAX monitor function and transmit the data to the
same receiver.
NO
¸
I
Confirm service parameter and
compatibility of both caller's and
receiver's FAX machines.
chine is set to the reception mode or
I answering
onfirm if the
receiver'smessage
FAX mamachine's
is on.
C
2
")
NO
NO
_, YES
_per
the receiver's
N_ FAX
or mechanical errorC,-/"
Ask the receiver to cancel password
of the receiver's FAX machine or set
the caller's password corresponding
to the receiver's and transmit the
data again.
YES
Ask the receiver to set the receiver's
FAX machine to the receivable mode
and transmit again.
Confirm service parameter and
compatibility of both caller's and
receiver's FAX machines.
-42-
Confirm the receiver's FAX machine
was set to the reception mode when
the previous communication was NG.
DCN is received after DOS transmission.
Confirm the receiver's FAX machine.
_thlS
YES
KX-F900
FT-i is received after transmission
training signal.
Perform communication
test us-
ing the LOOP simulator.
of 2400BPS
I
I
YES
-I
0
c
I-
I'll
co
'10
0
-I
m
z
.1
(TESTModem
CODE test
NO.554)
(1) Raise the level of transmission. (Do not
raise the level above the standard of each
country. If the communication should be
OK at the level beyond the standard, it is
attributable to line condition or the
receiver's machine sensitivity condition.)
If no effect is obtained.
(2) Slow down the transmission start speed
and taransmit to the receiver again.
c:
n
Ill
YES
If this error frequently occurs at
the receiver, perform transmission in the above-mentioned
mode on the receiver.
Ask the receiver to perform FAX
communication from the receiver to the caller.
YES
End
the receiver.
I with
Perform
voice communication
1
rupted by noises or in the cross
talk. If it is not, wait until the line
satisfactory
foriscorrect
comI isheck
if the line
not intermunication.
-43-
I
No response after post message is transmitted
three times.
'Inquire the receiver if the
caller's document is facsimiled
correctly.
Ask the service section of the
receiver's FAX machine to confirm the machine condition.
(
5
)
l
RTN and PIN are received.
3.1
6
No response after FTT is transmitted.
Perform communication
test us-
ing the LOOP simulator and
check the machine reception
condition.
--
Modem test
(TEST CODE NO.554)
t
YES
6.1
,_
: No problem on the machine
!
Perform voice communication
with the NG caller.
Check if the line is not interrupted by noises or in the cross
talk, If it is not, wait until the line
is satisfactory for correct communication.
44-
I
I
)
hardware.
KX-F900
7
)
]
No post message
Turn ON the FAX monitor function and have the receiver transmit the data.
.-I
O
C
Ask the service section of the
sender's FAX machine for examination.
(Receive Complete)
NO
I
I""
Ill
"IO
O
.-I
YES
NO
Try again.
_-_
Decrease the RX speed.
(
8
)
RTN is transmitted.
PIN
PIN is
is transmitted.
transmitted (to PRI-Q).
Perform communication
test us-
ing the LOOP simulator and
check the machine reception
condition.
NO
Modem test
(TEST CODE NO.554)
Turn ON the FAX monitor function and have the receiver in
question transmit the data
again.
NO
(
6.1
End
)
-45-
]
7.1
_
_1
I Kx-F'O0
I
(:
9
)
Perform communication
Reception is finished when T1 TIME is expired.
test us-
ing the LOOP simulator and
check the machine reception
condition.
NO
Modem test
(TEST CODE NO.554)
Turn ON the FAX monitor function and have the receiver in
question transmit the data
again.
YES
NO
NO
Confirm if the receiver's FAX
machine was set to receivable
mode.
End
r, 61 )
46-
.........
}
KX-F900
10
DCN is received after transmission
of NSC and DTC.
Confirm if a mechanical trouble
occurred, e.g. transmission was
interrupted or document was out
of place, on the receiver side
(being polled).
,-I
O
C
NO
i-
1
Ask the receiver to set the poll
mode again and perform polling.
(
11
)
I
amination.
J
occurred, e.g. the caller interConfirm
if atransmission.
mechanical trouble
rupted the
NO
(
12
_
Ask the service section of the
caller's FAX machine for examination.
300BPS error
Modem error
Check the hardware of the peripherals of the modem.
-47-
-r
O
O
,-I
Z
Q
Ask the service section ofihe
receiver/s FAX machine for ex-
DCN is received after DIS transmission.
Have the caller transmit the data
again.
rn
(=
Ill
DCN is received after FTT transmission.
l
No response at the other party after MCF or
CFR is transmitted.
DCN is received after CFR transmission.
Confirm if a mechanical trouble
occurred, e.g. the caller interrupted the transmission.
NO
6.1
Ask the caller to transmit the
data again.
(
14
l
)
[
]
DCN responds to post message.
Confirm if a mechanical trouble
occurred, e.g. the receiver interrupted the reception.
YES
l
Perform voice communication
with the NG receiver.
l
Check if the line is not interrupted by noises or in the cross
talk. If it is no, wait until the line
is satisfactory for correct communication.
48-
......
Ask the receiver to set the
receiver's FAX machine to the
receivable mode and communi
cate again.
I ......
Kx-_90o
........
I
(
15
)
Polling is not possible.
Confirm if a mechanical trouble
occurred, e.g. transmission was
interrupted or document was out
of place, on the receiver side
(being polled).
21
OI
CI
IXII
NO
I'"
I
ill I
t_l
____
Ask the receiver to set the Poll
mode again and perform polling.
(
16
-)
Modem test
(TEST CODE NO.554)
(
6.1
•
Ask the service section of the
receiver's FAX machine for examination.
Carrier is cut when image signal is received.
Perform communication
test using the LOOP simulator and
check the machine reception
condition.
l
mr
)
49_
1
.-,,,
zl
QI
/
J
Cl
f
m
I
KX-F900
(3) Remote programming
While a user is talking on the phone, a technician call set the function parameters of customer's
unit from service center.
1. A call comes in service center.
2. A technician gets a claim from a customer.
3. He says to the customer "Please change to the speaker phone if talking with the portable handset. And then please press
MEMU button and wait for a moment".
4. The technician dial '9,0,0,0, _' from his telephone.
The customer's unit is set REMOTE PROGRAMMING MODE and generates remote beep sound.
He hears "Piiii' (one long beep).
5. He presses 3 digits code of service function written in service manual by dial keypad. (See page 52)
And presses _ (set).
The customer's unit receives the service code.
He hears "Piiii" (one long beep).
6. He presses 1-3 digits value of function written in service manual by dial keypad.
And presses _ (set).
The customer's unit receives the service value.
He hears "Pii Pii" (double short beeps).
7. Then he can repeat from step 5.
8. When a technician wishes to end the REMOTE PROGRAMMING MODE, he says to the customer,
"Please press the STOP button to exit the REMOTE PROGRAMMING MODE. And then press the SP-Phone button".
Note:
1) To enter the REMOTE PROGRAMMING MODE is necessary in Step 3. Because the unit can not easily enter the
REMOTE PROGRAMMING by DTMF signal from the other party.
2) If he presses wrong buttons when his operation is in step 5 or 6. he hears "Pii Pii Pii" (triple short beeps). Then he can
repeat from the same step.
3) When customer's unit finishes transmitting a list (No. 991,992, 994,999), he can have a voice conversation.
And he can continue the REMOTE PROGRAMMING MODE.
4) When customer's unit start transmitting a list (No. 991,992,994,999),
he does not hear "Pii Pii" (double short beeps).
The unit generate CNG sound.
50-
KX-F900
1_ Summary of remote programming mode
Customer press STOP
key and press the
SP-PHONE button.
sTART
Enter the REMOTE
PROGRAMMING ID 9,0,0,0 *
END
J
,-I
I
O
c
00
REMOTE PROGRAMMING
MODE "Piiii"
I-
m
g)
"1"
O
O
--I
z
Press 3 digits code of service
function and then press -_ (set)
I Piiress
Pii" mistaken key "Pii
Pii" mistaken key"Pii
I Piiress
_v
I
t
SERVICE SETTING MODE
"Piiii"
l
Press 1-3 digits value of function and then press -X- (set)
l
SETTING THE FUNCTION "Pii
Pii"
-51 -
ci
o
m
I
I
[
KX'FgO0
I
C_)Program mode table
Set Value
Function
Set date and time
002
Your Io.qo
003
Your telephone number
Print transmission report
Auto receive mode
0O4
005
Default
mm/dd/yy hh:mm
Remote setting
NG
NG
NG
1:ERROR/2:ON/3:OFF
1:FAX
2:EXT TAM
ERROR
FAX
OK
1 ring
TEL
OK
OK
OK
OK
008
FAX ring count
Manual receive mode
1 to 4 rings
009
012
TEL/FAX delayed ring
Remote TAM activation
1 to 4 rings
1 :ON/2:OFF
Logo position
Journal auto print
Overseas mode
1 :OUT/2:IN
1 ring
OFF/ID=I 1
OUT
1 :ON/2:OF F
ON
OK
1 :ON/2:OFF
OK
Junk mail prohibitor
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
OFF
OFF/ID=22
OFF
NG
OK
007
021
022
023
024
025
030
Delayed transmission
Silent FAX recoqnition rin.q
031
039
Rin.q detection
LCD contrast
040
1:TEL, 2:TEL/FAX
NG
OK
NG
NORMAL!DARKER
3 rings
OFF
NORMAL
Silent Detection
1:ON/2:OFF
ON
OK
041
046
Remote FAX activation code
ON/OFF
Friendly reception
ON/ID= •
ON
NG
OK
070
O8O
FAX pager
Set default
1:ON/2:OFF
ON/OFF
501
502
Pause time set
Flash time set
503
520
Dial speed set
CED frequency select
1:10/2:20pps
1:2100/2:1100Hz
International mode select
Auto standby select
1:ON/2:OFF
1:ON/2:OFF
523
544
Receive equalizer select
Documentfeed positionadiustmentvalueset
1:ON/2:OFF
550
551
Memory clear
ROM check
553
554
Monitor on FAX communication
"START" push
"START" push
1:OFF/2:P-B/3:ALL
521
522
3 to 6 rings
0:OFF/1 :A/2:B/3:CI4:D
select
OFF
NG
YES/NO
001 ~600X 100msec
NO
O50
NG
OK
01~99X 10msec
70
10
OK
OK
2100
OK
ON
ON
OK
OFF
OK
OK
01-99 step
Modem test
Scanner test
"START" push
"START" push
556
557
Motor test
"START" push
LED test
558
LCD test
"START" push
"START" push
I:ON/2:OFF
555
559
56O
561
Paper jam detection select
Cutter select
1:ON/2:OFF
562
Key test
Cutter test
563
57O
CCD position adjustment value set
Break % select
571
572
573
ITS auto redial time set
ITS auto redial line disconnection
TEL ring count
time set
OK
NG
OK
NG
NG
OFF
OK
NG
NG
NG
NG
NG
ON
ON
Press any key
"START" push
00-30 mm
OK
OK
NG
NG
OK
1:61/2:67%
61%
OK
00~99
001 ~999
014
OK
030
OK
01 ~99
15
OK
-52-
KX-F900
....
590
Function
........
Set Value
FAX auto redial time set
591
FAX auto redial line disconnection
592
ONG transmit select
time set
Default
Remote setting
OK
00-99
05
001-999
O45
All
OK
75ms
OK
1:1 stJ2:2nd
1st
OK
1:OFF/2:ALL/3:AUTO
1:75/2:500/3:1 s
OK
593
594
Time between CED and 300 bps
Overseas DIS detection select
595
Receive error limit value set
001-999
100
OK
596
Transmit level set
-10
OK
700
701
Ext. TAM OGM time
Silent detect time
-15~00dBm
01~99 sec.
OK
01-99 x 100 msec
10
5O
702
Ext. TAM ring count
0-9
5
OK
OK
717
Transmit speed select
1:9600/2:7200/3:4800/4:2400bps
9600bps
OK
718
Receive speed select
719
721
722
Ringer off in TEL/FAX mode
Pause tone detect
Redial tone detect
1:9600/2:7200/3:4800/4:2400bps
1:ON/2:OFF
9600bps
ON
OK
OK
1:ON/2:OFF
1:ON/2:OFF
ON
ON
OK
732
Auto disconnect cancel time
350msec
763
771
Friendly reception CNG detection select
T1 timer
1:350msec/2:1800msec/3:OFF
1:10S/2:20S/3:30S
815
Sensor check
844
909
991
Original setting
Handset remote FAX ACT
Transmit basic list
992
994
999
1:35sec/2:60sec
"START" push
I:NORMAIJ2:LIGHT/3:DARKER
20S
35sec
NORMAL
OK
OK
I"
m
"1"
O
O
.--I
z
OK
c
NG
OK
ill
NG
OK
Transmit advanced list
1:START
OK
Transmit iournal report
Transmit service list
1:START
1:START
OK
OK
-53-
O
C
OK
0-9, ,_ 2-4 digits
1:START
OK : Can set the valve by remote programming featureor print list
NG : Can not set the valve.
-I
KX-F900
3-7. DIGITAL BOARD SECTION
• How to fix the digital board that don't start up the unit.
(1) OVER VIEW
If you see a human being down on the street, what will you do?
You may talk to him. But if he doesn't answer, you check his breath or pulse, don't you.
Why do we check them? Breath or pulse, we needs must do it to live. We start to check from most basic things to live.
Checking (or repair) the Board doesn't work is similar to it.
We should start to check from most basic things to work.
What is most basic to work?
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
POWER SUPPLY (+5V, +24V)
SOLDERING of ICs
OSCILLATOR (CLK) (SYSTEM CLK: 24MHz, MODEM CLK: 24MHz)
RESET
SIGNALS
ADDRESS BUS (A0~A15)
DATA BUS (D0-D7)
READ, WRITE (RD, WR)
CS (Chip select) (ROMCS, MDMCS)
"Board doesn't work" means that board has any problems in these most basic things.
This document is going to explaining the order of repair with flow chart at first and then explaining individual point of
those items in detail.
MEMO -MDM:
CLK:
ROM:
RAM:
RTC:
adr:
RD:
WR:
modem (modulator/demodulator)
clock
read only memory
random access memory (SRAM: static RAM. DRAM: dynamic RAM)
real time clock
address
read
write
54-
[- ....KX-FgO0
-]
(2) CHECK
LCD ON THE MACHINE
If the digital board had broken, machine does not react at all and black square will be on the LCD.
There are 5 processes to display some letters (12:00 AM) on LCD.
I
If processes were not complete, black square will be on the LCD.
]
LCD
NG
1. POWER ON
J
If defective is in the power
line, LCD doesn't change.
2. OSC
black square
IDDDD
3. RESET
1,
black square
IBDDD
LCD
NG
4. Read the data in the ROM
(program start)
),
1
black square
LCD
NG
5. Make peripherals initial
J,
black square
LCD
12:00 AM
Monitoring (KEY IN)
[FIDDD
1
1
-55-
LDDDD
m
c:
o
m
LOD
NG
r-"
-10
0
-I
z
LCD
NG
-I
_0
0
I
I x, ,0o1
(3) PROCEDURE FROM OUR EXPERIENCE
plug the AC cord
TO FIX
I
Power ON
J
-
•-_ Check
,,-- No reaction
LCD
power line
I
(Refer to page 58)
Black squares or any charactor come.
I
No reaction means that Power line is
broken (short-circuit).
Turn over and take
bottom cover off.
BE CAREFUM
GND
• This is the TEST with AC power on.
Oscilloscope
AC
[]
[]
[] r_
O
like a wave form below
Is pin 101 of ASlC 5V?
not 5V
RESET is fixed at 5V
Check the voltge of
testing points.
(Refer to next page)
56-
r
Check detail.
(Refer to page 58)
KX-F900
j
Pleas check the status (voltage) of pin 56, pin 58 and pin 60 of IC1.
These status may tell you defective point. (Please use the ROM for IC status checked) [Ref No. EC22]
Oscilloscope
or
TESTER
DDDDD
IO
[] m
0
0
-I
O
C:
AC
status (voltage) of check points
This could be
Please check here!
IC1 (ASIC)
defective point
pin 56
pin 58
pin 60
SRAM
IC3
0v
0v
5v
R68,R69
IC3,1C1 (pin 48)
MODEM
ICll
0V
5v
5v
IC11 (pin 95, pin 116),1C11 ,L2.,L5,RA1 ,RA2
R39,C87
OPE.PANEL
IC301
5v
0v
0v
IC1 (pin 14-17, pin 20)
R79-R86
Thermal Head
TEMP.
5v
0v
5v
R47~R49, C37-C39
IC1 ( pin 38, pin 49)
¢)
c
Note: If the thermal head temperature is
abnormal, "CALL SERVICE" will appear in
the dispaly.
Cordless
ALL OK
0V
5v
0v
0v
0v
0v
I--
Ill
co
"1O
O
-I
z
Change the Cordless Base unit P.C.B.
Please check soldering and conduction of these components.
If it is no problem, replace ICs.
If you still have problem, please go to "3-1 check detail" (page 58).
-57-
Ill
i
KX-F900
]
(1) CHECKING DETAIL
Please check the soldering first, it comes from our experience.
Checking soldering
Big ICs and resistor arry
Visual check soldering.
IC1
IC3
ICll
RA1, RA2
RA3, RA4
OK
Checking soldering
5V
CPUCLK
SYS. CLK (pin 96 of ICl) 12 MHz?
OV
XTEST
Check wave form on the
ICs and BUS line.
(Refer to page 60)
1
Replace IC.
(2) POWER SUPPLY (5V, 24V)
(_ With AC power off
Please check Short Circuit of power line.
1. 5V line at CN1 between pin 6 and 4 pin, is it short?
2. 24V line at CN1 between pin 2 and 3 pin, is it short?
(_) With AC power on
Please check voltage of power line.
1. 5V line at CN1 between pin 6 and 4 pin is 5V?
2. 24V line at CN1 between pin 2 and 3 pin is 24V?
58
KX-F900
(3) OSCILLATOR
(CLK)
SYSTEM CLK: 24 MHz,
MODEM CLK: 24 MHz
24 MHz SYSTEM CLK
(pin 96 of ASIC:IC1)
• This point is 1/2the MHz of the
SYSTEM CLK 12MHz.
24 MHz MODEM CLK
(pin 70 of MODEM:IC11)
• This point is 1/2the MHz of the
MODEM CLK 12MHz.
5V
50 nsec/div
0V
.-I
_0
O
C
_0
5V
50 nsec/div
I"
rrl
¢/)
-r
O
O
-I
0V
¢)
C
m
(4) RESET
m
RESET signal makes system initial state just after power on.
If RESET signal is defect, please check IC11 and components that is connected
Check _
to these ICs.
voltage 5v?
power line 5V
pow_n_J
RE-CET
5v
(pin 101of ICl : ASIC)
reset time apx. 175msec
NG
0v
NG
4.3msec
This wave form means another problem, it is not caused by RESET circuit
Please see the item : "CHECK WAVE FORM"
-59-
[
KX-F900
(5) CHECK WAVE FORM
This check needs 4 channels digital storage oscilloscope higher than 400 MHz.
I
START
]
If still no reaction replace
ASlC and check again.
NO
I
oscillation (12 MHz),
heck again power line,
RESET?
JYES
j
Address to SRAM or
MODEM may unsuceedo
(Refer to pages 63-65)
NO
._
__ o0a0e6
Watch dog error frequently
makes RESET active because
address or data is confused
Active
term
o,_-_-6-E_n_
,_ent,y_'_L
by any problem on Address,
Data bus.
l
Check operation panel I/F
Check the lines that connect to CN5
1
no problem
Check bus line
Address to SRAM or
• short circuit
MODEM may unsuceed.
from ASlC (IC1).
• open
If no problem on the lines replace
• voltage
ASIC (ICl).
]
Refer to pages
63~65.
/
/
-60--
KX-F900
Let's observe the wave form to fix the defective IC.
name
Please observe A0, DO, ROMCE, RD by using digital oscilloscope.
Below graph show you the wave form that is observed when unit
(.board) is working correctly.
Both graph are good wave. Wave
form is rapidly changing by one (like below graph). Because many
kind of data or program are rapidly executed,
so you can see some kind of wave forms that is seem to below
graph.
CH1
5V/div'
CH2
5V/div H1 W1
CH3
.5V/div
CH4
5V/div
W1
500ns/div
Length 100 0.0v___
W2
b_sldiv
^ Length lk
_amp=mg Normal
20Msps
Marker 1
T
-13.75p.s
V
5.0 V
Marker 2
VT
70520
p_
&T
I/&T
z_V
i
{
location
AO
DO
ROMCE
RD
pin
pin
pin
pin
: pin
: pin
SRAMCS:
MDMCS
132 of ASlC (IC1)
131 of ASlC (IC1)
22 of ROM (IC2)
24 of ROM (IC2)
20 of SRAM(IC3)
54 of MODEM(ICl 1)
Time/div
Wl
!
W21
Time Base
External
21.25tus
OK
Time
sampling
]
Roll
Off
Normal
20Msps
Marker 1
T
-13.751_s
V
5.0 V
Marker 2
_V
Time/div
Wl
t
Time Base
DO
External
:
i
!
i
:
i
70.5Op._ ........ i.................
;......
.
i
:
Ro:cs
...........
i..........................
:........
........
T
V
aT
1/&T
i
_ A0
:
:
:
i
21.25_s
47.06k Hz
-4.8 V
RD
_
OK
Time
Roll
Timel_Base I
Off
O
t-
"1O
O
-I
z
Q
Q
c
Ill
ROMCS
CH1
5V/div
CH2
5V/div
HIWI
OH3
5V/div 10.0V_
CH4
5V/div
Wl
500ns/div
Length
100
W2.
5ps/div
Length
lk
-I
ira
A0
47.06kHz
-4.8 V
Time Base I
I
]
I
-61 -
[.....
Kx-Fgoo
....]
The graphs below show you the wave form that is observed when unit (board) doesn't work. (A3 is intentionally opened at
pin 135 of ASIC in this board.)
Please check that active (low level) term of ROMCE is longer than good wave form, **ROMCE is active (low level) excepting RESET is active.** and RESET is frequently coming on every 4 msec.
In the case of this wave form ASlC (ICl), ROM (102) or on the way of bus line route is possibly defect. If soldering, conductance is no problem, we need to replace these ICs.
'1'Trigger
CH 1
5V/div
H1 W1
CH2
5V/div
CH3
5V/div 10.0V_
CH4
5V/div
Wl
500ns/div
Length
100
W2
51_s/div
A Length
lk
;sampling Normal
20Msps
Marker 1
T
V
Marker
AV
Time/div
Wl
A0
lime
Base
DO
External
9_,.651_
:
i
:
_
:
2
i
AT
l/AT
_" CH1/2 z_ MEM1A MEM2
-2.15p.s
i RoMcs
........
i ........ ::
........ i .....................
4
465. lk Hz
0.2 V
i
r_!iongi
i
i
RDi
NG
........ i........ i ...... :
!
:
i
Time
Time Base I
Roll
I
off
I
CH1
5V/div
CH2
5V/div H1 Wl
CH3
5V/div
CH4
5V/div 10.0V_
Wl
1ms/div
Length
100
W2
10ms/div
Length
1k
Sampling
Normal
10ksps
_:i
Marker 1
T
576.5ms
V
4.8 V
Marker 2
T
15.0ms
V
0.2 V
tTrigger
_CH1/2
AMEM1 &MEM2
Time/div
o Wl
i A0
ili ii! i--;......................................
AT
l/z_T
AV
•
:
DO ;
i'i ...... _
.....
.
"'_"
W2
'_l_4=l_
Time Base
!i'"'_
_:
"'i'
i_
External
_:
NG
RO_ICS
-561.5ms
::: ...... ::' ]oo::10ngi
=.................................
1.781 Hz
-4.6 V
: Ft$_
Time
Time__Base I
:
-40.0V
575.0ms
o":t
i
I
585.0ms
I
-62-
I
I
i
KX-F900
Please observe A0, DO, ROMCE, MDMCS.
Below graph show you the wave form that is observed when ullit (board) is wuiking _,uJtuutiy. _oth graph are good wave.
i'Trigger
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
Wl,
5V/div
5V/div H1 W1
5V/div 10.0V
5V/div
51xs/div
Length
lk
W2.
51zs/div
^
Le,.ngth
lk
bamp,ng
Marker
_'CH1/2
z_MEM1AMEM2
:
Time/div
Wl
li_l'l_.-]
A0
F- .....
Wl_
t O
D0_
Normal
20Msps
i
Time Base
_
External
1
705OIJ._
AT
l/AT
ROMCS
i
!
OK
478.2 Hz
-4.6 V
MDMCS
:
-40.OV
2083.20Fs
;;"1
CH1
5V/div
CH2
5V/div HI Wl
CH3
5V/div 10.OV_
CH4
5V/div
Wl.
5p,s/div
Length
1k
W2.
511s/div
^ Length
lk
bamplmg
t
1
Marker
T
V
2
I
OCH1/2
z_MEM1 &MEM2
_ AO
Time Base
:
i
External
i
7.50#s
5.0 V
!
!
i
i
i
ROMCS
z_T -2369.20ps
l/z_T
422.1 Hz
z_V
4.6 V
OK
!
i
MDMCS
i
-40.or
i
i
:
i
:
i
"
2384.60gs
Time__Base t
Time/div
Wl
DO i
vT23700
%
Time
:
:
i 2133.20ps
I
tTrigger
Normal
20Msps
Marker
m
I
:
m
[/]
-1"
-I
Z
-2091.30p, S
z_V
J
,
O
O
TV 20985.801a_
Marker 2
TV
i
243,_.60gs
o. 1
F:loll
I
-63-
I
C
m
O
Ill
[
KX-Fg00
The graphs below show you the wave form that is observed when MODEM doesn't work. (Oscillation is not intentionally
supplied to MDM.)
Please compare OK form to NG form.
MDMCS (pin 54 of ICl 1) signal is coming many times more than good wave form.
In the case of this wave form MODEM doesn't work. If soldering, conductance is no problem, we need to replace MODEM
(IC11).
fTrigger
CH1
5V/div
H1 W1
CH2
5V/div
CH3
5V/div I0.0V_
CH4
5V/div
Wl
5ps/div
Length
1k
W2
511s/div
^
Length
1k
_ampJing
Marker
_CH1/2
z_MEM1AMEM2
Time/div
Wl
A0
Time Base
DO
Normal
20Msps
External
1
vT
3520951i_
Marker 2
T
V
_o%
ROMCS
z_T
l/AT
NG
2.895k
-345.451is
Hz _
4.8 V
AV
! MDI£1CS i
:
,,,
!
i
i
many MDMCS
Time
Time Base ]
Roll
l
off
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
Wl
5V/div
5V/div
5V/div
5V/div
I
I
Time/div
Wl
H1 Wl
10.0V
A0
Wl_
W2
S Lengtl
ampling
Marker
1
Marker
2
Time Base
DO
Normal
20Msps
External
vT _%.9_
Tv 75_°_v
AT
l/aT
AV
-345.45pS
NG
2.895kHz
4.8 V
i
MDMCS
!
!
:
:
i
i
i
.................
iz0°.many__
Time
-40.0V
1347.40#s
i
;
I
Time Base
-64-
1397_.40#s I
I
I
KX-F900
Below graph show you the wave form that is observed when SRAM doesn't work. (BUS line at SRAM is intentionally
opened.) Please compare OK (under) to NG (upper). SRAMCS (pin 20 of IC3) signal is coming like clock.
In the case of this wave form SRAM access doesn't work. If soldering, conductance is no problem, we need to replace
SRAM (IO3).
tTrigger
CH 1
5V/div
H1 W1
CH2
5V/div
CH3
5V/div 10.0Vi
CH4
5V/div
Wl
51_s/div
Length
1k
W2
51u,s/div
^
Length
lk
_amp,ng
_'CH1/2
zxMEM1AMEM2
Time/div
Wl
A0
-I
Time Base
O
Normal
20Msps
Marker
1
Marker
T
2
C
External
Tv t372_..0._
m
O
O
v
-4
Z
AT -1364.90ps
1/_T
732.7 Hz
z_V
-4.8 V
Q
Q
C
SRAMCS
m
NG
Like clock
Time
Time__Base I
Roll
Off
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
Wl
5V/div
5Vtdiv H1 W1
5V/div 10.0V_
5V/diM
21_s/div
Length
400
W2
5tls/div
Length
1k
bamp,ng
Normal
20Msps
Marker 1
Time/div
wt
A0
Time Base
DO
External
vT,37 :00.
Marker
2
i
.........................
, ......
:
i
:
i
i
ROMCS
............................
i................
i........
V
AT
-1364.90ps
l/AT
AV
732.7
0.0 _z
SRAMCS
::
:
i
:
OK
Time
-4o.ov
1362.:40Fs
Time__Base I
;,I'1
I
65
I
1382-:.40ps
L
q
KX-F900
I
(6) CHECK SOLDERING
We should check soldering at first.
Because many problem are caused by a defective soldering.
I How to Visual-Check the soldering I
Defective soldering (shorted, un-welded, oxidized...) doesn't have a good looking outward.
In order words outward (gloss, brightness, form) is important for soldering. So we should do visual inspection.
I A basis of soldering is skirfl I
Smooth skirt is shaped by surface tension as melting cream solder in reflow machine or lifting P.C. Board
from DIP.
Section of Soldering Skirt
SMT (QFP. SOP) parts : ASIC, MDM, SRAM
SMT (PLCC) parts : CODEC
./__
skirt
skirt
//
i
Leaded parts
Chip parts
sJirt
66-
|
Resistor array
KX-F900
COLD (nu-welded)
SOLDERING
CHIP PARTS (section)
SMT PARTS
cold soldering
-I
O
C
cold soldering
I-
I'll
LEADED
-I-
PARTS
RA
RESISTOR
ARRY
O
O
,-I
Z
C
(section)
I'tl
cold soldering
cold soldering
SHORTED
SOLDERING
SMT PARTS
shorted
LEADED
PARTS
II
I}
CHIP PARTS
(secti°n)
shorted
-67-
I
.....
I
3-8. ANALOG
BOARD
SECTION
For example
]
Returns from the custorner has 2 of the defects.
complaint
X HANDSET transmitting
X SP-PHONE transmitting
How can you repair this unit?
We usually check the signal flow with the circuit schematic.
(If defect is only one item, we check only one of the signal routes.
Maybe something is defective on that route.)
If there is more than one defect, you need to check some of the routes.
At first, you should check the area where there are common components
these signal routes.
Please see the check sheet (next page).
68
on
KX-F900
(SYMPTOM)
ITEMS TO CHECK
,
J
IN
signal
#
ROUTE
I_
]
OUT
!
!
SP-PHONE
Tx _
MIC-J270-C 138-1C109(13-27)-R145-1C 151 (75-63)-C203-R210-1C201
TEL LINE
I
I
(2-1)-C202- R201 -T101 -
I
[SP-PHONE
Rx
TEL LINE-T101 -R202-C205-1C201 (6-7)-C210-C173-R172-R
IC109 (22-30)-C145-1C109
--
(4-7)-R146-C146-1C151
173-C174-1C 151 (59-71)-C142-R 143-
(40-38)-R245-C245-1C241
(4-5,8)-SPEAKER
_RTABLE
HANOSET
MIC_R283_C214_Q208_C233_R232_IC202(19_17)_C232_R231_IC202(16_13)_R230_
I PortableHandset Tx
R228-R227-1C202(11-10)-C225-R229-VR201
C409-C408-Q402-C405-Q401
-R458-R410-TX
VCO-R459-C412-R460-1C401
-L422-FL401-L421-C492-L406-ANTTENA-
(4-2)-
-.,I
:;0
O
i"m
RFUNITL306-C392-L319-
"IO
O
R322-R335-CN301 (3)- CORI)LIFSS
BASE
UNIT
CN502(3)-VR501-C540-R593-Q511-R505-C553-C536-R579-I
m
R578-R577-1C502(2-5) R576-C534-R575-R562-R561 -R557-R558-C561 -L506-CN501 (5)- ANALOG
OOARD z
63
CN153(5)-R 160-Cl 59-1C151 (50-63)-C203-R210-1C201 (2-1)-C202-R201 -T101 (2-5)-C 109-R11663
t-Q101-D 101-R102-L105-R101-POS101-TEL
JACK
FL302-Q304-C322-Q303-C328-1C301
Portable
(23-13)-FL303-Q305-C338-1C302(16-3)-FL304-1C302(5-9)-
ANALOG
8OARO
TEL JACK-POS101-R101-L105-R102-D101-Q101-R116-C109-T101
Handset Rx
IC201 (6-7)-C210-C173-R172-R173-C174-1C151
i
(59-35)-C193-CN153(6)
(5-2)-R202-C205-
m
-coRDLEss
BASE
UN,T
CN501 (6)-
L507-C571-R553-C572-C518-1C502(21-20)-C568-R569-1C502(19-17)-R570-C522-1C502(16-13)R571-R573-R574-1C502(11-10)-C537-R581-R582-VR502-CN502(10)RF
TX VCO-R359-C312-R360-1C301
UN,T
CN301 (10)-R358-R310-
(4-2)-C309-C308-Q302-C305-Q301-C303-FL301-C354-C392-
L306_ANTTENA_PORTABLE
HANDSET
L406-C492-C491-L419-FL402-L420-Q404-C422-Q403-C428IC401 (23-13)-FL403-Q405-C438-1C402(16-3)-FL404-1C402(5-9)-R432-R435-V
R223-1C202(2-5)-R225-C217-1C203(3-4)-C259-R247-C238-R234-1C208(4-5,
R202-C235-R2248)-SPEAKER
{IC11 (44)-T- C73-rR90-1C 10 (6-7)-CN 1(10)}-CN271 (10)-C184-R184-1C 151(76-41)-C158L_ C74-J
monitor
DTMF
Speaker
R161-1C151 (40-38)- R245-C245-1 C241 (4-5,8)-S PEAKER
{IC11 (44)--[--C73TR90-1C
t_ C74.J
I DTMF FAX
for TEL
Tx LINE
10 (6-7)-CN 1(10)}-CN271 (10)-C 184-R 182-1C151 (73-63)-C203-R210-
-IC201 (2-1)-C202-R201 -T101 -TEL LINE
a
I Beep for TEL LINE
{ICl (86)-CN1 (11)}-CN271 (11)-R185-C186-1C151 (77-63)-C203-R210-1C201
-TEL LINE
{IC1 (85,87)-[- R59-C56TCN2(1
/ R60-C57 .J
I Dummy Back
Ring tone
-R201-T101-TEL
I Ringing
I
'
(2-1)-C202-R201-T101-
)}-CN272(1 )-R186-C187-1C151 (78-63)-C203-R210-1C201
LINE
{IC1 (85,87)- r- R59-C56-[-CN2 (1)}-C N272(1 )-R186-C187-1C 151(78-41)-C158-R161
L R60-C57 J
I
I
(2-1)-C202
-IC151 (40-38)-
!
I
R245-C245-1C241 (4-5,8)-SPEAKER
I
I
I Alarm/Beep/Key
tone _- {IC1 (86)-CN1 (11)}-CN271 (11)-R185-C186-1C151 (77-41)-C158-R161-1C151
!
IC241 (4-5,8)-SPEAKER
I
(40-38)-R245-C245-
I
I
TEL LINE-T101 -R202-C205-1C201 (6-7)-C210-C212-R215-C213-1C202(1-2)-C217-CN271
detection
CNG / DTMF/VOX
FAX Rx
(9)-
{CN1 (9)-R97-1C 10(2-1 )-C82-R95-1C 11 (45)}
I
Note:
I
69
{
}: digitalboard
i
KX-F900
(1) Defective ITS (Integrated telephone system) section
€_) No speakerphone transmission/reception
Following the ITS section or NCU section, search for the route between the microphone
and
the telephone line (sending) or between the telephone line and the speaker (receiving) where the signal disappears.
Check the components at that point.
_) No pulse dialing
I
Does the voltage at 3 pin of
IC151 change between high
level and low level?
I NO
I
Replace PC102.
I
Does the voltage at 3 pin of
IC151 change between high
level and low level?
I YES
,
r
IYES
I Replace PC102 or R281.
Check the pulse dial circuit.
I
Check IC151.
(_ No tone dialing
(_) No ring tone
L
,I
Does a DTMF signal appear
at 44 pins of ICll (digital
board)?
circuit.
Check the Bell detection
1
YES
Is the Bell detection circuit
OK?
YES
/
Does a ring tone
signal appear at 44
pins of IC11 (digital
board)?
I,,^
Following the NCU section and ITS section
and search for the point on the route between
44 pins of IC11 and the telephone jack.
Where the signal disappears.
Check the components at that point.
Replace IC11.
YES
Following the ITS section and search
for the point on the route between
the modem and the speaker where
the signal disappears.
Check the components at that point.
-70-
Replace IC11.
I
KX-F900
(2) Defective TAM interface section
(!) Not arriving in TAM, FAX turn on.
NO
_sthe installed bell ring number of TAM less than that of
KX-F900?
-,nstal, a be;, ringnumber oi
I
TAM less than that of KX-F900.
I
I YES
Check the EXT. TAM Hook
detection circuit.
RL101, VAR1, R103, PC105
-I
O
C
f-
Ill
(_ A FAX is coming
but won't switch
Printing?
I
"1O
O
.-I
z
¢)
from TAM to FAX
YES
'1
Wait.
I
l"°
party CNG or no-sound?
Is the FAX from the other
cm
m
/
[
NO SOUND
Check the path to the modem input and refer
to the TAM INTERFACE SECTION.
Check VOX circuit and refer to the
TAM INTERFACE SECTION.
See the CHECK SHEET and SCHEMATIC.
See the CHECK SHEET and SCHEMATIC.
(_) A voice is coming in but switches to FAX
Check the VOX circuit and refer to the
TAM INTERFACE SECTION.
See the CHECK SHEET and SCHEMATIC.
Hint: You can monitor the VOX signal on service mode 815.
When a VOX (sound) is detected, "Vx" will be shown on the LCD.
71-
KX-F900
3-9. POWER SUPPLY SECTION
(1) Key components for troubleshooting
The following components have been known to break frequently :
F101, D101, Q101, IC101, D201, D202
This comes from our experience of experimental
lighting surge voltage test, withstanding
Caution:
test. For example : power supply,
voltage test, intentional short circuit test ..... etc.
If you find a melted fuse in the unit, don't turn the power on without repairing the unit first. (Except the fuse.)
If you do the fuse will melt again. It has not been repaired. The cause exists same where else.
Because of circuit compostion
:
If 24V is not output, don't output.
In most cases (our experience) the symptom is that nothing is output.
There is a high possibility in the primary side more than the secondary side.
POWER SUPPLY BLOCK DIAGRAM
•,
AC INP_
Rectifier
circuit
primary
C°cnrveuir_ing
secondary
T101[
.
24v17
OUTPUT
+24V
output
circuit
GND
Q101
DC-DC
converter
circuit
Over
current
circuit
t
--
+5V
Voltage
feed
back circuit
DUMMY LOAD to check voltage
5V
24V
1
25£2 <4
5V _+5%
24.5V + 4°/o (_
CN302
CN301
GND
2W
:!
1200Q.
l W
GND
24.5V + 4%
5V+5%
24V
(
5V
(_ :VoltageMeter
i
-72-
KX-F900
(2) Troubleshooting
I
flow chart
Our recommendation for troubleshooting is as follows.
This procedure comes from our experience of troubleshooting in our lab.
•_ Before turning on the power supply, you should check F101.
NO
,-I
0
C
m
ira
R
I
FI
z
0
0
-I
z
!"
c
1:3
m
NO
I
R
I
DI
•
l
I.
r
1
1
(Next Page)
73-
k _x:_,oo
J
I
_vcheck 1
I
I
YES
I
(DC-DC
5V,check converter check)
R
I
___
Ill.
YES
5V,check
(DC-DC converter
NO
Replace D203.
check)
NO
Replace D201.
J
Replace IC202.
J
ReplaceD204.
I
YES
I (DC-DC
_v,che_
converter
NO
check)
_-.
NO
J
YES
Replace
D202,PC101 and IC201.
YES
5V,check
(DC-DC converter check)
NO
---_ Replace the whole board.
J
(It is difficult to fix by testing other parts.)
-74-
Replace peripheral circuit of IC202
[- --KX-Fg00
(3) The
broken
parts
repairing
..... J
details
(D101)
Check short-circuit of terminal 4. It D101 is short-circuited,
replace the 60th parts (D101, F101).
F101 will be melted (open). So in this case,
(Q101)
The worst case of Q101 is a short-circuit between the Drain and Gate because damage expands to IC101.
This is due to of very high voltage through the Gate circuit which is composed of D104, R107, R114 and
R121. Then you should change all of the parts listed as follows:
F101, Q101, D104, R107, Rl14,
-I
=0
O
R121, IC101.
(IC101)
_0
Occasionally,
I'"
it exists as the sole case of a broken IC101. You should exchange.
131
(D201)
If D201 is broken, the oscillation circuit of the power supply cannot operate. Check it with an electric tester.
(D202)
Occasionally, this part short-circuits. In this case, you can listen to the click sound of intermittent
Check the resistance between 24V and GND.
*Intermittent
"I"
O
O
"-I
Z
¢)
oscillation*.
O
rrl
Oscillation:
This happens when the power supply balance is broken and loads as a perfect open or short-circuit
output. The graph of Intermittent Oscillation is shown as follow.
,,No0sc=llatl0n
[ ,,
_, i [*-Oscillation
75--
of
I KX:F,00
1
3-10. OPERATION BOARD SECTION
(1) No key operation
Is the
I
Key always pressed?
t YES
Repair the keys.
[_o
Check disconnection
of CN5
Check IC301
(operation board)
(digital board) or CN301
(operation board).
(2) No LCD indication
Is the disconnection of the
cable and connector between
the LCD and Operation board
OK?
NO
YES
I
Replace the LCD.
[
Check IC301.
76-
Repair.
[........
Kx-Fgoo
3-11. SENSOR SECTION
(1) Check the read position sensor(PI301)
q
N__2%,.
Check the soldering
Check the voltage at pin 15 of IC301
Check the soldering
at R331.
at R333.
Document set OV -L--When the pin
No document 4-5V !-_ 16 of IC301 is
low level.
/
/
OK
J
O
c
J
Replace IC301,
Replace PI301.
i'm
'-r.
0
0
,-4
Z
(2) Check the document
sensor (PI302)
Check the voltage at pin 15 of IC301
--_
Q
C
Check the soldering at R333.
Document set 4~5V -_---When the pin
No document OV --9
of IC301 is
low level.
I
]OK
v
m
Check the soldering
at R332.
OK
I
Replace IC301.
(3) Check the cover
I
I
Replace PI302.
open sensor(SW271)
Check the voltage at pin 31 of IC151
Open cover: 4~5V
Close cover: 0V
_
Check the soldering at R271.
/
OK
OK
ReplaceIC151.
Check the soldering
at R272
J
ReplaceSW271.
77
f
KX-Fg00
1
(4) Check the recording paper sensor (SW273)
Check the voltage at pin 6 of IC151
Present recording paper: 0V
-_
Check the soldering at R275. _
Check the soldering at R276. I
OK
Out of recording paper: 4-5V
OK
_r
Replace SW273.
Replace IC151.
(5) Check the jam sensor (SW272)
Check the voltage at pin 7 of IC151
-_
jam: 0V
Check the soldering at R273.
_,_
Check the soldering at R274.
OK
No jam: 4-5V
OK
Replace SW272.
Replace IC151.
--78-
I
KX-F900
3-12. READ SECTION
)'s
c,ean?
the
0'ass
sur'ace
o,
rea,,,r,0sect,on
C,ear,
the
su,,ace
o,
the0,ass.
I
NG
I
Perform the scanner test.
I
Copy a document.
LED lamp of the read section light?
(Service code : 555)
_°_
l
I
I-,
r-
m
END
Check the connection
and LED lamp.
YES
between CN7
NG
(Next page)
l
Is the voltage at pin 1 of CN7 +24V?
Is the voltage at pin 62 or ICl 4~5V?
I
I
YES
pin 16 of IC7
l 0.6-7V?
ls the voltage at
I
lamp.
1
place
IC1. orrehecklC1
1
YES
Check the
pattern between
IC7 and CN7.
Replace
1
NO
Replace IC7.
NO
,{
-.,I
::0
O
c
_0
/
Repair the connection.
79-
i
I
I
I
I
"1"
O
O
,-I
B
z
c
Io
m
I
KX-F900
NO
4~5
Is theVp-p?
amplitude at pins 2~5 of CN6
check the amplitude at pins 2~5
Take
cable
from CN6, and
of CN6out(4~5
Vp-p).
YES
_NG
OK
Is the voltage at pin 1 of CN6 +5 V?
Check CCD board.
(Refer to page 81)
YES
_r
_r
section.
Check to
power
(Refer
pagesupply
72)
Check the solder at pins 50~53 of IC1.
I OK
Replace IC1.
Check the waveform of CCD and read
section. (Refer to page 82)
-80-
I
KX-F900
[-Pe"0;m
the scanner test. (Refertopage
J
97_) 'I
l
NO
I board
Is the amplitude
) 4~5 Vp-p?
at pins 2~5 of CN801 (CCD
I
NG
Take out CN801 (CCD board), and check the
amplitude at pins 2~5 of CN6 (Digital board).
(4~5 Vp-p).
YES
CN801 (CCD board).
Check
waveform
(Refer the
to page
83) at pin 7 of
OK
!
END
t
=01
OI
cI
001
r"
rnl
(/)1
NG
Check the waveform
at pin 1 of IC801
(CCD board).
(Refer to page 83)
Check the solder at pins 50-53
of IC1 .(Digital board)
(COD
I 0N801.
Check the
shortboard)
at pins 2~5 of
QI
C_l
m l
l
NG
Check
Replace IC1.
R_O.
OK
Replace Q801, Q802,
Q803 (CCD board), or
perform CCD adjust.
i
Check
R830.
I
NG
Replace R830. (CCD board)
OK
Replace IC801. (CCD board)
81-
}
I
waveform of read section
® CCD
1.0 Vlmp
.
_
CH1 GND
CH2 GND --
Oscilloscope setting
V: CH1
0.5 V/div
CH2
5 V/div
DC couple, CHOP mode
H: 1 msec / div
Trigger: CH2 SLOPE (+)
Probe point: GND Test point "AG"
CH1 Test point "VID"
CH2 Test point "FTG"
Waveform:
_ CHI CCD signal
(_) CH2 FTG: GATE signal (trigger)
Note: This waveform will be shown when the CCD reads
the white plate of document cover.
-82-
a! about
I
KX-F900
about
0.6Vp.p
U.b V/div
AC couple
-I
m
11
0.5 V/div
AC couple
1.0Vp-p
I about
i
11
about
1.5V
1 V/div
DC couple
1.5V
GND
NO.
CH1 probe point
(_-1
IC801 pin 1 (CCD Board)
(_)-2
0N801 pin 7 (CCD Board)
®
IC1 pin 39 (AMON) (Digital board)
83-
I......
KxFgo0-I
3-13. THERMAL HEAD SECTION
Is the voltage at pin 8 of CN251.
(Analog Board) 0-1 V? (When copying)
I
YES
NO
Is the voltage at pins
5,6 of CN301 23~24 V? (Power unit )
I
of IC1 4-5 V? (Digital
s the voltage at pin 119
Board)
YES
YES
NO
Is the amplitude at
pins 1, 4-7 of CN11
4N5 Vp-p?
NO
Check switching power
supply section.
(Refer to page 72)
YES
Checkthe solder at pin
119 of ICl or pin 8 of
I CN251.
_r
Take out CN11 and check the
amplitude again.
OK
NO
Is the amplitude at pins
1~3 of CN 11 4~5 Vp-p?
NG
Check the voltage at pin
38 of IC1,3V (0%) >V__2V
(65%) about 2.6V (25%).
1
OK
Check the solde at pins
22, 25-28 of IC1 or replace IC1. (Digital Board)
I ,
Check IC1.
J
YES
Check R47, R48, R49,
C37, C38 and C39.
Check the cable of CN11
and CN301. (Power unit)
OK
I
Take out CN11 and
check the amplitude
again.
I
NG
Replace the thermal
head.
Replace thermal head.
Check the solder at pins--/7
23, 24 of IC1.
-84-
/
NG
/
KX-F900
3-14. CORDLESS SECTION
(1) Battery won't charge
(Cordless Base unit)
Plug in the AC power source.
Is the charge LED lit?
_._
_YES
I Is the voltage between(_and012
Isi-_
v(_tage-oi Q505]NO[
I collector about
_
I 5.6 V?
I
I
IYES
V? I
Check D503,R535,R534.
-.I
0
cI
IzI
rrrl
Is the voltage of
pin 37 of MPU
4.1 V?
I
Check{he
.......
charge circuit
(Refer to page 172)
MPU
heck(IC501).
around
l_
J
IYES
Is pin 24 of MPU
4.9 V?
o)
'-r
0
0
-I
i
z
NO
i
I
I
_YES
/r
Does the MPU clock INOI
oscillate?
r-l
IYES
_YES
Check around
Q512.
Check around LED.
(2) Battery won't charge (Portable handset)
Check the contact between
the battery pack and the
Portable handset.
q
Is the voltage at cathode of
Diode D201 about 4.0 V?
Check L203, D201, L202 |
and D214.
J
Note: When charge after
removing the battery.
IYES
Check the battery.
85-
Is pin 20 of
MPU HIGH?
1
I
m
I Kx:F,oo
.....
I
(3) No voice reception
Does
factor
Devi.
input
the modulation
become 6.4 kHz
when -27 dBm is
to the base unit?
.......................
-_YES
....
Is there an output
waveform at pin 5 of
IC202 (Portable handset)?
Is there an output
waveform at pin 6 of
CN501 ?
it, VR202
d IC202.
_YES
__ Check
Analog the
board.
IYES
Is there an output
waveform at pin 10 of
IC502?
._
IC502.
heck around I
Is there an output
waveform at pin 8 and
5 of IC208?
IC208.
Check around
___
I YES
Check SPEAKER.
_YES
Check RF unit
(cordless base unit).
(4) No voice transmission
Does the microphone of the
portable handset work.
microphone.
Check around the
._
IYES
Dose the modulation factor
become 5.0 kHz Devi.
When -40 dBm is input to
the portable handset
microphone terminal?
INo
Is there an output waveform
the co ector of Q208?
YES
Is there an output
waveform on the
drain of Q511 base
unit?
I.ol
on]
I
Check around
Q208.
I YES
|
Is there an output at
pin 5 of IC502?
I
Q511.
heck RF unit,
_._
!
NLN_ Check around
IC502.
IYES
I YES
Is there an output
pin 10 of IC202?
waveform at NO
Check around
IC202.
I
Is there an output at I
pin 5 of CN501?
I
IYES
I YES
Check RF part (portable
handset).
Check the Analog
borad.
86
1
J
KX-F900
(5) No link
(_) How to check whether the portable handset or the cordless base unit
I
LINK FAILURE
I
NO
Charge another OK portable handset
in cordless base unit; link OK?
PORTABLE HANDSET NG
(Set the test mode)
[Referto item (3) of page 108]
NO
-I
Charge portable handset in another
OK cordless base unit; link OK?
1
_) Link condition
O
c
CORDLESS BASE UNIT NG
(Set the test mode)
[Refer to item (3) of page 111]
I"
m
1. Transmitting power OK? (Cordless base unit: -9.0 + 4 dBm; portable handset: -7.5 dBm + 4 dB)
2. Transmitting frequency OK? (CH1 cordless base unit: 902.1 MHz + 4 kHz; portable handset:926.1 MHz + 4 kHz)
3. Reception OK? (CH1 cordless base unit: 926.1 MHz ; portable handset: 902.1 MHz, f--1 kHz, MOD=5 kHz DEV)
4. SQL (20 dB detection) signal OK? (When SG is ON: "high"; when SG is OFF: "Low")
5. Transmittion link data OK? (cordless base unit: 744 Hz and 425 Hz frequencies mixed; portable handset: 372 Hz
and 270 Hz frequencies mixed)
6. Reception link data OK? (portable handset: 744 Hz and 425 Hz frequencies mixed; cordless base unit: 372 Hz
and 270 Hz frequencies mixed)
High level-
_) Analysis of defect locations
Base Unit: Approx 5V
I
Set the test mode
(_
_
_ YES
Transmitting
power OK?
1_
_
_
I
(_
frequency OK?
>
I NO
_LyES
,_
_ YES
1
Base Unit: lC501pin 5
IC201 pin 49
Handset:
YES
>
+
I
I RF
YES
@
(Check 20dB
value.)
(page 89)
('_
(Check microcomputer
data sending signal line.)
(page 89)
Unit: pin 10 MOD signal
I Reception
,inkdataOK? I NO
I
(_
(Check RX data signal line.)
(page 89)
Handset: IC201 pin 50
Base Unit: IC501 pin 6
YES
!
Cordless handset
base unit
portable
linkand
test. 1
-87-
adjustment
J
I Transmittion link data OK? J NO
(_
(Check TX VCO voltgae.)
(Check RX VCO
voltage and VRX signal.)
(page 88)
] NO
SQL (20 dB detection) signal OK? I NO
(_
(_
(page 88)
ReceptionOK?
_
(Check TX VCO voltage,
+B signal and VTX signal.)
(page 88)
I NO
_ YES
Transmitting
_)
Handset: Approx 4V
I
I
(t)
"1O
O
-I
z
Q
c:
o
Ill
F
KX-F900
--
Check TX VCO voltage,
+B signal and VTX signal.
/
- High level ....
Base Unit: Approx 5V
Handset: Approx 4V
RF unit
(+B = "high"?)
(VTX = "high"?)
I
NO
I
I
Check signal line.
I
YESi-'_
I
TX VCO voltage OK? I
I Check TX VCO circuit.
NO
[
I
TX VCO voltage
Base Unit: 1.3V_+O.5V
I
heck
CPS
and
LDRST.
signalSI,lines.
Handset: 1.3V_+O.5V
L
(page 87)
Check TX VCO voltage.
TX VCO voltage OK?
I "° I
I
Check TX VCO circuit. I
!
Check RST, Sl, CPS I
TX VCO voltage
Base Unit: 1.3V _+0.5V
and LD signal lines.
Handset: 1.3V -+0.5V
[
I
(page 87)
I
--
Check RX VCO voltage and I
VRX signal.
I
F
Base Unit: Approx 5V
Handset: Approx 4V
NO
RF unit
(VRX = "high"?)
•
Check VRX signal line. I
YES_ "_
I
RX VCO voltage OK?
/
YES I
High level--
TX VCO
I
voltage
Base Unit: 1.3V + 0.5V
Handset: 1.3V _+0.5V
Check RX VCO circuit.
Check RST, SI, CPS
and LD signal lines.
1
(page 87)
-88-
i
KX-F900
f
Check 20 dB adjustment
value.
When SG is ON, RF
unit pin 7 SQL = "low"?
(or "C" mark lights)
Readjust
to 20 dB.
I Is re-adjustment
1
possible? t-_
•RF unit
•Check peripheral circuits of
cordless base unit (IC302 pins 10, 11; D301, D302)
portable handset (IC402 pins 10, 11; D401, D402).
IYES
RF
_
unit pin 7 SQL = "high"? I
(or "C" mark goes off) |
°
• RF unit
•Check peripheral circuits of
cordless base unit (IC302 pins 10, 11; D301, D302)
portable handset (IC402 pins 10, 11; D401, D402).
(page 87)
i
0
C
r-
YES
When SGisOFF,
_____
Check microcomputer
sending line.
data I
I
I
RF unit pin 10 MOD
signal = "data waveform"
OK?
Check cordless base unit IC501
pin 44 and portable handset IC201
pin 51-54 lines.)
NO
(page 87)
Check RX data line.
RX data signal OK?
•Cordless base unit :1C501 pin 6
-Portable handset :1C201 pin 50
NO
r
•Check cordless base unit IC503 peripheral circuits.
•Check portable handset Q214, Q215 peripheral circuits.
Y%
(page 87)
- 89-
m
(/)
-!0
0
-I
I
z
6")
6")
c::
I
o
ill
i....
1
(_) (No link (Portable handset TX)
IS the data wave,orm
input to
Ol_ch-el
N
pin 14 of CPU during charging_i
i aio i-ndQ-20 _-
v
IYES
Does LED _ight up when the
TALK switch of the portable
handset is pressed.
_
battery, IC206 and
IC201.
heck around
IYES
Is the data of the portable
handset output from CPU?
Check R250.
Is
pin
of
CPU
NOLNLNLN_
H, H? i i
_YES
_IYES
Check RF part.
49
Check around
J
I
pins 51-54 of CPU. I
(_) No link (Portable handset RX)
Is signal output to Q214
collector when the data signal
is sent from the base unit?
Q215.
.{ and
heck
RF part, Q214
IYES
Is signal output to pin 50
of IC201?
_
Check around IC201 'l
IYES
Does pin 49 of CPU become
LOW when a signal is input?
NOISE
AMP.
Check around
IYES
Check around CPU.
90-
Check
around
1
I
KX.F900--
1
6_ No link (Base unit RX)
Is the ID data output from
N_O
CONT terminal during charging? l
i
-Check Q506 and
°l
MPU.
i
IYES
Iv
Is the data signal output to pin 3 iNOI
..N
conversation with the portable
handset?
of RF unit drain during
_
O
C
Check RF unit.
r-
/|
Is the data signal output to
pin 4 of IC503?
]NC) I
O
O
.-I
z
Check around
IC503.
[I
IYES
i'm
/
Does pin 5 of MPU become
LOW when a signal is input?
INO
F"
Check around
NOISE AMP.
m
IYES
Check around MPU.
(_No link (Base unit TX)
Does the TALK LED flash
when the page key is
pressed?
I
.
I ,,,,-, I
Check around the
MPU.
IYES
t
Is there data output of the
base unit from MPU?
Check pin 44 of MPU.
I NOI
I
FI
Is pin 5 of MPU
HIGH?
IYES
Check RF unit.
;
m i
t_
JYES
IYES
Check around pin
44 of MPU.
-91 -
NOISE
AMP.
Check around
I
KX-F900
-- j
4. PROGRAMMING
AND LISTS
The programming functions are used to program the various features and functions of the machine, and to test the
machine. Programming can be done in both the on-hook and off-hook conditions. This facilitates communication
between the user and the service while programming the machine.
4-1.
OPERATION
There are 2 basic categories of programming functions, the User Mode and the Service Mode. The Service Mode is
further broken down into the normal and the special programs. The normal programs are those listed in the
Operating instructions and available to the user. The special programs are those listed only here and not displayed
to the user. In both User and Service Mode, there are Set Functions and Test Functions. The Set Functions are
used to program various features and functions, and the Test Functions are used to test various functions.
The Set Functions are accessed by entering their code, changing the appropriate
value, then pressing the SET key.
The test Functions are accessed by entering their code and pressing the key listed on the menu. While programming,
to cancel any entry, press the STOP key.
4-2. OPERATION
FLOW
User mode
I Programming
_
(1) TEST mode _
I I (user programmable)%_(2)
PRINT mode (prints out the list to confirm
SET mode __
[.Service mode
_
(not user programmable)
Normal
Special _
the set values)
(3) SET mode _
(4) SET mode
(5) TEST mode
PRINT mode (prints out the
list to confirm the set values)
Operating Procedure
MENU button ]
LCD
I SYSTEM SET UP
I
I SETUPITEM[
] I
_-- LCD
Follow the instructions on the LCD.
I
_ Code
Iser mode
_'z-
I-_
D
[[]
XXXXXXX
(Some codes are for the Test Functions, while others are for the Set Functions.)
LCD
User mode #MENU
buttonI--'-I MENUbutton
Printout
---I PRINTLIST ---I START/COPY/SETbutton I----I','buttonI
i START/COPY/SET
butt0nI_LCDsIc
Code
Service m°del--_ 1-9] I_-I F]
r-6-ii--_--i-T--_
D
l/
I/
D
LIST/ ADVANCEDLIST j_
I
Follow the instructions on the LCD.
D
xxxxxxx
codes
(some
are for the Test Functions some for the special
Set Functions, while others are for the Set Functions.)
/ /
LCD
_ ISetvalue
I H--,'51• l Pr nt out
-92-
= __
4-3.
USER
I
MODE
(The list below
BASIC FEATURE LIST
NO.
#01
#02
#03
#04
#05
#OT
#88
#09
#12
is an example
ID
LIST
out.)
]ERROR,ON,OFF]
[FAX,EXT. TAM]
[I...4]
]TEL,TEL/FAX]
[I...4]
CON,OFF]
r
m
z
#30
#31
#39
#40
#41
DESTINATION
START TIME
SILENT FAX RECOGNITION
RING
RING DETECTION
LCD CONTRAST
SILENT DETECTION
REMOTE FAX ACTIUATION
CODE
#46
#20
FRIENDLY
RECEPTION
FAX PAGER
#80
SET
CtJ_ENT
OUT
ON
OFF
OFF
SETTING
]OUT, IN]
ION,OFF]
ION,OFF]
ION,OFF)
=
= 12:00AM
3
OFF
NORMAL
ON
ON
Q
c
m
[3...6]
[A,B,C,D,OFF]
]NORMAL,DARKER]
ION,OFF]
CON,OFF]
CODE =
ON
OFF
DESTINATION
DEFAULT
0
c
x
0
0
_'_SetValue
FE-_TURE
LOGO POSITION
JOURNAL
AUTO PRINT
OVERSEAS
MODE
BELAYED
TRANSMISSION
/
ERROR
FAX
1
TEL
1
OFF
= 11
]
NO.
#21
#22
#23
#25
Code
LIST the unit prints
CLI_ENT
SETTING
JAN. 01 199G 12:00AM
_' Code
FEATURE
SETUP
I
FEATLI_
SET DATE & TIME
YOUR LOGO
YOUR TELEPHONE
NUMBER
PRINT TRANSMISSION
REPORT
AUTO RECEIUE
MODE
FAX RING COUNT
MANUAL RECEIVE MODE
TEL/FAX
DELAYED RING
REMOTE TAM ACT.
ADVANCED
of the SYSTEM
[ ON, OFF ]
ION, OFF]
=
\
Set Value
Note:
The above values are default
93
i
KX-F900
4-4. SERVICE
FUNCTION
TABLE
Code
Function
Set Value
501
Setting of pause time
001~600X100msec
502
Setting of flash time
01~99X10msec
503
Setting of pulse dial speed
520
EffectiveRange
Default
Remarks
Selects the pause time in 100
msec step.
Selects the line break time during
flashing in 10 msec step.
001_600
05000msec
01 _99
700 msec
1 : 10 pps
2 : 20 pps
1,2
10 pps
Setting of CED frequency
1 : 2100 Hz
2 : 1100 Hz
1,2
2100 Hz
521
Setting of international line mode
1 :ON
2 " OFF
ON
522
Setting of return to default mode
1 :ON
2 : OFF
ON
523
Setting of reception equalizer
1 :ON
2 : OFF
544
Selection of document
feed position
01 _99 step
550
Memory clear
Press "STA RT/COPY/S ET".
551
ROM version and sum check
Press "START/COPY/SET".
553
Setting of FAX monitor function
554
Modem test
"START" press.
555
Scanner test
"START" press.
556
Motor test
"START" press.
557
LED test
"START" press.
558
LCD test
"START" press.
559
Setting of document jam
detection
1 • ON
2 - OFF
1,2
ON
560
Cutter select
1 ON
2 : OFF
1,2
ON
561
KEY test
562
Cutter test
563
CCD position adjustment
value set
00_30X
570
Setting of the % break
1 : 61%
2 : 67%
1,2
OFF
Sets the pulse dial speed.
When international communications cannot be performed
smoothly, select 1100 Hz.
Selects the international line mode
during of FAX communication.
Sets the resolution and contrast
conditions of FAX or copy returning to the default.
When a station is quite a distance from the unit or reception
cannot be performed correctly,
set to "ON".
When ADF function is improper,
adjust feed position. (8 step=lmm)
01 _99
1 " OFF
To monitor the line signal with
2 : PHASE B
3 : ALL
1,2, 3
OFF
the unit's speaker during FAX
communication or not.
Selects the jam detection of
document during FAX
transmission/copying.
Press any key.
"START" press.
1 mm
-94-
00_30
_
1' 2
61%
Lets you select the correction
value for main scanning direction of the dislocated scanner.
Sets the % break of the pulse
dial.
r
Function
Set Value
EffectiveRange
Remarks
00_99
14 times
Selects the number of times that
ITS is redialed (not including the
first dialing).
001_999
030 sec
Sets the interval of ITS redial.
01 _99
01 _99
15 times
Sets the' number of rings that
unit starts to receive a document in TEL mode.
Setting of number of times of
FAX redial
0_99
00_99
5 times
Selects the number of times of redial during FAX communication (not
including the first dialing).
Setting of FAX redial interval
001_999
001_999
045 sec
Sets the interval of FAX redial
during FAX communication.
571
Setting of number of times
that ITS is redialed
00_99
572
Setting of ITS redial interval
001_999
573
TEL ring count
590
591
592
Designation of CNG sending
593
Setting of interval between
CED and 300 bps signal.
sec
sec
Lets you select the CNG output
during FAX transmission.
ALL: CNG is output at phase A.
AUTO: CNG is output only when
the automatic dialing is performed.
OFF: CNG is not output at phase
A.
1 : OFF
2 : ALL
3 : AUTO
1,2,3
ALL
1 : 75 msec
2 : 500 msec
3 : 1000 msec
1,2,3
75 msec
Sets the interval between the
CED signal and subsequent
300 bps signal.
1,2
Detects
at the
1st
time
Sets the recognizing format of DIS
signal.
1: Detects the first DIS signal sent
from the receiver during FAX
transmission.
2: Ignores the first DIS signal sent
from the receiver during FAX
transmission.
001_999
100
Sets the number of error acceptable lines when the FAX reconstructs the received data.
594
Setting of overseas
DIS detection
1 : Detects at the
1st time
2 : Detects at the
2nd time
595
Setting of the acceptable
value of reception error
001_999Xnumber
oftimes
596
Setting of transmit level
-15_00
-15_00
-10 dBm
Selects the FAX transmission
level.
(Increase the level when the
telephone line condition is poor.)
700
EXT TAM OGM time
x second
01 _99
10 sec
Sets the start time of silence detect.
701
Silence detect time
x 100 ms
01 _99
5O ms
Sets the silence of call confirmation times.
702
EXT TAM ring count
x number of rings
0_9
5 times
717
Transmit speed select
1
2
3
4
:
:
:
:
9600
7200
4800
2400
BPS
BPS
BPS
BPS
1_4
9600 BPS
Adjusts the speed to start training during FAX transmission.
Receive speed select
1
2
3
4
:
:
:
:
9600
7200
4800
2400
BPS
BPS
BPS
BPS
1_4
9600 BPS
Adjusts the speed to start training during FAX reception.
718
-95-
Sets the number of rings that
unit start to receive a document
in EXT-TAM mode.
......
1
I......
KX-FO00-1
Code
Function
Set Value
Effective Range
Default
Remarks
719
Ringer off in TEL/FAX mode
1 :ON
2 : OFF
1,2
ON
Selects ringer off switch when
a call is received in the TEL/
FAX mode.
721
Pause tone detect
1 :ON
2 : OFF
1,2
ON
Selects the tone detection in
the pauses of the dialing.
722
Redial tone detect
1 :ON
2 : OFF
1,2
ON
Selects the tone detection
mode after redialing.
732
AUTO disconnect
1 : 350 ms
2 : 1.8 sec
3 : OFF
1,2,3
350 ms
Selects the start time of detection of auto disconnect.
763
CNG detect time
1 : 10 sec
2 : 20 sec
3 : 30 sec
1,2,3
20 sec
Selects the CNG detect time
of friendly reception.
771
T1 timer
1 : 35 sec
2 : 60 sec
35 sec
Set to the higher value when
the response from the other
party needs much time during
FAX transmission.
815
Sensor check
844
Original setting
909
Handset Remote FAX Actication
1,2
"START" press.
1 : NORMAL
2 : LIGHT
3 : DARKER
0-9,
1,2,3
2N4 digits
96-
NORMAL
Use this feature when you
need to transmit and copy a
document with very faint writing on very dark writing.
You can change the remote
FAX activation code using the
portable handset.
Kx oo .....
1
4-5. SERVICE MODE SETTING VALUES (Example of a printed out list)
[SERVICE DATA LIST]
.,_.--Code
501 PAUSE TIME
=
502 FLASH TIME
=
503 DIAL SPEED
=
520 CED FREQ.
=
521 INTL.
MODE
=
522 AUTO STANDBY
=
523 RX EQL,
=
524 TX EQL.
=
700 EXT, TAM OGM TIME
=
701 SILENT DETECT TIME
=
702 EXT. TAM RING COUNT
=
909 HANDSET REMOTE FAX ACT.=
I SPECIAL SERVICE SETTING
J
/"
Code
544
50
553
1
_"SetValue
594
595
1
100
_,./SetValue
050_100ms
70_10ms
iBpps
2100Hz
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
10s_c
50_100msec
5
_
[001...600]_:lUSms
[Ol,.,99]_lOrnS
[1=10
2=20]pps
[1=2100
2=i100]Hz
[1=ON
2=OFF]
[1=ON
2=OFF]
[I=ON
2=OFF]
[I=ON
2=OFF]
-N
0
C
[01...99]s_c
[01...99]_100ms_0
[0...9]
l-
m
m
.I0
0
-N
z
¢)
¢)
c
]
559
1
560
1
563
15
570
1
521
14
572
030
573
15
590
05
591
045
592
2
596
10
?iT
1
718
1
719
1
T21
1
722
1
732
1
763
2
771
1
844
1
595
1
Note:
The above values are default
5. TEST FUNCTIONS
oCode
Test mode
PRINT TEST
Type of Mode
User mode
[--1[_
Function
• Operation after
code input.
NN
START
MOTOR TEST
Service Mode
N@N
START
MODEM TEST
Service Mode
NN@
START
ROM CHECK
Service Mode
[]F Fq
Print a test pattern and check the thermal head for
abnormalities (missing dots, etc.), and also check the
operation of the reception motor.
Rotate the transmission
and reception motors to check the
operation of the motors.
Send four kinds of FAX signals to check the sending function
of the modem.
1) 1100 Hz: Consecutive signal of EOM for tonal.
2) 2100 Hz: G2 carrier signal
Consecutive of CED signal
3) G3, V29 training signal [modulation wave of carrier signal
(1700 Hz)]
Indicate the version and check sum of the ROM.
START
SCAN CHECK
Service Mode
BBB
Turn on the LEDs of the image sensor and operate the read
system.
START
LCD CHECK
Check the LCD indication.
Illuminate all dots to check if they are normal.
Service Mode
START
-97-
m
l
KX-F900
DTMF SINGLE
TEST
Service Mode
LED TEST
Service Mode
UB[]
Output the DTMF by single tone.
1..On
2..Off
@NN
All LEDs flashes on and off, or is illuminated.
START
KEY CHECK
Check the operation button.
Service Mode
Indicate the button code at LCD while the button is pressed.
{any
key }
FACTORY
SET
NN@
Service Mode
Clear the memory in which the user can store data.
START
CUTTER
TEST
®[][]
Service Mode
Check the cutter operation.
START
SENSOR
CHECK
CHECK SENSOR OPERATION
IDo Sn Co Ja Pa Vx Cu ]
Do : Document Sensor
Sn : Read Position Sensor
Co : Cover Open Sensor
Ja :Jam Sensor
Pa : Recording Paper Sensor
Vx : Vox Sensor
Cu : Cutter Position SW
Service Mode
: LCD DISPLAY
: Paper inserted
: at the read Position
: Cover open
: Jam
: Set Recording Paper
: Vox detected
: Home Position
5-1. BUTTON CODE TABLE
Code
02
Button Name
RESOLUTION
Button Name
Qx_
Code
Button Name
Code
Button Name
0D
/k VOLUME
35
5
3E
FLASH
0E
V VOLUME
36
6
87
STATION
1/6
03
AUTO RECEIVE
O4
START/COPY/SET
16
ERASE
37
7
88
STATION
2/7
05
MENU
18
NEWMSGS.PLAYBACK
38
8
89
STATION
3/8
STATION
4/9
5/10
O7
HELP
19
MAIL BOX
39
9
8A
O8
SP-PHONE
31
1
3A
0
8B
STATION
09
LOCATOR/
0A
MUTE
32
2
3B
0B
LOWER
33
3
3C
#
0C
DIRECTORY
34
4
3D
REDIAL/PAUSE
-98-
INTERCOM
KX-F900
1
ADJUSTMENT
Page
1. Table of Test Equipments and Tool .................................................
100
2. Adjusting the Feeder Pressure .........................................................
101
3. Confirmation of Separation Spring ...................................................
101
4. CCD Adjustments
.....................................................................
102~104
5. Document Read Start Position Adjustment ..............................
104,105
6. Codless Adjustment ..................................................................
107~113
t,_
C
t_
,-I
Ill
7'
'-'1
99--
i
KX-F900
1. TABLE
I
OF TEST E_UIP'MEN1-5
AND TOOL
Main Unit (FAX)
No.
Test Equipment and Jig Name
Jig No.
1
Oscilloscope
2
CCD Tool
PFZZ1 F780M
3
Extension Cord
PQZZ2K12Z, PQZZ8K18Z
4
Spring Height Tool
PFZZ2F780M
Portable Handset (Cordless)
No.
Equipment
1.
Radio Tester : Marconi Model 2295A or later.
2.
4.5 digit Digital Multimeter : B&K Model 2833 or compatible.
3.
Oscilloscope, single or dual channel : Panasonic VP-5512P100
4.
Telephone Analyzer : B&K Model 1050 or compatible.
5.
DC Power Supply, capable of supply 3.9V DC at'100mA
or compatible.
NOTE : only needed if Telephone Analyzer does not have DC VOLTS output available.
6.
High Frequency Attenuator, 10dB or greater.
7.
Corded Telephone.
8.
High Frequency Cable : BNC end to open end.
9.
Audio Cable : BNC end to alligator clip end.
10.
High Frequency Adjustment Tool:
11.
Isolation Capacitors, quantity of 2, 10 #F maximum, 50V DC or greater.
12.
Soldering Iron, solder, and various tools.
-100-
I
2. ADJUSTING
THE FEEDER
KX-F900
J
PRESSURE
If misfeeding of document, such a multiple feeding or no feeding, occurs frequently, try to adjust the feeder pressure by
following steps below.
(1) Open the front lid by pressing the front lid open.
(2) Shift the position of the lever by using an instrument
with a pointed end, like a clip or ball-point pen.
Position A: Select this when documents do not feed.
Position B: Standard position (pre-selected)
Position C: Select this when documents multiplefeed.
(3) Close the front lid by gently pressing down on both ends.
.--Lever
3. CONFIRMATION
1.
2.
3.
Front lid open
button
OF SEPARATION
SPRING
Open the operation grille.
Check the highest level of the separation spring with the
spring height tool (PFZZ2F780M). Please make sure that
the separation spring does not touch the tool during this
operation. (Both right and left) (See Fig. 1).
Check the lowest level of the separation spring with the
opposite side of the spring height tool. Please make sure
that the separation spring touches the tool during this
operation. (Both right and left) (See Fig. 2).
0
t,..
c
o)
.-I
m
z
TOUCH
NO TOUCH
SPRING HEIGHT TOOL
(PFZZ2F780M)
SEPARATION
SPRING
Fig. 1
SPRING HEIGHT TOOL
(PFZZ2F780M)
SEPARATION
Fig. 2
-101 -
SPRING
I
KX_-F900
-
I
4. CCD ADJUSTMENTS
Perform the following adjustment after replacing tens and CCD board.
PREPARATION:
1) Remove the CCD unit from set. (Refer to page 120. )
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
Make oscilloscope connections as shown in next page.
Attach the CCD TOOL on the CCD unit.
Connect between CCD unit and dlgital board with extension cord (Part No. PQZZ8K18Z). (Refer to next page).
Connect between LED array and digital board with extension cord (Part No. PQZZ2K12Z). (Refer to next page).
Connect AC cord.
Press the MENU button.
Press the #,9,0,0,0, and • buttons.
Press the 5,5 and 5 buttons.
Notes:
1) Install the lens so that the marking (RED) on it is upper side.
2) Do not touch the glass face of the lens with the bare hands.
3) If you have no instrument to repair, trim off the chart on
page 97, then attach on the target glass (This is a temporary
treatment. You should use an instrument for this adjustmen
purpose, if you require an accurate repairment.)
Cleaning:
If the lens is dirty, clean it with a dry soft cloth.
Chart
CCD Tool
(PFZZ1F780M)
/
/I
CCD Unit
Note:
Please adjust with covering topside of the lens by hands in order not to let in outdoor daylight.
-102-
KX-F900
ADJUSTMENT:
[ LENS AND CCD READ POS-I'I-ION ADJUSTMENT
1) Loosen the lens fixing screw and CCD board fixing screw.
2) Adjust the position of the lens and CCD board so that the waveforrn appears as shown in the figure below.
3) Fix the lens fixing screw and CCD board fixing screw.
Oscilloscope setting
CH1 ........... 0.5 V/div
CH2 ........... 2 V/div
TIME .......... 1 ms
Trigger ....... CH2
Mode ......... AC
OSCILLOSCOPE
"Never connect land "AMON"
CC>
CC>
/
O_r
vlD
O OAG
AMON
J
To point 'FTG".J
Jj
To point "VID".
j
?...
c
m
-I
,_) FIG
m
z
-I
CN7
CN6
T
(DIGITAL BORAD)
Extension cord (Part No. PQZZ2K12Z)
[
I
I Extension Cord
I (Part No. PQZZ8K18Z)
Illlllllll I
To CCD baord
/ _ _ _
Lens fixing screws
WAVEFORM
MAX
MAX
(for CCD Board)
CCD board fixing screws
-103-
--KX-F900
1
I WHITE LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
1)
2)
3)
4)
J
Remove the CCD TOOL from CCD unit.
Attach the white paper on the CCD unit.
Attach the CCD TOOL on the CCD unit.
Adjust VR801 on the CCD board so that the waveform becomes 1.0__+0.2V.
Notes: 1. After the adjustment is finished, assemble the unit by reversing above procedure.
2. Please adjust with covering topside of the lens by hands in order not to let in outdoor daylight.
3. If you have no instrument to repair, trim off the chart on next page, then attach on the target glass.
(This is a temporary treatment. You should use an instrument for this adjustment purpose, if you require an
accurate repairment.)
Chart
CCD Tool
(PFZZ 1F780M)
White Paper
(ex. PPC Paper)
WAVEFORM
_2
5. DOCUMENT
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
READ START POSITION
ADJUSTMENT
Connect AC cord.
Copy the document, and confirm the read start position of the document.
If get out of position, adjust the read position.
Press the MENU button.
Press the #, 9, 0, 0, 0, * and 5, 6, 3 buttons.
Press the Fl,l--I, SET and MENU buttons.
V
3O
To move the image to the right direction
,o
1
15---- Standard (Default)
14 !o
To
ve the image to the left direction
00
The starting position of reading shifts 1 mm as number of changes.
--104-
I_I .O+0.2V
I
(for white level adjustment)
KX-F900
(for lens and CCD read position adjustment)
O
:
:
/'_:
Z?
t,..,
:
::
, T: [
]
-I
LED Array _Side
m
z
-I
!_i-Y] i]i !
:? :/(--- edge of the glass
L_ _ ,-_
:2; :_
:: 4
[_L_
.........
_:___J
[he
__1___-------_-_--i:
:
edge ul glass
and chart should be
=
_t"'m i ,,
//
_
___--_
®
!
!
--I
I
1
I
/
! r___p_[
U
Tape
everse
Make sure the position of L and R.
--105-
with tape
_ut
pe
togeter, then fix
I_
Kx..F900
106-
KX-F900
6. CORDLESS
ADJUSTMENT
6-1. OBJECTIVE
This procedure will enable the technician to make adjustments to the KX-F900 PORTABLE
BASE UNIT.
HANDSET and CORDLESS
_2. GENERALINFORMATION
This procedure has 2 sections. The first section instructs the technician on how to align the PORTABLE HANDSET. We
recommend aligning the PORTABLE HANDSET first, since you will need the PORTABLE HANDSET to align the
CORDLESS BASE UNIT. The second section aligns the CORDLESS BASE UNIT. You can use either section separately, or together to align the entire cordless phone unit.
At the beginning of each section, you will find a preparation procedure instructing you on how to prepare the unit to the
point of placing the unit in TEST mode. Please follow this procedure to insure proper alignment.
Each section's procedure consists of Adjustment Items adjusting one specific variable hardware component.
Each Item lists the equipment needed, how to connect and setup the equipment, how to make the adjustment, and how
to verify the adjustment if necessary.
Before the actual procedure, you will find a procedure detailing how to place that part in TEST mode. You will have to
perform this procedure before each individual Adjustment Item.
Once aligned, please remove all equipment connections and solder points, and reassemble the unit. As a final check,
power up the phone and check for PORTABLE HANDSET linking with the CORDLESS BASE UNIT.
_>
O
t-
€._
-I
I PORTABLE
HANDSET
m
z
.._
I
(1)PREPARATION
Please perform the following steps to prepare the PORTABLE HANDSET for alignment. Please refer to the
HANDSET REFERENCE DRAWING for connection and test point locations.
1.
2.
Remove battery cover and battery.
Remove both screws at the case bottom.
3.
Grabbing hold of the back near the bottom, gently pry off the back of the case.
4.
Remove the antenna mounting screw.
5.
While heating the antenna solder connection,
Remove the top P.C.Board mounting screw.
6.
7.
Unsolder both speaker connections on P.C.Board.
Remove the PORTABLE HANDSET P.C.Board.
8.
Remove the keypad membrane.
9.
Solder High Frequency Cable open end to ANT and RF GND points.
10.
pull out the antenna.
(Refer to page 125)
Using the Digital Multimeter, measure DC VOLTS output on the Telephone Analyzer.
Adjust the output voltage to 3.9V DC.
11.
Solder battery connection wires at the points shown in the PORTABLE HANDSET REFERENCE
DRAWING.
Solder the positive lead to IC204, towards the bottom of the P.C.Board. Solder the negative lead to the MIC
minus lead, closest to IC204. DO NOT APPLY POWER TO THE PORTABLE HANDSET AT THIS TIME!!!!!!
12.
Solder a small, insulated piece of wire to GND as well.
13.
Solder 1 isolation capacitor's positive lead to SP+ test point (TP4). When soldering, keep the lead close to
the P.C.Board as possible since you will lay the keypad membrane over part of this lead.
14.
Solder a small, short, insulated wire to MIC test point (TP8).
15.
Lay the keypad membrane over the keypad switch contacts.
-107--
I
Kx'F90o-I
(2) SYMPTOM/REMEDY
TABLE
If you have one of the listed symptoms, please refer to this table and make the appropriate adjustments.
SYMPTOM
REMEDY
Does not link with CORDLESSBASE
UNIT
Check Items (A) and (B).
If both items are OK, adjust Items (D) and (E).
Speaker level is unstable
Check Items (A) and (B).
If both items are OK, adjust Items (C).
Tx sound is unstable
Check Items (A) and (B).
If both items are OK, adjust Items (F).
(3) ADJUSTMENT
PREPARATION
Please perform the following procedure before starting the Adjustment Procedure. You only have to perform this procedure
only once to complete all Items, but you will have to perform this procedure to make an individual Adjustment Item.
1. You will need all equipment listed in the Item's EQUIPMENT section.
2.
Setup all equipment as specified in the Item's PROCEDURE section SETUP portion.
3.
On the PORTABLE HANDSET under test, press and hold down the 1,9, and -_ keys.
4.
Apply power to the PORTABLE HANDSET.
5.
Release the 3 keys. You should hear the PORTABLE HANDSET beep. If you do not hear a beep, remove the power
from the PORTABLE HANDSET and repeat the last 2 steps.
6.
Press the INTERCOM key, then press the TALK key. PORTABLE HANDSET should now be in TEST MODE
(CH 1 TALK). The IN USE/BATT LOW LED should be on. If the PORTABLE HANDSET is not in TEST MODE,
remove the power and repeat the last 3 steps.
7.
Remove the keypad membrane and lay it a side.
(4) ADJUSTMENT
PROCEDURE
ADJUSTMENT ITEM
DESCRIPTION
(A)
EQUIPMENT
PROCEDURE
Rx VCO Voltage
Confirmation only
Digital Multimeter
SETUP to measure DC Voltage, 20V
range
Connect negative lead to RF module metal cover
and positive lead to TP5. Measure voltage and
confirm that this voltage is between 0.8V DC and
1.8V DC. DO NOT PROCEED IF NOT IN RANGE!!
(B)
Tx VCO Voltage
Confirmation only
Digital Multimeter
SETUP to measure DC Voltage, 20V
range
Connect negative lead to RF module metal cover
and positive lead to TP6. Measure voltage and
confirm that this voltage is between 0.8V DC and
1.8V DC. DO NOT PROCEED IF NOT IN RANGEfl
Marconi
SETUP Put in Receiver Test Mode.
RF GEN
FREQ 902.1000MHz
LEVEL 60dBpV
SET MOD
FREQ 1.000kHz
LEVEL 5.000kHz
High Frequency Cable to left RF
Connector. Audio Cable positive lead to
isolation capacitor, negative lead to GND
BNC end to AF INPUT connector.
Adjust VR202 until AF VOLTS equals
-33dBV +l-ldBV
(c)
SP Output
-108-
Note
This voltage reading is with no speaker or load
attached to the PORTABLE HANDSET P.C.Board.
KX-F900
ADJUSTMENT ITEM
DESCRIPTION
(O)
20dB Electric Detection
PROCEDURE
EQUIPMENT
Marconi
SETUP Put in Receiver Test Mode.
RF GEN
FREQ 902.1000MHz
LEVEL 60dBIIV
SET MOD
FREQ 1.000kHz
LEVEL 5.000kHz
One end of BNC cable to left RF connector, other end to Attenuator Input.
Audio Cable positive lead to isolation
capacitor, negative lead to GND, BNC
end to AF INPUT connector.
Oscilloscope
SETUP Xl probe connected to INPUT
1. Probe ground connected to GND.
TIME/DIV 1ms
VOLT/DIV 1V
On Marconi, press SINAD until the display shows
the SlNAD value and press dB. Then press RF GEN
and LEVEL. Attach the oscilloscope probe to 20dB
test point (TP7). Using the VARIABLE knob on the
Marconi, decrease RF GEN LEVEL until SlNAD v
alue is between 7dB and 9dB. NOTE: this value will
not be stable. Adjust VR401until oscilloscope voltage
toggles. This is the 20dB SET POINT.
NOTE: toggling may not occur at regular intervals.
Decrease RF GEN LEVEL until the SINAD value
decreases by at least 3dB. Check that oscilloscope
voltage is high. Now increase REF GEN LEVEL
until SlNAD value is at least 3dB above the 20dB
SET POINT. Check that oscilloscope voltage is low.
Auto trigger
Attenuator
SETUP High Frequency Cable to
Attenuator Output.
Marconi
SETUP Put in Transmitter Test mode.
AF GEN
FREQ 1.000KHZ
LEVEL 41mV [23mV]
Connect High Frequency Cable to
right RF connector.
Connect Audio Cable positive lead to
MIC, negative lead to GND, BNC end
to AF GEN OUTPUT.
(E)
MIC Input
(F)
Standard Frequency
Marconi
SETUP Put in Transmitter Test mode.
AF GEN
FREQ f.000kHz
LEVEL 21mV
Connect High Frequency Cable to
right RF connector.
Connect Audio Cable positive lead to
MIC, negative lead to GND, BNC end
to AF GEN OUTPUT
,c,
Adjust MR201 until Marconi MOD LEVEL
equals 5kHz +/-0.5kHz
Note
The 41mV value is for units of suffix A and
the 23mV value is for units of suffix B~.
Adjust VC401 until Marconi TX FREQ equals
926.100MHz +/-0.0005MHz
Note
This Item's setup is exactly the same as Item (E).
If you have done Item (E), simply look at TX FREQ
and make the adjustment.
Once aligned, please perform the following procedure.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Disconnect all equipment and solder connections. Use solder wick to clean up any solder you added.
Install the keypad membrane on top of the PORTABLE HANDSET keys.
Install the PORTABLE HANDSET P.C.Board.
Solder speaker wires back onto the P.C.Board observing correct polarity.
If you will align Item (E) RX Input in CORDLESS BASE UNIT, then solder a short wire across the MIC leads.
Remember to unsolder this wire after you completed the CORDLESS BASE UNIT alignment.
Insert antenna into the case.
Install antenna and top P.C.Board mounting screws and solder antenna connection.
Install case back and bottom mounting screws.
DO NOT INSTALL THE BATTERY AT THIS TIME!!!!H
- 109-
L
KX-F900
POR]ABLE
HANDSET
REFERENCE
DRAWING
_t
o
/
P_
>
o
©_
_©
I
i=
110-
[ Kx: ,oo=
'j
CORDLESS
BASE UNIT
(1) PREPARATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Please prepare the BASE UNIT before performing any adjustment procedures. Refer to the CORDLESS BASE UNIT
REFERENCE DRAWING for connection and test point locations.
Remove the 3 screws on the bottom cabinet of the handset cradle.
Remove the bottom cabinet of the handset cradle.
Remove the soldering on the antenna wires of the RF module.
Remove the base unit anchoring screw.
Use the telephone cord to connect the fax machine line and PHONE TEST #1 on the telephone analyzer.
Use the telephone cord to connect the corded telephone and PHONE TEST #2 on the telephone analyzer.
Solder the plus and minus sides of the RF coaxial cable to ANT and RF GND, as shown on the page 113.
Connect the BNC connector on the RF coaxial cable to ANT on the Marconi.
(2) SYMPTOM/REMEDY
TABLE
If you have one of the listed symptoms, please refer to this table and make the appropriate adjustments.
SYMPTOM
REMEDY
Does not link with PORTABLE
HANDSET
Check Items (A) and (B).
If both are OK, adjust Items (E) and (F).
Transmission sound to PORTABLE HANDSET receiver is unstable
(3) ADJUSTMENT
Check Items (A) and (B).
If both are OK, adjust Items (C) and (D).
PREPARATION
2.
Please perform the following steps to prepare the CORDLESS BASE UNIT for the Adjustment procedure.
While pressing the 1 and 8TART/OOPY/SET
KEYS, turn on the power to the fax machine.
[Cordless Test] appears on the machine's LCD display.
Press the MUTE KEY four times.
3.
[4. Talk Mode] now appears on the machine's LCD display.
Press the START/COPYISET KEY.
4.
[Channel=01] now appears on the machine's LCD display.
,I, Any channel can now be keyed in using the 10 numeric keys on the machine.
Press the START/COPY/SET KEY twice.
1.
The talk mode is now established for the channel displayed in step 3.
I L1B40 I
i
now appears on the machine's LCD display.
i__
Channel
Talk Mode
5.
Establish the standard settings of the Marconi.
•First, set the RX test items.
GEN
FREQ:
926.1 MHz
MOD1
MOD2
LEVEL:
FREQ:
LEVEL:
60 dB!_V
1 kHz
off
5kHz
off
•Next, set the TX test items.
RF GEN
ON
AF1
FREQ:
1 kHz
off
LEVEL: -27dBm
AF2
off
TX
FREQ:
902.1 MHz
-111-
#=l
I
Kx-F 0 L
(4) ADJUSTMENT
PROCEDURE
ADJUSTMENT ITEM
DESCRIPTION
PROCEDURE
EQUIPMEN]
(A)
Rx VCO Voltage
Confirmation only
Digital multimeter
Set to the DC voltage measurement
the 20V range.
(B)
Digital multimeter
Set to the DC voltage measurement
the 20V range.
Tx VCO Voltage
Confirmation only
(c)
Standard Frequency
in
in
Marconi
Press the TX test key.
Connect the minus wire to the metal cover of the
module and the plus wire to TP5, measure the voltage, and check that it comes within the 0.7 to 1.8
Vdc range. Proceed no further if the voltage is outside the designated range.
Connect the minus wire to the metal cover of the
module and the plus wire to TP6, measure the voltage, and check that it comes within the 0.8 to 1.8
Vdc range. Proceed no further if the voltage is outside the designated range.
Adjust VC301 is such a way that the TX FREQ offset
value comes within the + 500 Hz range.
Telephone Analyzer
Take the corded phone off the hook.
(D)
TX Output
Marconi
Press the RX test key.
Set MOD1 to ON.
Connect LINE SCOPE on the telephone
analyzer and AF INPUT on the Marconi.
Adjust VR501 is such a way that the audio level is
set to -19 + 1 dBm.
Telephone Analyzer
Take the corded phone off the hook.
(E)
Standard Modulation
Marconi
Press the RX test key.
Set MOD1 to OFF.
Press the TX test key.
Set AF1 to ON.
Connect LINE SCOPE on the telephone
analyzer and AFGEN OUT on the
Marconi.
Press the _ key.
Adjust VR502 is such a way that the FM level is set
to 6.4 + 0.5 kHz.
Telephone Analyzer
Place the corded phone on the hook.
(F)
20 dB Electric Detection
Marconi
Press the TX test key.
Set AF1 to OFF.
Press the _ key.
Press the RX test key.
Set MOD1 to ON.
Connect LINE SCOPE on the telephone
analyzer and AF INPUT on the Marconi.
Telephone Analyzer
Take the corded phone off the hook.
Adjust GEN LEVEL on the Marconi in such a way
that the SIAND is set to 20 + 1 dB.
Adjust VR301 in such a way that the letter "C"
flashes on the machine's LCD display.
I
Flashes
Once aligned, please reassemble the base unit. Also take off the back of the PORTABLE
MIC lead short wire if you previously installed it.
-112-
HANDSET and unsolder the
KX-F900
CORDLESS
BASE UNIT REFERENCE
]
DRAWING
*CONNECTION
ANT
Marconi
INPUT
Corder
KX-F900
I
/
PHONE
• CORDLESS
Telephone
TEST
Telephone
JACKS#1
Analyzer
#2
LINE SCOPE
BASE UNIT P.C.BOARD
(Component
€..
C
View)
-t
I
m
z
.-I
RF Unit _
GND
D
TP5
•
O
TP6
Coaxial Cable
J
[]
VR502
Standard
Modulation
_
VR501
TX Output
"_"'- Cordless
Base
m
P.C.Board
( Soldering
O
--1
-113-
VC301
Standard --Frequency
side)
O
VR301
20dB
Noise Squelch
I
I
" KX'FgOo--
I
DISASSEMBLY
INSTRUCTIONS
Page
1. How to Remove the Handset Cradle Cab,
Cordless Base Unit Board and RF Unit .......................
115
2.
How to Remove the Operation Block ...........................................
116
3.
How to Remove the Operation Board and LCD ...........................
117
4.
How to Remove the Bottom Frame ..............................................
118
5.
How to Remove the Analog, Digital Boards, Speaker and Mic .... 118
6.
How to Remove the Power Supply Board and AC Inlet ............... 119
7.
How to Remove the Motor Block .................................................
119
8.
How to Remove the CCD Unit .....................................................
120
9.
How to Remove the Rollers .........................................................
120
10.
How to Remove the Cutter Block .................................................
121
11.
How to Remove the Recording Paper Cover ...............................
122
12.
How to Remove the Thermal Head Roller ...................................
123
13.
Howto Remove the Document Tray ............................................
124
14.
Howto Remove the Bottom Cabinet of Portable Handset ........... 125
15.
Howto Remove the Antenna and Portable Handset Board ......... 125
16.
How to Replace Flat Package IC .................................................
114-
126
Ref.No.1
HOW TO REMOVE
Procedure
1
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
THE PORTABLE
HANDSET
CRADLE
CAB, CORDLESS
BASE
UNIT BOARD AND RF UNIT
Push the front lid open button to open the operation block.
Pull the libs of unit.
Remove the handset cradle cabinet.
Remove the 3 screws (A).
Remove the 2 connectors.
Pull the libs of the RF unit and pull up the RF unit.
RF UNIT
CHARGE BOARD
HANDSET CRADLECABINET
CONNECTOR
CORDLESS
BASE UNIT
BOARD
r..D i
CONNECTOR
¢.Di
¢.Di
(A)&
f"rl i
I_01
m
i
(A)€
Ill
I
i.,-i
i
@
f.D I
r
J
i--
I
€/} I
FRONT LiD OPEN BUTTON
115-
i
KX-F900
Ref. No. 1
I
HOW TO REMOVE
THE OPERATION
BLOCK
Procedure
2
1) Push the front lid open button in the direction of the arrow to open the operation block.
2) Pull both sides of the arms. (See Fig. A)
3) Pull up the operation block.
®
®
©
Fig. A
OPERATION BLOCK
FRONT LID OPEN BUTfON
• HOW TO ATTACH THE OPERATION
BLOCK:
Operation Block
1) Set the both arms on the boss as showing in following
Fig. B.
2) Push the operation block down.
Boss
Fig. B
-116-
KX-F900
Ref. No. 3
Procedure
2--*3
HOW TO REMOVE THE OPERATION
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
BOARD AND LCD
Remove the 6 screws (A) and the operation block cover.
Remove the 2 screws (B).
Pull out the 1 connector and remove the 1 flexible connector.
Remove the operation board.
Removethe LCD.
(A)
OPERATION
CONNECTOR.__
BOARD COVER
(B)
Pulldown the
nnector
O
m
_
fRl:x?b_ee
tcohnenector
DN BOARD
Ill
m
r-
FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR
m
c_
z
--I
c
--I
0
z
€_
LCD
-117-
L
KX-F900
I
Ref. No. 4
Procedure
4
HOW TO REMOVE
THE BOTTOM
FRAME
1)
Remove the 6 screws (A).
2) Remove the 2 screws (B).
3) Remove the bottom frame.
_)
j_
(A)
BOTTOM FRAME
Ref. No. 5
Procedure
4_5
HOW TO REMOVE
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove
the
the
the
the
the
the
the
the
the
THE ANALOG,
3 screws (A).
analog board.
2 connectors.
7 connectors.
1 screws (B).
digital board.
1 screw (C).
speaker.
MIC.
DIGITAL
BOARDS,
SPEAKER
AND MIC
(A)
'ii'
ANALOG BOARD
MIC ,__
118-
CONNECTORS
- -KX:Fg00]
Ref. No. 6
Procedure
4,6
HOW TO REMOVE
1)
2)
3)
4)
Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove
the
the
the
the
THE POWER
SUPPLY
BOARD
AND AC INLET
4 screws (A) and remove the power supply board.
1 screw (B).
2 connectors.
AC inlet.
(A)
¶r _
POWER SUPPLY BOARD
Ref. No. 7
HOW TO REMOVE
CONNECTOR
_,(B)
/.'_i_
THE MOTOR
(A,
BLOCK
o
Procedure
4--,10--,7
1) Remove the paper cutter. (See Ref. No. 10)
2) Remove the 2 screws (A).
3) Remove the motor block.
m
_3
f-
_OR
BLOCK
m
o
z
00
-4
33
c
0
0
z
L
-119-
I
KX-F900
Ref. No. 8
Procedure
4-*8
HOW TO REMOVE
THE CCD UNIT
1) Remove the 2 screws (A).
2) Remove the CCD unit.
'_
(A)
i
UNIT
'
_
_--_-
CCD
°
HOW TO CLEAN:
Clean the glass of CCD
unit with cloth soaked in
alcohol.
Ref. No. 9
Procedure
4--,5---7
--*8-*9
HOW
1)
2)
3)
4)
TO REMOVE
Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove
the
the
the
the
THE ROLLERS
motor block. (See Ref. No. 7)
stopper with minus screwdriver.
rollers.
gear and stoppers from roller shaft and replace roller.
DOCUMENT FEED ROLLER_
_jSTOPPER
,,,_DOCUMENT
FEED ROLLER
_/,STOPPER
STOPPER@
SEPARAION ROLLER
_
STOPPER
GEAR STOPPER
-120-
Ref. No. 10
Procedure
10
HOW TO REMOVE
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
PAPER
THE CUTTER
BLOCK
Push the front lid open button in the direction of the arrow to open the operation block.
Remove the upper guide.
Remove the 2 screws (A).
Remove the shaft with minus screwdriver (small size) as showning in following Fig. A.
Remove the paper cutter block.
Remove the cutter guide.
Replace the paper cutter.
Remove the stopper with minus screwdriver (small size) as showing in following Fig. B.
Remove the recording paper roller.
GUIDE
Remove the shaft
Fig. A
(A)
STOPPER
O
I
60
RECORDING
PAPER ROLLER
60
60
m
m
iI
FRONT LID
OPEN BUTTON
Ill
o
I
z
60
-I
_o
c
O
-I
i
O
z
60
®
HOW TO CLEAN:
Clean the roller with cloth
soaked in alcohol.
JS DRIVER
Fig. B
-121 -
r ....
KX-F'O0
1
Ref. No. 11
Procedure
10-* 11
HOW TO REMOVE
THE RECODING
PAPER
COVER
1) Pull out the both arms as showing in following Fig. A.
2) Remove the recoding paper cover.
RECORDING
- 122-
PAPER COVER
Ref. No. 12
HOW TO REMOVE THE THERMAL HEAD ROLLER
Procedure
1)
2)
3)
4)
10-'12
Remove the thermal head block.
Pull out the 2 connectors.
Remove the 2 screws (A) of thermal head to remove the guides.
Replace the thermal head.
THERMAL HEAD BLOCK .
(A)_
ONNECT
GUIDEJ
THERMAL HEAD /
GUIDE j
I
_
I
I
I
orj I
_'J I
m I
I
I
m
I
i
i
i
i
_" (A)
HOW TO CLEAN:
Clean the printing surface
of thermal head with cloth
soaked in alcohol.
123-
i
n,_
i
[
i
_m
i
i
I
_')
I
L
KX-F900
Ref. No. 13
Procedure
13
I
HOW TO REMOVE THE DOCUMENT TRAY
1) Push the installing section in the direction of the arrow to remove the document tray.
®
DOCUMENT
®
-124-
TRAY
_-
Ref. No. 14
HOW TO REMOVE
THE BOTTOM
CABINET
OF PORTABLE
KX- -F9oo ..........
1
HANDSET
Procedure
14
1) Remove the battery cover in direction of arrow.
2) Remove the 2 screws (A) and remove the bottom cabinet.
- --
i
Ref. No. 15
Procedure
14---15
_.._)
HOW TO REMOVE
Battery Cover
THE ANTENNA
,I_,
AND PORTABLE
Bottom Cabinet
f__A)
(A)
HANDSET
BOARD
6t}
1) Remove the 1 screws (A).
2) Heat the solder as showing in folloing Fig. A
3) Pull up the Anttena.
€/)
m
r"
ill
z
-4
Heat the solder
i
,t!
j
- 125-
Fig. A
C
0
"-I
0
Z
I
KX-F900
1
HOW TO REPLACE FLAT PACKAGE IC
• PREPARATION
-SOLDER
Sparkle Solder 115A-1, 115B-1
OR
Almit Solder KR-19, KR-19RMA
• Soldering iron
Recommended power consumption will be between 30 W to 40 W.
Temperature of Copper Rod 662 + 50°F (350 +10°C )
(An expert may handle 60~80 W iron, but beginner might
damage foil by overheating.)
• Flux
HI115
Specific gravity 0.863
(Original flux will be replaced daily.)
• PROCEDURE
1. Temporarily fix FLAT PACKAGE IC by soldering on two marked pins.
-Temporary
*Check accurate setting of IC to the corresponding
soldering point.
soldering foil.
2. Apply flux for all pins of FLAT PACKAGE IC.
_._
.....
Flux
3. Solder using specified solder, in direction of arrow, by sliding the soldering iron.
Soldering
iron
Specified solder
• MODIFICATION
PROCEDURE
OF BRIDGE
1. Re-solder slightly on bridged portion.
2. Remove remaining solder along pins using soldering iron as shown in below figure.
bddge
- 126-
I
KX-F900
J
CIRCUIT OPERATIONS
Page
1. Connection Diagram ........................................................................
128
2. General Block Diagram ...........................................................
129-130
3. Control Section ........................................................................
131-136
3-1.
Block Diagram ...................................................................
132
3-2.
Reset Circuit ......................................................................
133
3-3.
SRAM and RTC Back up Circuit .......................................
134
3-4.
Supervision circuit for Thermal Head Temperature
3-5.
LED Array ..........................................................................
.......... 135
4. Facsimile Section .....................................................................
136
137~145
4-1.
Image Data Flow during Facsimile Operation ........... 137, 138
4-2.
Thermal Head ............................................................
4-3.
Read Section .....................................................................
141
4-4.
Stepping Motor Drive Section ...........................................
142
4-5.
Sensor and Switches ................................................
139, 140
143~145
5. MODEM Section ......................................................................
146~152
5-1.
Function .....................................................................
146-151
5-2.
MODEM Circuit Operation ................................................
152
6. Explanation of Analog Section Block Diagram ........................
153, 154
7. NCU Section ............................................................................
155, 156
8. ITS and Monitor Section ..........................................................
157, 158
9. TAM Interface Section ............................................................
159-161
10. Operation Panel .............................................................................
162
11. LCD COG Type ..............................................................................
163
12. Switching Power Supply Section ...........................................
t 64-166
13. Cordless Section ....................................................................
167~183
13-1. Explanation of Data Communication
........................ 167-170
13-2. Frequency Table ................................................................
170
13-3. Block diagram of Cordless Base Unit ....................... 171,172
o
€")
C
-I
O
"o
rrl
13-4. Circuit Operation of Cordless Base Unit ................... 173, 174
-I
13-5. Circuit Operation of RF Unit ......................................
175-177
13-6. Block diagram of Portable Handset ..........................
178, 179
13-7. Circuit Operation of Portable Handset ...................... 180~183
- 127-
o
z
1. CONNECTION
DIAGRAM
CN7
I
LED ARRAY
I
CN1
wl-I
+24v
CN8
[ sENs°R
1 °uZ °s1-1
CN6
+SVD
CCD
BOARD
0
2
O
O
3
4
4
5
6
O
O
O
4
5
6
CN152
7
8
9
O
C
e
8
2
10
C
10
COM
2
3
1
C
2
C
3
4'
C
C
_N272
11
NA
NI5
COM
21F _
_1_ CN25"
O
a
7
8
C
C
9
0
10
11
C
O
O 4
E
z
,_
ON3
CN25"
+5VA
5
2
A
SPEAKER
CN24"
c
<
O
O
Ex. TEL
9
CN2____
O
NA
NB
E
O
11 _.._..O
8
A
TO TEL LINE
O
<
CN10
ON2Z1
1
2
3
CN9
O 2
O3
O 4
5
20
3
4
3
4
30
40
5
6
7
5
6
50
60
7
70
8
11I
AG
DG
PG
M24V
+SVU
OUT
THPC)WEF
02
O
0
O
0
1O
3
4
5
6
71
8
POWER
SUPPLY
CN5
vSS
BOARD
CN11
012
OI
LCD
I "-R'/_V--
(COG)I _
20
_-I1
014
3
30
40
o 15__
5 o
11o
o,6
oo
ol 7
o 18_ 81o
O190m
oF0
910
IO10
o
o
2
3
O
o
4
5
O
o
6
7
O
o
8
9
0 2
o3
20
30
40
0
4
O5
50
6
60
70
O10
0
O
0
CN15
rr
<
O
rn
(D
O
J
<
Z
<
CN501
1"6
o----I1
20
OI2
30
40
50
60
OI3
OI4
OI5
OI6
70
80
OI7
OI8
OI9
190oO
MLED
M_+
MC
5
6
1 I
7
8
o
o
4
5
O
O
6
7
BATTERY
CHARGE
BOARD
8
OI10
0
O
o111
13
14
15
O
O
O
0113
0114
0115
1 o
20
30
16 O
170
0116
0117
OI18
40
5 o
6 o
O
11
SLED O 2
V.._...E__R
O 3
3
4
11
12
18
i CN651
CN503
0112
CN502
70
80
9 o
10
11
12
O
O
O
1
OI2
OI3
OI4
OI5
ol
OI 6
OI8
OI9
OI10
Oill
OI12
-128-
UF UNIT
7
8
HEAD
9
10
OI 11
OI12
O 6 THERMAL
o1_3
_114
o115
[-= KX--F 0- ]
2. GENERAL
BLOCK DIAGRAM
The control section will be explained as shown in the block diagraln.
(,1)
ASIC (JC1) .................... Composed mainly address decoder, modem control section, CPU and R-[C.
Control the general FAX operation.
Control the operation panel I/F.
Control the thermal head I/F and CCD I/F.
Executing image processing.
(2)
RQM (IC2) .................... Contains all of the program instructions for unit operations.
(3)
Static RAM (IC3) .......... This memory is used mainly for parameter working storage area.
(4)
MODEM (ICl 1) ............ Executes modulation and demodulation for FAX.
(5)
Read section ................ Composed of the LED array light source, CCD image sensor to read transmitting
documents.
(6)
Thermal Head .............. Contains heating elements for dot matrix image printing.
(7)
Motor driver (IC7, 108) .Drivers the transmission
(8)
Reset circuit (IC9) ........ Provides reset pulse to each of the major IC's.
(9)
Analog board ................ Composed of ITS circuit and NCU circuit.
motor and the reception motor.
(10)
Sensor section ............. Composed of cover open sensor, document sensor, recording paper sensor, cutter
(11)
Switching power ........... Supplies +5V and +24V to the unit.
position switch, read position sensor, and jam sensor.
supply section
(12)
Cordless section ........... Composed
of Cordless base unit, portable handset and battery charge unit.
(900MHz Cordless)
O
O
C
m
-I
O
ill
-I
m
O
z
129
F
General BLock Diagram (FAX)
OPERATION
PANEL
POWER
SENSOR
SUPPLY
LCD
RECTIFIER
LED
DOC READ-POSITION
SW. TRANS
--1
LCD
CONVERTER
iiiiii
I
'
ICON_
i
!
!
IIIlll
FILTER
IIIIII
MATRIX
_
KEY
SW. MOS
--_
SIRIAL
VF
ANALOG
P.C.B
6£
+24V
DIGITAL
PCB
BACK
UP
VCC M
M
÷SV
÷5V
T
0101
0
1C8
BA_
_
RL1Ol
Q1
L105
pOS
TEL
LINE
_
THERMAL
HEAD
IC202
AD_SST
÷_ATALU
I,
I
MOOR)
=
EXT
+
.--L
¢.o
O
I
SENSOR
_1
CUT-POS
ANT-CURL
I I
LJ
EL
{ !1
_
v--_lnF
1'F2 _
_-]
ICll
CPU-ASIC
[_-_---i
vox
M
sw215
T7D56
[
c::=
;OB_I
MOTOR_/F
L'
i
2
3
4
CROSSPO_NT
_-I_
]
241
SP
SPEAKER
MUTE
_Ect
'1'1 £ £ £
SW271
i_vEo
tt .............
SW2_
+24V
+SV
ti
TX MOTOR
RX MOTOR
ANTI CURL
(Refer to page 171 )
TONE1 TONE2
CORDLESS
BASE P.C.B.
t UN'T
JL
(Refer
to page
172)
ANT
3. CONTROL
SECTION
1Q ASIC (IC1)
This custom IC is used for g_n_ral PAX operatior_
(1)
CPU:
The KX-F900 uses a i_U equivalent CHU operating at 12MHz.
Many of the peripheral functions are handled by custom designed LSI.
As a result, the CPU only needs to process the result.
(2)
RTC:
Real time clock.
(3)
DECODER:
Decodes the address.
(4)
ROM/RAM I/F:
Controls the SELECT signal of ROM or RAM and bank switching.
(5)
CCD I/F:
Controls document reading.
(6)
IMAGE DATA RAM:
Inside ASIC and 8KB which is used by image processing.
(7)
THERMAL HEAD I/F:
Transmits the recorded data to the thermal head.
(8)
TX MOTOR I/F:
Controls the transmission
(9)
RX MOTOR I/F:
Controls the receiving motor which feeds the reading document.
(10)
OPERATION
Serial interface with Operation Panel.
(11)
I/O PORT:
PANEL I/F:
motor which feeds the document.
I/O Port Interface (Exa. Sensor etc.)
ROM (IC2)
This 128 KB ROM (EPROM or MASKROM) has 32 KB of common area and bank area (BK4-BK15).
The capacity of each bank is 8 KB.
The addresses of the common area are from 0000H to 7FFFH, and addressed from 8000H to 9FFFH are for the bank
area.
@ RAM (IC3)
This 32 KB RAM has 8 KB of common area and bank area (BK0, BK1 ).
The capacity of each bank is 12 KB.
The addresses of the common area are from D000H to EFFFH, and the addresses from A000H to CFFFH are for the
bank area.
O
O
C
-4
O
=o
m
0
z
131
A0_
RD_
f
D0-4
/
r
0
0
WR •
[
ROM(IC2)
L
MODEM(IC11
Q
SRAM(IC3)
Ao-17
i
Do--7!*/
A0-17D0_7F
----_ RD
RD'_
--_
WR
TO ANALOG
--_
RD
TX
WR
TXOUT
RX
RXlN
OP
CCD
CCD_TL
F1 ,F2,FR,FTG,VIDEO
qu_
<
24MHz
ASIC
T2/BELL --_
(IC1)
I
THPON
TONE 1
RESET
HEAD-CTL
I
--
XWDERR
"'
KSTART,KLATCH,KSCLK, KTXD,KRXD
_7°
OPE PANEL
x
L_oJ
qDJ
STBI4,THLAT
HEAD
THCLK,THDAT
32.768KHz 24MHz
(IC7)
TMO-3,TXE
5V/BATT
DR VER
(IC9) l
RESET
TX MOTOR
_TO
T×M
(tc8)
I
IqBACKOP
I
RMO-3,RXE
RX MOTO_
DR VER/
TO
RXM
_TT_
CCLK
csm
CSO
CBUSY1
_-!
CBUSY2
oo
KX-F900
3-2, RESET
CIRCUIT
The output from pin 3 of the Reset IC (IC9) resets the gate array (IC1), the modem (IC11), the gate array on the operating
board (10301), the Port IC (10151) on the analog board through the IC1.
(1) During to momentary power interruption, a positive reset pulse of 175 msec or more is generated and the system is reset
completely.
This is done to prevent partial resetting and system runaway during power fluctuation.
Timing Chart
4.2 _
+5
__
,,_.8,_4.
3
4.3
It
i
i
:
:about 175 ms
jj
: about 17._s_j}
i
I
(2) When pin 3 of the IO9 becomes low level, it will prohibit the RAM (IO3) from changing data.
The RAM (IC3) go into the backup mode, when it is backed up by the lithium battery.
Circuit Diagram
R78
+5V
IC9
IC1
101
WDERR
lo__L
064
102
RESET (TO ANALOG BOARD,
OPERATION BOARD)
103
RESET (TO MODEM)
c00
(')
C
-I
O
"1o
rn
_>
--I
i
O
Z
(3) The watch dog timer, built-in the gate array (IO1), is initialized about every 1.5 ms.
When the watch dog error occurs, pin 104 of the gate array (IC1) becomes low level.
The terminal of WDERR signal is connected to the reset line so, WDERR signal works as the reset signal.
-133-
KX-F900
3-3. SRAM and RTC BACK UP CIRCUIT
(1)Function
This unit has a lithium battery (BATT), which works tor the RAM (IC3) and Real Time Clock IC (RTC,lntegrated into
ASIC:IC1 ). The user parameter of autodial numbers, the transmission ID, the system setup date and so on are stored
in the RAM (IC3).
The RTC continues functioning, even when the power switch is OFF, back up by the lithium battery.
(2)Circuit Operation
When the power switch is turned ON, thus supplying the power through the IC9 to the RAM (IC3) and RTC.
At this time, the voltage at pin 28 of the RAM and pin 43 of the RTC are +5 V. When the power switch is turned OFF,
the BATT supplies the power to the RAM and RTC through the J1, R76 and IC9. At the time, the voltage at pin 28 of
the RAM and pin 43 of the RTC are about +2.5 V. When the power switch is OFF and the voltage of +5 V goes down,
the Reset IC. (IC9) outputs the reset signals. Pin 28 of the RAM (IC3) and pin 43 of the RTC become low level, then
the RAM and RTC go into the back up mode, when the power consumption is less.
Circuit Diagram
IC9
+5V
C64 1
DETECTION
1
VOLTAGE
J_l
SRAM
IC403
VCC O
I
I
I
I
5V/BATT
ICl
"
.
28 vcc
_1
43
48
C€
R76
--C41
,,.
----q
BATT
C421
_° _L
', H
x _Tq4
J
RTC
-134-
47
-
i J_7
r
KX-F900
]
3-4. SUPERVISION CIRCUIT FOR THERMAL HEAD TEMPERATURE
(1) Function
Thermal head temperature is disposed to convert voltage to digital data by using A!D converter of IC1. The CPU decides
the strobe width of the thermal head according to this value. Therefore, this circuit can keep the thermal head at an even
temperature in order to stabilize the printing density and prevent the head from being overheated.
Circuit Diagram
28
i
/
_,
\
\
\
\
\
27
26
25
22
24
23
49
38
THHEAD
STB1
STB2
STB3
STB4
THDAT
THCLK
THLAT
ADSEL1
AIN2
r ......
t
R47
_
C37
__y¢l-__
C39
IC1
R48
R49
Timing Chart
I
Effective signal
©
1.5V
ref LEVEL CLAMP
IC1 internal bias
CLAMP
t"_l
N
i
:;Ol
t"_l
C:l
m
,
OI
"Ol
I1"11
21
Ol
135-
].....
KX:F,00
]
3-5. LED ARRAY
The LED ARRAY will light during transmission
ics on a document.
and copying as a light source to recognize document characters, patterns, or graph-
It is also possible to light the LED ARRAY in the test mode.
Circuit Diagram
+24V
ABOUT 10V (LED OFF)
0V (LED ON)
IC7
ICl
.-.-(
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5V (LED ON)
0V (LED OFF)
LED ARRAY
MAIN BOARD
136
4. FACSIMILE
SECTION
4-1. IMAGE DATA FLOW DURING FACSIMILE OPERATION
COPY (Fine, Super-Fine,
Half Tone)
(1) Line information is read by CCD, by way of route 1(!), it is inputted to IC1.
(2) In ICl, data is adjusted to suitable level for A/D conversion at Analog Signal P_uc_ssing Section, and by way of
route (_) it is inputted to A/D conversion (8 bit). After finishing A/D conversion, data is inputted to Image Processing
Section by way of route _, and by way of routes @ and ®, it is stored in RAM as shading data.
(3) Draft's information that is read by CCD is inputted to IC1 by way of route (!), and after adjusting to suitable level
for A/D conversion by way of route (_), draft's information is converted to A/D (8 bit), and it is inputted to Image
Processing Section. The other side, the shading data which flows from RAM by way of routes ® and (_, it is
inputted to Image Processing Section, and after finishing of draft's information's image processing, white is
regarded as "0" and black is regarded as "1", and by way of routes @ and ®, they are stored in RAM.
(4) White/Black data stored as above description 3), by way of routes @ and ®, it is inputted to P/S converter. White/
Black data converted to serial data in P/S converter is inputted to Thermal Head by way of route (_ and it is printed
out on recording paper.
Note: Standard;
Read 3.85 times/mm
Fine;
Read 7.7 times/mm
Super-Fine;
Read 15.4 times/mm
Transmission
(1) Same processing of COPY items 1) - 3).
(2) Data stored in RAM of IO1 is outputted from IC1 by way of routes @ and _, and it is stored in system bus, and by
way of route @, it is stored in communication buffer inside RAM (IC3).
(3) While fetching data stored in communication buffer synchronous with modem, CPU inputs data to modem along
route @, where it is converted to serial analog data and forwarded over telephone lines via NCU Section.
Reception
(1) Serial analog image data is received over telephone lines and input to the modem via NCU section, where it is
demodulated to parallel digital data. Then the CPU stores the data in the communication buffer of RAM (IC3) along
route 12.
(2) Data stored in RAM (IC3) is decoded by CPU by way of way of route @, and it is stored in RAM by routes (_ and
®.
(3) Same processing of COPY item 4).
O
O
C
-I
O
"o
rrl
_0
-I
m
O
z
137
[ ..... Kx-F900
.....
}
Block Diagram
IC1
(9
SYS] EM
BUS
IC3
ANALOG
SIGNAL
RAM
IMAGE
PROCESSING
SECTION
PROCESSING
SECTION
I
IC2
cPul
ROM
/
/
.,,__ /I
RAM
\\"
O
P/S
CONVERTER
/
MODEM
NCU
TEL.LINE
138
,. HEAD
THERMAL
KX-F900
4-2. THERMAL HEAD
(1)Function
This unit utilizes state of the art thermal printer technology.
The recording paper (roll paper) is chemically processed. When the thermal head contacts this paper it emits heat momen
tarily, black dots (appearing almost as a point) are printed on the paper. If this point is continued, litters and/or diagrams
appear, and the original document is reproduced.
COMPOSITION
OF THE RECEIVE RECORD SECTION (THERMAL
RECORDING
FORMAT)
Platen Roller
Thermal Recording Paper
T
Thermal Head
(2)Circuit Operation
There are 18 driver ICs aligned horizontally on the thermal head and each one of these ICs can drive 96 heat emitting
registers. This means that one line is at a density of 96 )< 18=1728 dots=(8 dots/mm).
White/Black (white=0, black=l) data in one line increments is synchronized at IC1 pin 24 (THCLK) and sent from IC1 pin
22 (THDAT) to the shift register of the fCs. The shift registers of the 18 tCs are connected in series, and upon shift of 1728
dot increment, all the shift register become filled with data, and a latch pulse is emitted to each IC from IC1 pin 23
(THLAT).
With this latch pulse, all the contents of shift registers are latched to the latch registers. Thereafter, through the addition of
strobe from the IC1 pins (25, 26, 27, 28) only dot of location of black (=1) among latched data activates driver, and current
passes to heat emitting body to cause heat emission.
Here the strobe of four lines STB1 to STB4 impresses at intervals of 9.216 msec, as required for one-line printout, for
each 1/4th of 18 IC unit (4 unit or 5 unit) upon each time interval divided into four equal increments.
The sequence is as shown below. [Moreover, in the case of strobe width, the resistance value of the thermistor inside the
thermal head is constantly detected by IC1 pin 38, and vales from the ROM (IC2) table corresponding to temperatures
eliminate temperature changes of density through setting by CPU.]
When the thermal head is not used, the IC1 (119, TH-POWER) becomes low level, IC7 becomes OFF, RL201 breaks, and
the +24 V power supply for the thermal head driver is not impressed to protect the IC.
O
O
t..-I
O
m
--i
0
z
-139-
l
j
Circuit Diagram
MAINBOARD
',JWIICHING
POWER
SUPPLY
L_JAHD
1HERMAL
24V
RL201
CN301
"/L_o_
i
E 1 .+24V
o=o_t_.;÷_v
F-2:1: _ +_v I
111
,
,
, ,0oo..
:.
,SOOT.......
l l---t
NO'I
--{Ii'-----I
NO'2
I _NO_._8
GATE ARRAYI
(IC,)
:.c_,_
I
"16
I
I-
HEAD
CN2
s:,,=
t_;
c
]
{_}--'--_
2
.5°
:.o.:,_ i.II
=
T.OL,
3='"' I' _--
T
8
I
_
R55
,_R_I
STB1
I
I
["
_
l
XI XlJI
''
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
' '
'
'
I
' r_
; "
,
I_ {_----_
.
.
i
I
I
-
I
R52
I
Ic,o
_,_
,.,.STO°
I
l°'°t"_
° U
.,
Timing Chart
(3.0MsecX1728)
CN6
PRINT DATA
NEXT LINE PRINT DATA
4
@
THDAT
,_-
3.01._sec
@ T.C_JqJ]J]_l_
....... -I1_[1
1728 pcs
@
5.184reset
I
_,-
I1Jl__J1Jl [lj1
3.0psec
THLAT
320 pcs
FLIq
FIFL
1728 pcs
.0p.sec
about 1.8 msec (at 26°C)
®
®
®
®
STB1
3.0psec _
STB2
______j._..p.
i
=
J
=
=
LI
-
[--_
TEMPERATURE
OF THERMALHEAD
I
m
i
i
__J
STB3
LIJ
STB4
i
i
i
i
i
i
L_J
i
=I
9.216 msec(COPY)
- 140-
[-
KX-F900
4-3. READ SECTION
(1) Function
eA document is illuminated by the LED array, and the reflections pass through the reduction-projection lens and are imaged on the CCD image sensor.
eThe document image is photoelectrically transferred by the CCD image sensor, and an analog image signal corresponding to one line of the document is continuously output.
• The anatog image signal enters the image signal processing circuit in ASIC (ICl) and then is coverted into a digital data.
(2) Circuit Operation
[Start]
When the START/COPY/SET button is pressed, ICl pin 62 goes to a high level and IC7 is turned ON, which makes CN7
pin 2 go to a low level and the voltage applied to the LED array to turn on the LED.
F1, F2, FR and FTG signals are output to the CCD board to drive the CCD image sensor. Therefore, when the LED is
turned ON, the VIDEO (analog image signal) is output from the CCD board to CN5 pin 7.
CCD Scanner Timing Chart (1 Dot Cycle)
F1
m
I
I
F2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
__1
I
FR
I
I
I
I
]
I
>>1
VIDEO
I
!
I
I
I
I
I<< ND data valif
I
I
Block Diagram
+5V
LED
ARRAY
1
CCD
BOARD
CN6
c1
DOCUMENT
iC1
R70
o2
1I-I
",,,,LI
15
R71
14
R72
13
R7a
12
6,8
o-
-I V,D O
o7
F153
F252
FR51
FTG50
84
4O
AIN1
R74
t
R75
o_
62
II
IC7
CN7
*24VI
0V
-141 -
_o
O
c
.-I
O
"o
m
_0
_>
--I
O
z
I
KX-F900
1
4-4. STEPPING MOTOR DRIVE CIRCUIT
(1) Function
Two individual stepping motors are used for transmission and reception. They feed document or recording paper
synchronized for reading or printing.
(2| Circuit Operation
During motor drive, gate array IC1 pin 77/pin 71 becomes high level, Q2/Q4 are turned ON, and QI/Q3 go ON as a result,
+24 V issuppliedto the motorcoil.
Steppingpulsesare outputform gate array IC1, causingdriver IC7/IC8 to go ON. The motorcoil isenergized sequentiallyin
2 phaseincrements,whichcausesa 1-step rotation.Rotationof 1-step 0.13mm of recordingpaperor documentpaper.
Timingchart isbelow.
Timing Chart
Stepping Motor Phase Pattern
Drive Phase
Mode
Pattern
1-2
STD
1-2
Fine/Half Tone
1-2
Super Fine
1-2
STD
Fine/Half Tone 1-2
1-2
Super Fine
1-2
Paper Feed
Function
TM0(RM0)
Copy
TMI(RM1)
TM2(RM2)
FAX
TM3(RM3)
Speed
434
434
217
434
434
217
217
pps
pps
pps
pps
pps
pps
pps
1-2. Phase (Asic TM0-TM3, RM0-RM3 output)
Circuit Diagram
Phase 0
R43 +24v
(let)
m
,,_
(R_5)'
m
m
Phase 1
+5V
GATE ARRAY
- -
Phase 2
1
Phase 3
m
m
m
m
m
mm
I
I
m
mm
mm
m
m
um
m
Ol
mm
(02)
(Q3)
TXE
(RXE) '
mm
n
(R46)
(71)
((_ )
max. _/434 (sec)
IC7(IC8)
D3
TM0
(RMO)
73
(67)
4
(4)
TM1
(RM1)
74
5
(68)
(5)
TM2
(RM2)
75
(69)
6
(6)
TM3
(RM3)
7(_
(70)
7
(7)
Q
Q
Q
Q
ittt
(
1 '(Igl
I!
11
(11)
10
) (10)
)
CN9
(ON 10)
4
5
o3
TRANSMISSION
MOTOR
o2
o-
_
RECEPTION)
1
o-
When the motor is OFF, gate array IC1 pin 77/pin 71 becomes low level and Q2/Q4 are turn OFF. This causes Q1/Q3 to
also go OFF and inserted of +24V, +5V is supplied through DI/D2 so that the motor is held in place.
- 142-
KX-F900
I
4-5. SENSORS AND SWITCHES
[Recording
Paper Sensor (SW273)]
_N_en recording paper is present, the plate push the switch lever, the input signal of IC151-6 pin (ANALOG) becomes low
level. When the set runs out of recording paper, the plate leaves the switch lever, the input signal of IC151-6 pin (ANALOG)
becomes high level.
I,,
,,I
o/o_,
IC151
6
SW273
R276 ,_C273
Analog Board
Signal (IC151-6 Pin)
Set Recording Paper
Low level
No recording Paper
High level
[JAM Sensor (SW272)]
When recording paper is jammed, the plate push the switch lever, the input signal of IC151-7 pin (ANALOG) becomes low
level. Usually, the plate leaves the switch lever the input signal of IC151-7 pin (ANALOG) becomes high level.
I,, ,,I
___Jo _,
t
R273
IC151
7
R274 i
,_
C272
SW272
c__.i
'--I_
oi
m ¸
Analog Board
Signal (IC151-7 Pin)
JAM
Low level
NO JAM
High level
- 143-
-I
O
Z
KX-F900
[Cover Open Sensor (SW271)]
When the upper cabinet is closed, the plate push the switch lever, the input signal of IC151-33pin (ANALOG)
becomes low level. When there is opened, the plate leaves the switch lever, the input signal of IC151-33pin (ANALOG)
becomes high level.
l
IC151
o/o
Analog Board
Signal (IC151-33 Pin)
Close
Low level
Open
High level
[Read Position Sensor (PI301)]
When an document is brought to read position, the shelter plate pass the sensor light, the phototransistor becomes ON,
and the input signal of IC301-15pin (Operation) becomes low level. When there is no document at the read position, the
shelter plate shuts the sensor light, the phototransistor becomes OFF, and the input signal of IC301-15pin (Operation)
becomes high level. (When checking this sensor condition, IC301-16 pin becomes low level).
SHELTER PLATE
+5V
+5V
IC301
15
i
i
i
i
,
i
i
i
i
i
--
16
XLD12
LED11
1
R331
Operation Board
Phototransistor
Signal (IC301-15 Pin)
Out of the Read Position
OFF
High level
At the Read Position
ON
Low level
- 144-
KX-F900
1
[Document Sensor (PI302)]
When a document is set, the shelter plate shuts the sensor ligh, the phototransist or becomes OFF, and the input signal
of IC301-15 pin (Operation) becomes high level. When there is no document, the shelter plate passes the sensor light, the
pt_ototTa_s'ts_.or
becomes ON, and the input signal of IC301-15 pin (Operation) becomes low level.
(When checking this sensor condition, IC301-9 pin becomes low level.)
SHELTER PLATE
+5V
IC301
15
XLD12
9
_LED10
.................
=
R332
Analog, Digital and Operation Board
Phototransistor
Signal
(IC301-15
No document
ON
Low level
Set document
OFF
High level
Pin)
_.9
30
O
C
"-4
O
"1o
m
::o
_>
-I
O
z
-145-
KX-F900
5. MODEM SECTION
5-1, FUNCTION
The unit uses a 1 chip modem (IC11 ), enabling it to act as an interface between the control section for FAX sending and
receiving, and the telephone line. During a sending operation, the digital image signals are modulated and sent to the
telephone line, while during a receiving operation, the analog image signals which are received via the telephone line are
demodulated and converted into digital image signals. The communication format and procedures for FAX communication
are standardized by ITU-T. This 1 chip modem (IC11 ) has hardware which sends and detects all of the necessary signals
for FAX communication and DTMF.
It can be controlled by writing commands from the ASIC (IC1) to the register in the modem (IC11).
This modem (IC11) also sends DTMF signals, generates a call tone (from the speaker), and detects a busy tone and dial
tones and DTMF.
Overview of Facsimile Communication
(1)
(2)
(3)
Procedures
(ITU-T Recommendation):
ON ITU-T (International Telecommunications'
Union.)
The No. XIV Group of ITU-T, one of the four permanent organizations of the International Telecommunications
(ITU), investigates and make recommendations on international standards for facsimile.
Union
Definition of Each Group
• Group I (G1)
A-4 size documents official without using formats which reduce the band width of signal sent over telephone lines.
Determined in 1968.
Transmission for about 6 minutes at scanning line density of 3.85 lines/ram.
• Group II (G2)
Using reduction technology in the modulation/demodulation
format, A-4 size document is sent at an official scanning
line density of 3.85 tines/mm for about 3 minutes.
Methods to suppress redundancy are not used.
Determined in 1976.
• Group III (G3)
Method of suppressing redundancy in the image signal prior to modulation is used. A-4 size document is sent within
about one minute.
Determined in 1980.
• Group IV (G4)
Transmission is via data network. Method is provided for suppressing redundancy in signals priorto transmission,
and error-free reception of transmission is possible.
The scope of these facsimile applications is not limited simply to transmission of written statements. Through
symbiotic linkages with other communications methods, it can be expected to expand to include integrated services.
Facsimile Call Time Series
As shown in the following diagram, the facsimile call time series is divided into five phases.
Message Transmission
F-
_',
I
Phase E
I
"1
_
PhaseA
I. PhaseB
Facsimile Procedure
IFacsimile
PhaseC CallI PhaseD
ID
v
[
Progress derection of operation
Phase A: Call setting
Call setting can be manual/automatic.
Phase B: Pre-message procedure
Phase B is a pre-processing procedure and a sequence for confirming status of terminal, transmission route, etc. and
for ter-minal control. It implements terminal preparation status, determines and displays terminal constants, confirms
synchronization status, etc. and prepares for transmission of facsimile messages.
Phase C: Message transmission
Phase C is the procedure for transmission of facsimile messages.
Phase D • Post message procedure
Phase D is the procedure for confirming that the message is completed and received. In the case of continuous
transmission, return is made repeatedly to phase B or phase C for transmission.
Phase E • Call retrieval
Phase E is the procedure for call retrieval, that is, for circuit disconnection.
- 146-
I
(4) Concerning Transmission
KX-F900
of Time
[Transmission
T,mel=
I Contro,
T,mo
I+
I+
Transmission time consists of the following.
Control time :
This is time at the start of transmission when functions at the sending and receiving sides are
confirmed, transmission mode is established, and transmission and reception are
synchronized.
Image transmission
time:
This is the time required for transmission of document contents (image data). In general, this
time is recorded in the catalog, etc.
Hold time:
This is the time required after the document contents have been sent to confirm that the
document was in fact sent, and to check for telephone reservations and/or the existence of
continuous transmission.
(5) Facsimile Standard
Telephone Network Facimile
Item
_
G3 Machine
Telephone Network Signal Mode
Terminal Control Mode
T. 30 Binary
Facsimile Signal Format
Digital
Modulation Mode
PSK (V. 27 ter) or QAM (V. 29)
Transmission
300 bps (control Signal)
i
Connection Control Mode
Speed
2400, 4800, 7200, 9600 bps (FAX Signal)
Redundancy
Compression
Process
(Coding Mode)
1 dimension : MH Mode
2 dimension : MR Mode (K=2.4)
Main Scan : 8 pel/mm
Resolution
Sub Scan : 3.85, 7.71/mm
Line Synchronization
1 Line Transmission
[ms/line]
Signal
Time
EOL Signal
Depends on degree of data reduction.
Minimum Value : 10, 20
Can be recognized in 40ms.
O
O
-I
O
"o
m
30
),
-I
O
z
147
I.....
KX:FgO0
.........
I
(6) Explanation of Technology
(j) G3 Communication Signals (T. 30 Binary Process)
In G3 Facsimile communication, this is the procedure for exchange of control signals between the sending and receiving
machines both before and after transception of image signals.
Control signals at 300 bps FSK are: 1850 Hz...0, 1650Hz...1.
An example of binary process in G3 communication is shown below.
Transmitter Side
Ph_Lse A
Receiver Side
Document set
Dial
Bell Detection
(CNG)
._
CED
Notifies of capacity of
receiving unit (e.g., recording
paper width, transmission speed).
FAX SW
DIS
Phase B
Checks the performance of the
sendingmachine (document width,
transmission speed, etc.), and sets
the communication mode.
----_____
DCS
Check the receive preparation
and line condition.
Training 1, TCF
CFR
Transmission
Start
Receive preparation OK
Training 2
Record Start
Phase C
Image Information
Record Stop
Transmission
End
EOP
Phase D
1
Reception OK
MCF
Information of Disconnect
Disconnect
Phase E
.---.__._____
DCN
Disconnect
Explanation of Signals
Control signals are comprised mainly of 8-bit identification signals and the data signals added to them. Data signals
are added to DIS and DCS signals.
Signal ..... DIS (Digital Identification
Signal)
Function:
Notifies of capacity of receiving unit
Identification Signal Format .....00000001
The added data signals are as follows.
(Example)
Bit No.
DIS/DTC
DCS
1
Transmitter - T. 2 operation
2
Receiver - T. 2 operation
Receiver - T. 2 operation
3
T.2 IOC = 176
T. 2 IOC = 176
4
Transmitter - T. 3 operation
5
Receiver - T. 3 operation
6
Reserved for future T. 3 operation features
Receiver - T. 3 operation
- 148-
KX-F900
Bit No.
DIS/DTC
7
Reserved for future T.3 operation features
DCS
8
Reserved for future T.3 operation features
9
Transmitter
10
Receiver - T.4 operation
Receiver - T.4 operation
Data signalling rate
(0, O)
Data signalling rate
V.27 ter fallback mode
(0, 1)
V.27 ter
4800 bit/s V.27 ter
(1, O)
V.29
9600 bit/s V.29
(1,1)
V.27 ter and V.29
7200 bit/s V.29
11,12
13
- T.4 operation
2400 bit/s V.27 ter
Reserved for new modulation system
14
Reserved for new modulation system
15
Vertical resolution = 7.7 line/mm
Vertical resolution = 7.7 line/mm
16
Two-dimensional
Two-dimensional
coding capability
coding
17, 18
Recording width capabilities
Recording width
(0, O)
1728 picture elements along scan line
1728 picture elements along scan line
length of 215 mm 4- 1%
length of 215 mm _ 1%
1728 picture elements along scan line
2432 picture elements along scan line
length of 215 mm __+1% and
length of 303 mm 4- 1% and
(o,1)
2048 picture elements along scan line
length of 255 mm _ 1% and
2432 picture elements along scan line
length of 303 mm 4- 1%
(1, O)
1728 picture elements along scan line
2048 picture elements along scan line
length of 215 mm _ 1% and
length of 255 mm _ 1% and
2048 picture elements along scan line
length of 255 mm -I- 1%
(I, 1)
Invalid (see Note 7)
Invalid
19, 20
Maximum recording length capability
Maximum recording length
(0, 0)
A4 (297 ram)
Unlimited
A4 (297 mm)
Unlimited
A4 (297 mm) and B4 (364 mm)
Invalid
B4 (364 mm)
Invalid
(0, 1)
(1,0)
(1, 1)
Signal ..... DCS (Digital Command Signal)
Identification
Signal Format ..... X1000001
(Example)
Function:
Notifies of capacity of receiving machine obtained
at DIS and announces the transmission mode of
the sender. The added data signals are as follows.
Bit No.
DIS/DTC
21,22, 23
Minimum scan line time capability at the receiver
Minimum scan line time
(0, 0, 0)
20 ms at 3.851/mm: T7.7=T3.85
20 ms
(o,o,I)
40 ms at 3.851/mm: T7.7=T3.85
40 ms
(0, 1,0)
10 ms at 3.851/mm: T7.7=T3.85
10ms
OI
m I
(1,0, 0)
5 ms at 3.851/mm: T7.7=T3.85
5ms
D,
(0,1,1)
10 ms at 3.851/mm: T7.7=1/2 T3.85
(1, 1,0)
20 ms at 3.851/mm: T7.7=1/2 T3.85
(1,0, 1)
40 ms at 3.851/mm: T7.7=1/2 T3.85
(1,1,1)
0 ms at 3.851/mm: T7.7=T3.85
DCS
Standard setting
L"_.I
B
('_1
Ol
0ms
-149-
,
[
KX-F900
I
DIS/DTC
Bit No.
Standard setting..........
Dcs
Extend field
1
Extend field
25
2400 bitJs handshaking
0
2400 bitJs handshaking
26
Uncompressed
mode
0
Uncompressed
27
Error correction mode
0
Error correction mode
28
Set to "0"
0
Frame size 0 = 256 octets
24
..........
mode
1 = 64 octets
29
Error limiting mode
0
Error limiting mode
30
Reserved for G4 capability on PSTN
0
Reserved for G4 capability on PSTN
31
Unassigned
0
32
Extend field
1
33
Validity of bits 17,18
(0)
Bits 17,18 are valid
(1)
Bits 17,18 are invalid
34
Recording width capability 1216 picture elements
Recording width
0
0
Middle 1216 elements of 1728 picture
elements
Recording width capability 864 picture elements
0
Middle 864 elements of 1728 picture
elements
along scan line length of 107 mm 4- 1%
36
Recording width indicated by bits 17,18
Recording width indicated by this field bit
information
along scan line length of 151 mm __.1%
35
Extend field
Recording width capability 1728 picture elements
0
Invalid
0
Invalid
along scan line Jength of 151 mm 4- 1%
37
Recording width capability 1728 picture elements
along scan line length of 107 mm 4- 1%
38
Reserved for future recording width capability
0
39
Reserved for future recording width capability
0
40
Extend field
1
41
Semi super time / mm
1
42
Semi super time / inch
0
43
Super time
0
44
inch
0
45
mm
1
46
MSC/SF
0
47
Select polling
0
48
EXT
0
Extend field
Note 1 - Standard facsimile units conforming to T.2 must have the following capability : Index of cooperation (IOC)=264.
Note 2 - Standard facsimile units conforming to T.3 must have the following capability : Index of cooperation (IOC)=264.
Note 1 - Standard facsimile units conforming to T.4 must have the following capability : Paper length=297 mm.
Signal
IdentificationSignalFormat
Function
Training 1
Fixed pattern is transmitted to receiving side at speed
(2400 to 9600 bps) designated by DCS, and the receiving side
optimizes the automatic equalizer, etc., according to this signal.
TCF
Sends 0 continuously
training signal.
(Training Check)
for 1.5 seconds at the same speed as the
(Confirmation to Receive)
Notifies sending side that TCF has been properly received. If
TCF is not properly received, FTT (Failure To Train) X0100010
is relayed to sender. Sender then reduces transmission speed
by one stage and initiates training once again.
Training 2
Used for reconfirmation
CFR
X0100001
-- 150-
of receiving side the same as training 1
;
Signal
----K_X-F9oo........
Function
Identification Signal Format
Refer to next page.
Image Signal
RTC
Sends 12 bit (0...01 X 6 times to receiver at same
speed as image signal and notifies of completion of
transmission of first sheet.
(Return to Control)
EOP
X1110100
End of one communication
X0110001
End of I page reception
X1011111
Phase E starts.
X1110010
Completion of transmission of I page. If there are still
more documents to be sent, they are output instead of
EOP. After MCF reception, sender transmits image
signal of second sheet.
Xl 111100
If there is an operator call from the sender, it is output
(End of Procedure)
MCF
(Message Confirmation)
DCN
(Disconnect)
MPS
(Multi-Page Signal)
PRI-EOP
(Procedural Interrupt-EOP)
after RTC.
PIP
X0110101
Output in the case of operator call from receiver.
(Procedural Interrupt Positive)
(_) Redundancy Compression Process Coding Mode
This set uses one-dimensional MH format.
Modified
Run length
(a) Document
Basic Technique of Facsimile
I
(b) Part of document
Facsimile
--://
/_=::
Black 4
(c) Run
and
imagelength
signals
equivalent to (b)
(d) Codification of
(c) according to
MH formula
i
White
//
00110111101010
(White400)
11
(Black 2)
2
4
_
2
16 _ 18
011
(Black4)
0100111
(White 18)
Huffman
(MH) Code
Code for
110101
(White 15)
000101
(Black 8)
8
3
13[-']__
11
(Black 2)
000011
(White 13)
-151 -
Black Line
0
00110101
000011011
1
000111
010
2
0111
11
3
1000
10
4
1011
011
5
1100
0011
6
1110
0010
7
1111
00011
8
10011
o001o1
9
10100
000100
10
00111
0000100
11
010(30
0000101
12
001000
0000111
13
000011
00000100
14
110100
00000111
15
110101
000011000
16
101010
0000010111
17
101011
0000011000
18
0100111
0000001000
/.___
001000
(White 12)
10
(Black 3)
(c) Total bit number before MH codification (497 bit)
(d) Total bit number after MH codification (63 bit)
Code for
White Line
011
(Black 4)
101010
(White 16)
C)
O
c::
-I
O
"o
m
3>
-I
R
0
z
KX-F900
I
5-2.MODEM CIRCUIT OPERATION
The modem (IC11) has all the hardware satisfying the IIU-I standards mentioned previously.
When the gate array IO1 (116) is brought to low level, the modem (IO11) is chip-selected and resistors inside IC are selected
by select signals from ASlO (IO1) A0-A4, commands are written through data bus, and all processing is controlled at the ASlC
(ICl) according to ITU-T procedures. Here the signal IN"-Tdispatched from _
(pin 52 of I011) to the ASlC (IO1) when
preparation for acceptance of transmission data is OK and when demodulation of reception data is complete, the ASIC (IO1)
implements post processing. This modem (IO11) has an automatic application equalizer. With training signal 1 or 2 at time of
G3 reception, it can automatically establish the optimum equalizer. Also, the modem (IO11) generates an internal clock of
24.00014MHz by means of an external crystal oscillator (Xl).
(1) Facsimile TransmissionlDTMF
Line Send
The digital image data on the data bus is modulated in the modem (ICl 1), and sent from pin 44 via amplifier
IO10 (6 -,- 7), the NCU section to the telephone line.
IC11 (44) -[_
C73- r R90 --* 1010(6-7) _ CNI(10)
C74-'
_ 0N271(10)
_ C184 _ R182 -* IC151(73-63)
[C203 -" R210 ---*IC201(2-1) --* C202 -" R201 _ T101] -* TEL LINE.
[
]: NCU section
(2) Facsimile Reception
The analog image deta Which is received from the telephone line passes through the NCU section and enters pin 45 of the
modem (IC11 ). The signals that enter pin 45 of the modem (IC11 ) are demodulated in the board to digital image signals,
then placed on the data bus.
In this case, the image signals from the telephone line are transmitted serially, Hence they are placed on the bus in 8 bit
units. Here, internal the equalizer circuit reduces the image signals to the long-distance receiving level.
It is designed to correct the characteristics of the frequency band centered about 3 kHz and maintain a constant receiving
sensitivity. It can be set in the service mode.
TEL.Line --* T101 -4 R202 --, C205 --* 10201(6-7) --* C210 --* C212 --* R215 --* C213 _ IO202(1-2) --* O217
CN271(9) --* Rll -* IC10(2-1) _ C19 ---* R13 -* IC11(45)
(3) DTMF Transmission (Monitor tone)
The DTMF signal generated in the modem (IC11) is output from pin 44, then passes through the analog G/A IO151, and
the NCU section to the telephone line as same as facsimile transmission signals.
(DTMF Monitor Tone)
IC11 (44) _
073
-+ ICl 0(6-7) --, ON1 (10) _ 0N271 (10) --* C184 --* R184 --, I0151 (76-41) --* O158 --,R161 --,
074 _R90
-J
IC151 (40-38) --* R245 ---,0245 --, 10241 (4-5,8) _ Speaker
(4) Call Tone Transmission
The call signal which is generated in the ASIC (IC1) passes through analog G/A IC151 and IC241 (4 --, 8, 5) to the speaker.
I01(85,87)
-_
R59 -* 056_* 0N2(1) --* 0N272(1) -+ R186 --* O187 _ IO151(78-41) --* C158 _ R161 ---*
R60 ---*C57 -J
IC151 (40-38) --, R245 --* C245 ---,IC241 (4-5,8) _ Speaker
(5) Busy/Dial Tone Detection
The path is the same as for FAX receiving. When it is detected, the carrier detect bit of the resistor in the modem
(IC11) becomes 1, and this status is monitored by the ASIC (IC1).
152
KX-F900
6. EXPLANATION
OF ANALOG
SECTION
BLOCK
DIAGRAM
(1)Function
The analog section serves as interface with the telephone line. The digital board (ICt 1) for transmission reception of FAX
signals, and the speech network IC (ICl 09) are connected to the NCU section. Switching between the digital board (IC11) and
the other sections is executed by means of a multiplexer in the NCU section. The control signals to the individual analog sections
are output mainly from the ASIC ICl, and the status information for the various sections also is held in the ASIC ICl.
Simple explanations for the various sections are given below.
2) Circuit Operation
[NCU Section]
Interfacewith the telephone line and external telephone.This is composed of bell detection circuit,pulse dial generation circuit, EXT.TAMOFF-HOOK detect circuit,voxcircuit,amplifiercircuitfor linetransmissionand reception,sidetonecircuitmultiplexercircuit,etc. See belowfor details.
[Modem (ICll)]
Thisis used for FAX signaltone modulation, DTMF signaltransmission,ring tone generation, and line transmission beep
generation.The DTMF signaland Beep are placedontothe TX system.The ringtone passesthroughthe analog switch.
Outputtothe speaker via the poweramplifier(IC241).
[Speech Network IC (IC109)]
Thisis special IC combiningthe hands-free and handsetcircuits in 1 chip. The handset and microphoneare connected to
this circuit.At the timeof hands-freeoperation,the SP outputisoutputtedafter passage throughthe poweramplifier(IC241)
and the DTMF monitortone and the pulsedial monitortone outputfrom IC11 (DigitalBoard)and IC151 (AnalogBoard)are
givenas inputto this IC and becomethe monitortone at the time of handsetdialing.
o_
_0
cm
,--!
O
"_1
m
33
3:,
--I
0
z
-153-
Analog Unit Block Diagram
Rx 0
TX
"
0
÷
CN152
_
MIC__
I--_
30
IC109
SP-Phone
IC
11
t
I
I
59
67
O
L
1
O
L
2
O
L
3
O
L
4
IC151
73
SPEAKER AMP
CN241
G/A
75
CROSS
POINT
T1
4O
SP MUTE
IC241
CN251
7
I
+5VA
"_
+5VD
'_
+24V
-"
THPON
--
22
+5VD
+24V
3
AG
DG
--
l
4
!
24-DOW
(PG)
from P,S.U
CTL
TONE1
TONE2
DATA
ADDRESS
SPEAKEo_R
I
KX-F900
7 NCU Section
7-1. GENERAL
This section is the interface with the telephone line and external telephone. It is composed of EXT. TEL Line relay
(RL101), bell detection circuit, pulse dial circuit, Auto Disconnect circuit, TAM Interface circuit, line amplifier and
sidetone circuits and multiplexer.
7-2. EXT. TEL. line relay (RL101)
(1) Circuit Operation
Normally this relay switches to the external telephone side (break) and it switches to the open side (make) when the set
starts facsimile communication.
IC151 (32) High Level --* Q271 ON --* RL101 (make)
7-3. BELL DETECTION CIRCUIT
(1) Circuit Operation
Signal waveform of each section are indicated below. Signal (low level section) input to pin 4 of gate array IC151 are
read out at CPU and judged as bell.
Between Tip and Ring
.t48 V f__--_about
150V
Between PC101 (1) and (2)
PC101 (4)/Gate Array IO151 (4)
TEL LINE --, PC101 (1,2-4) -* IC151 (4)
7-4. PULSE DIAL CIRCUIT
(1) Circuit Operation
In OFF-HOOK Condition, the photocoupler PC102 pin (2) is low level by IC151 pin (3) and PC102 pin (4) is low level so
Q101 is ON. At the time of pulse dial operation, PC102 pin (2) becomes high level by IC151 pin (3), so that PC4 pin (4)
becomes high level, and Q101 becomes OFF line ON/OFF by high/low control for IC151 pin (3) makes pulse dial operation possible.
IC151 (3) High Level --, PC102 (2) High level ---* PC102 (4) High Level --, Q101 OFF --, Telephone Line
O
O
-I
O
"13
Ill
7>
--I
O
Z
155-
7-5. AUTO DISCONNECT CIRCUIT
(1)Function:
This circuit is used to detect the fact that another telephone connected to the same line is OFF-Hook while the unit is in the
time of TEL/FAX's arrival bell ringing operation.
(2)Circuit Operation:
Tip (Ring)---*D101 ---,Q101 -* C107 -* D102 -* Rl14 -* Q102 --* PC103.
Duringthisinterval C107 chargesand the base of Q102 becomeshigh,and PC103 pin(2)becomeslow,causingPC103 to
go ON. If a parallel-connected
telephoneor externaltelephoneis put intoan OFF-HOOK status,,chargeceases to flow
Cl 07 and the base ofQ102 becomeslow,causingPC103 to go OFF.
When a line isconnected,Q102 and PC103 go ON, causingpin5 of IC151 to go low.When the line isdisconnected,Q102
and PC103 go off,causingpin 5 of IC151 to go high.
7-6. TAM INTERFACE CIRCUIT
This circuit is for to switch between FAX receiving and external TAM's message recording automatically.
This circuit consists of EXT. TAM OFF-HOOK detect circuit, Monitor Transformer, Multiplexer, Amplifier, VOX detect circuit.
In details please refer to page 142. TAM INTERFACE SECTION.
7-7. LINE AMPLIFIER AND SIDE TONE CIRCUITS
(1)Circuit Operation
The reception signal received as outputfrom the line transformerT101 is given as inputto R202, C205 to IC201 pin (6), ant
it is inputtedtothe receptionsystemat an amplifiergain10.1 dB from pin7.
The transmissionsignalgivenas input to IC201 pin (2) via R210, C203 is amplifiedto about15 dB, It is outputtedform pin 1
of IC201 and itistransmitttedto T101 via R201, C202,T101.Withoutside tonecircuit,thetransmissionsignalhere wouldreturr
completelyto thereceptionamplifiervia R201, C202. Here,the signaloutputfrom IC201 pin (1) passesthroughC218, R203
R204, C207 and entersthe amplifierIC201 pin (5), and thisis usedto cancelthe returnpart of the transmissionsignal.
This is the side tonecircuit.
Transmission Signal: C203 --* R210 --* IC201 (2-1) _
C202 --, R201 .L, T101 ---*TEL LINE
C218
(Side Tone)
R203
R204
C207
Reception Signal: TEL LINE--, T101 _ R202---, IC201(5,6-7) _ C210
156-
I
8. ITS (Integrated
telephone
System)
and MONITOR
KX-F900
SECTION
8-1. GENERAL
The general ITS operation is executed by the special iC109. This IC has a speakerphone circuit and a handset circuit in 1
chip, and control to each mode is executed from the outside (IC151). At the time of speakerphone operation the speaker output
passes through the power amplifier (IC241). The DTMF signal and the bell tone are output from the modem (IC11 : digital
board). The alarm tone, the key tone, and the beep are outputted from the gate array IC151 (digital board). At the time of pulse
dial operation, the monitor tone is outputted from the gate array IC151.
8-2. SPEAKER PHONE CIRCUIT
(1)Function
This circuit controls the automatic switching of the transmitted and received signals, to and from the telephone line,
when the unit is used in the hands-free mode.
(2)Circuit Operation
The speakerphone can only provide a one-way communication path.
In other words, it can either transmit an outgoing signal or receive an incoming signal at a given time, but cannot do both
simultaneously. Therefore, a switching circuit is necessary to control the flow of the outgoing and incoming signals.
This switching circuit is contained in IC109 and consists of voice detector, TX attenuator, RX attenuator, compara tor and
attenuator control. The circuit analyzes whether the TX (transmit) or the RX (receiver) signal is louder, and then it
processes the signals such that the louder signal is given precedence. The voice detector provides a DC input to the
attenuator control corresponding to the TX signal. The comparator receives a TX and RX signals and supplies a DC input
to the attenuator control corresponding to the RX signal. The attenuator control provides a control signal to the TX and
the RX attenuator to switch the appropriate signals ON and OFF. The attenuator control also detects the level of the
volume control to automatically adjust for changing ambient conditions.
(Transmission Signal Path)
The input signal from the microphone is sent through the circuit via the following path:
MIC --* J270 --* C138 --* IC109 (13-27) --, R145 ---*IC151 (75-63) _ C203 _ R210 ---* IC201 (2-1) --, C202 -* R201 --*
T101 --* TEL LINE
(Reception Signal Path)
Signals received from the telephone line are outputted at the speaker via the following path.
TEL LINE --, T101 --* R202 --, C205 ---*IC201(6-7) --, C210 --* C173 --, R172 --, R173 --* C174 --, IC151(59-71) --* C142
-* R143 _ IC109 (22-30) --* C145 --, IC109 (4-7) --* R146 ---*C146 -,. IC151 (40-38) ---,R245 ---* C245 _ IC241 (4-5,8)
--* SPEAKER
(Control Signal Path)
Control signals for transmission and reception are inputted to IC109 via following path.
(Transmission Control Signal Path)
MIC --* J270 --, C138 _ IC109 [(13) --* MC AMP --* SW4 --* (31)] --* C130 --* R130 --* IC109 [(1) _ AMP --, Comparator]
(Reception Control Signal Path)
TEL LINE --* NCU Section [IC201(6-7)] -* C173 --* R172 --, R173 ---* C174 --* IC151(59-71) --* C142 -* R143
IC109[(22) -," SW3 ---, RX ATT -* (30)] --* C145 --* IC109 [(4) -* SW5 -_ SP AMP -," (7)] -.. C132 --* R131 ---* IC109 [(3)
--* AMP --* Comparator]
(Voice Detector)
The transmission signal given as input from the microphone to IC109 pin (1) passes through the built-in amplifier and enters the voice detection circuit for judgment of voice noise. In case of noise, the TX attenuator is made effective via the attenuator control.
(Attenuator Control)
The attenuator control detects the setting of the volume control through pin 11 of IC109 to automatically
ambient conditions.
- 157-
adjust for changing
O
m
30
O
C:
B
-I
O
i'll
_0
.-.I
O
z
KX-F900
1
8-3. MONITOR CIRCUIT
(1)
DTMF Monitor
(Speaker Operation)
ICll
(44)--_
C73-_ R90 -* IC10(6-7) --, CNI(IO) --* CN271(10) -* C184 --, R184 -* IC151(76-41)
C74 J.
-* IC151 (40-38) --* R245 -* C245 --* IC241 (4-5,8) -* Speaker
-_ C158 --, R161
(Handset Operation)
IC1 1
(44).,--_ c74C73
._ R90 --* IC10(6-7) --, CN1 (10) --* CN271 (10) ---*C184 --* R184 --, ICl 51 (76-41) -__
L1L153j54
-[*
--, Speaker
(2) AlarmlBeep/Key tone
IC1 (86) -* CN1 (11 ) --, CN271 (11 ) --, R185 --, O186 ---, IC151 (77-41) --* O158 _ R161 --* IC151 (40-38) --* R245 --* C245
IC241 (4-5,8) --* Speaker
(3) Bell Signal
IC1(85,87)-_
R59
R60 --*
-* C56-_
C57 -u CN2(1) --* CN272(1) --_ R186 --* C187 --, IC151(78-41)
IC151 (40-38) --* R245 --* C245 -4 IC241 (4-5,8) --* Speaker
158-
--, C158 -* R161 --*
1
9. TAM INTERFACE
9-1.
KX-F900
SECTION
FUNCTION
In case that EXT. TAM position is selected in Receive nlude, th_ ul _itreu_iv_
records a voice message automatically.
documents loJ kAX call or the external TAM
To switch between answering machine and facsimile in EXT. TAM Mode.
OPERATION
EXPLANATION
When bell signal rings as many as the numbers
The length of response messages
which installed in the connected answering machine,
should be 8-16 seconds.
the answering machine seizes the line,
While response massage is being played,
then answering massage is out to the line.
the unit starts to detect CNG signal.
When CNG signal is received,
the unit switches to FAX receiving.
10 seconds after the answering machine gets
When there is approximately
the telephone call, no-sound detection begins.
situation for 20 seconds after being passed
5 seconds' no sound
10 seconds, the unit switches to FAX receiving.
During this period it detects CNG signal also.
When it cannot detect no-sound nor CNG,
it doesn't switch to FAX receiving,
the unit doesn't catch the line.
(The answering system hangs up the line.)
Bell Signals
,,
I
, CNG Detect Section
} .....
! 0.seconds
, ,i
/'No sound_detection
/(_:(uu m me service moae)
._ Ant
]
No souna
aboutl2 sec.
J
\ ........
Answering
Machine
(8-16 seconds:
OGMresponds
out)
.
(Max. 20 seconds)
f l
/
Arrival
TAM is
ITAM holds the line
I
t
IDetect CNG on 5 sec silent I
f
ISwitch to FAX mode
1
Off-Hook
(disconnect TAM)
Attention 1: No sound detection lasts 20 seconds after the telephone call comming in to the answering machine. If there
is no sound situation for more than 5 seconds (#701 in the service mode) it is switched to the facsimile.
Attention 2: When answering machine can't catch the telephone call because of the disconnection or no capacity in the
tape, the unit catches the call after 5 times' bell ring (#702 in the service mode), then switches to facsimile.
When you install in Service, it is possible for the unit not to catch phone calls.
O
O
.-I
O
"1o
rrl
_o
_>
.-I
O
z
-159-
9-2, CIRCUIT OPERATION
TAM INTERFACE circuit consists of EXT. [AM HOOK detection circuit, CNG signal from the party's detection circuit, VOX
detection circuit (to judge sound/no-sound) and RL101 (to separate EXT. TAM).
(1) EXT. TAM HOOK detection circuit
The bell comes to EXT. TAM and EXT. TAM seizes the line, causing to make DC LOOP. PC105 detects this voltage. During
detection PC105 (4) becomes low.
(DC LOOP)
Tip ---* POS101 --* L105 --* RL101 (7 -_ 6)3_---*
VAR1------]--*
L-, R192 -* PC105 J
L105 -*Ring
L104 --* Tip1 --, (EXT.TAM) _ Ring 1 --* L103 -* R103 --*
(2) CNG signal detection circuit
CNG signal from the party's FAX is detected in MODEM IC11 (digital board).
(Signal path)
TEL LINE -* O104 --* T102 --* O176 --* R176 -* IC151 (61)(67) --, R217 --* C214 -* IC202 (10)(11) --, C217 ---* CN271 (9) -*
CN1 (9) --, R97 --, IC10 (2) (1) --* C82 --* R95 --* ICll (45)
(3) VOX
VOX circuit detects if there is a signal or voice in the line. That's why VOX circuit reacts to OGM of EXT.TAM and ICM from
the party.
(Signal path)
TEL LINE -* C104 _ T102 _ C176 --, R176 -* IC151 (61-70) -* C291 ---,D290 --, R296 --* IC101 (6)(7) --, R290
/
--* IC151 (30)
EXT.TEL Line --* VAR1
(4) RL101
Normally this relay switches to the external telephone side (break) and it switches to the open side (make) when the set
changes to facsimile communication from EXT.TAM operation.
IC151 (32) High Level --* Q271 --* ON ---, RL101 (make)
IC151 (32) Low Level --* Q271 --* OFF --, RL101 (break)
(5) Remote receiving
This is the DTMF signal of parallel connection TEL or EXT.TEL between T and R. When the party is FAX, this turns unit to
FAX receiving.
(Signal Path)
To defect DTMF signal in MODEM.
- 160-
Circuit Diagram
R102
,,,,,,
IC202
To
RX
_ 2
1
RL10_7
From line
MODEM
0C11)
J_._
TO TEL LINE
POS101
DC
LOOP
"_-
~
_,_--I II
010'
MODRX
To line
JJ1
)SA 102
,_1-.
L106
C102
+5V
•=From
MODEM
I
C184 R182
I I-----'_-,
"f'X
R120
R104
_PC1011"_
:
o_
I
+5V
L103 _r_2
"1
(IC11)
I
TO EXT TEL
R103
"
_
J_
_VAHR1 LI041_
[
/ a:_'__L
+5V
_R294
R291
0104::.106{_#_f
R296 D290
R221 _4
5
, o_._
_ R295
C291
I
..J__..r--'m
(0_)
I
;_.O.JT1
+5v
It
7n
_D291
10151
G/A
R290
Pl
_T-MONIT
•
.
. 3_]5
T102
o,,,_,4=1=._
I
o 5 _
jjTTI
_
o
o
30
A,J
''V
VOX
,xr
"1"11
r
=ldO .I.II101:110
-
KX-F900
10. OPERATION
PANEL
The unit consists of LCD (Liquid crystal display), KEYs and LEDs (light-emitting diode). They are controlled by the Gate Array (IC301) and AS IC (IC1 : On the DIGITAL BOARD). (Fig.-a)
(COG TYPE)
I
I
I
I
ASIC
CN51
ICl
t
KEYS
MATRIX
2X2
t
KEYS
MATRIX
8X4
CN301
GATE ARRAY
IC301
I'
LED
DOCUMENT SENSOR
READ POS T ON SENSOR
OPERATION BOARD
DIGITAL BOARD
Fig-a DIAGRAM
Key Matrix
o"-.<
KIN 0
KIN 1
VOLUME
STOP
(S301)
(S305)
KS L0
KSL1
KIN 2
START
/COPY/SET
($309)
J
KIN 6
KIN 7
KIN 3
KIN 4
KIN 5
VOLUME
SP-PHONE
HELP
($313)
3
(S317)
MUTE
($321)
6
($325)
9
($329)
#
($314)
2
($318)
REDIAL/
PAUSE
($322)
5
($326)
8
($330)
0
DI RECTORY AUTO
RECEIVE
KSL2
ONE-TOUCH
4
ONE-TOUCH
5
LOWER
($307)
ONE-TOUCH
2
($311 )
ONE-TOUCH
3
(S315)
1
(S319)
FLASH
($323)
4
($327)
7
($331)
KSL3
($303)
ONE-TOUCH
1
($304)
(S308)
(S312)
(S316)
(S320)
($324)
($328)
($332)
LED11
LED8
LOCATOR
INTERCOM
($335)
MEMU
($333)
RESOLUTION
XLD 14
($334)
- 162-
-X--
KX-F900
I
11. LCD COG TYPE
The Gate Array (IC301) needs only write ASCii code from the data bus (D4~D7). V0 is power supplies for crystal drive.
R320, R322 are density control resistors.
Consequently, in this set the timing (mainly positive clock) is generated by the LCD interface circuitry of the gate array
(I0301).
Circuit Diagram
LCD UNIT
ENABLE
IC301
RESET
(COG TYPE)
R322
Vo
4 LED7
C316
Timing Chart
R/W
/
\
/
E
DB4NDB7
/
/-X
DATA
Density
Normal
Dark
H
L
LED 7
(IC301-4 pin)
m
_0
t,-I
O
"I0
m
=4
0
z
163
KX-F900
12. SWITCHING
POWER
SUPPLY SECTION
Block Diagram
AC Input _
0--_
Input
A
HRectifier--l";-,
Converter
_o 24V Output
1
utput Circuit
OGND
D
A-B Voltage Wave Form
Control
Circuit
(MC101)
ol
C-D Voltage Wave Form
Over
__
SUB Printed Current
Circuit Board Circuit
IC101
E
DC-DC
Converter
Circuit
+5V Output
F
0
E-F,
G_HVOrtage Wave Form
I Error
Circuit Detecting I-/
VV
01-3F-3
r--
[Input Circuit]
Input current goes into input rectifier circuit through filter circuit. Fitter circuit decreases noise terminal voltage and
noise electric field strength.
[Rectifier Circuit]
Input current is rectified by D101 and charge C106 to make DC voltage, then supply power to converter
circuit. Voltage is supplied to control IC's kick-on voltage through R102 and R103. Inrush current is limited by
thermistor TH 101.
[Converter circuit]
The converter circuit of this power supply circuit is called fly back converter.
We explain the operation of this circuit with the simple circuit.
T101
O
Ei
.<
D201
.<
p-<
.<
O
Eo
S...SECONDARY
WINDING
+
B...CONTROL WINDING
.<
.<
J
O
O
_CONTROL
P...PRIMARY WINDING
CIRCUIT
- 164-
I
KX-F900
The circuit in the previous page, when the transistor Q101 is ON, secondary rectifier diode D201 is OFF and the energy is
charged in the transformer T101. Q101 continues being ON while the voltage is generated by control winding (B). Q101 is
tuned OFF by control circuit, then each windings of T101 changes the polarity and rectifier diode D201 truns ON.
The charged energy of T101 supplies power through D201 to output load. And the voltage of control winding is decreased
and QlOlcontines being OFF state. When all energy is discharged through D201, Q101 is turned ON again and it makes the
polarity of each windings of T101 in reverse and goes to self oscillation. When input voltage Ei is high, the ON period of Q101
becomes shorter, and when load current is high, the ON period of Q101 becomes longer.
The value of output voltage is
Eo = d/(1-d)*Ei
To,: ON TIME OF Q101
d = Ton/Ts
T, : PERIOD OF OSCILLATION
SW
D
_o
Ei
'
(D201)
Eo
1_
on
In the equivalent circuit:
(Q101)
When SW is ON, current flows
t
c
ME
I
SW --* L
When SW is OFF, Current flows
L-* D--" RL
The value of inductance rectifiers increasing
o-
T101
current during ON period.
IL = Ei/L*d*Ts
The value of inductance rectifiers decreasing
T
I VL
(1)
current during OFF period.
,=
J
i
',
i
T
= =
IL = Eo/L(1-d) * Ts
(2)
=
i
t
,i
From equations (1) and (2),
Eo = d/(I-d) * Ei
i All
In the actual circuit, the fixed output voltage can be obtained by changing the winding ration of transformer T101. In this
converter circuit, the duty ratio of ON period and OFF period of the transistor produces output. In this power supply, the bias
winding is also built-in in the transformer and the output value is one. 24V output voltage is stabilized and changes the duty
ratio.
[Control Circuit And Error Detecting Circuit]
The control circuit amplifies the output with increasedvoltage detected in the error detecting circuit, then drives the main
transistor.In this powersupply the duty ratiois definedby changingthe ON periodof main transistor.
This isshownas follows.
When the outputvoltageof24V circuitbecomes higher, the currentof photocouplerPC101 increases,the pulse widthof
outputcontrolIC becomesnarrowand the ON period ofQ101 becomesshorter.
o_
;o
u
-I
O
"o
m
_a
[Over Current Limiter (O.C.L.)]
IC101 rectifiers the highest voltage with resistors R105 and R106 detecting the current in the primary side. When the current
is supplied higher than the highest voltage, it switches to ratch mode which stops oscillating.
[DC-DC converter]
Output 5V, is made by DC-DC Converter. 5V output is rectified by IC202, Q201, 1_201,D203.
-165-
-i
0
z
KX-F900
I
Dummy load method (for the quick check of power supply output)
Power Supply Board
(_)
CN301
5V
Output range
o
)
GND
®
®
®
@
®
:Vollage Meter
5V (5.IV:L5%)
O
24V (24.5V+4%)
24V
o
CN302
J
(_
24V (24.5V+4%)
(4.7K_ 1/2W)
166
KX-F900
13. CORDLESS
J
SECTION
13-1. EXPLANATION
OF CPU DATA COMMUNICATION
(1) Calling
Portable
Handset
Base
Unit
(STANDBY MOD E)
When calling, a communication
request DATA (ACK-T) is
transmitted from the Portable
Handset first, and a permitting
data (ACK-OK) is returned from
[TALK]
the Base Unit to it, then a
ACK-T
ACK-OK
(Empty Channel Information)
communication data (TALK) is
transmitted from the Portable
Handset.
TALK LED ON
TALK
OFF HOOK
IN USE LED ON
The permitting DATA (ACK-OK)
from Base Unit to Portable
Handset includes the empty
channel information stored in
Base Unit. After transmitting the
communication DATA (TALK)
from Portable Handset to Base
Unit, the channel is used.
(2) To terminate
Communication
When the TALK button on
Portable Handset is pressed
during communication,
a LINK
terminating DATA (STANDBY) is
sent to terminate communication.
[TALK]
TALK LED OFF
STANDBY
O
OFF HOOK
IN USE LED OFF
O
C
--I
O
'1:1
m
_o
-4
0
z
-167-
(3) Ringing
Portable
Handset
Base
Unit
(STANDBY MODE)
Ring signal
lJ
TALK LED
Ringing
Flashing
IN USE LED Flashing
Ring
Ring
J
Ring
After detecting the Ring signal from circuit, Base Unit sends a ring signal DATA (Ring), then the Portable
Handset starts ringing.
(4) Ports for transmitting and receiving of data
Portable Handset :
transmitting ... 54 Pin
receiving ... 50 Pin
Base Unit'
transmitting ... 48 Pin
receiving ... 58 Pin
(5) Waveform of DATA used for cordless transmission and reception
The DATA which is transmitted from the Portable Handset to the Base Unit is combination of DATA 0, DATA 1,
DATA Delimt, Pre data and End data.
The DATA which is transmitted from the Base Unit to the Portable Handset is combination of DATA 0, DATA 1,
DATA Delimt, Pre data and End data.
-168-
KX-F900
PORTABLE
HANDSET
I
Transmitting DATA Format
Pre data
--q_I-L_J-qJ-U
DATA 0
<
><
10.08 ms
X2
FU
DATAI
>
4.704 ms
X2
29.568 ms
3.696 ms
END data
FU
DATA Delimt
4.704 ms
<
> 8.4 ms
IBASEUNITI
Transmitting
DATA Format
Pre data
DATA 0
/qJqJqJ-LRJ
1.344 ms
/
FU
DATA1
v
v
3.36
ms
f_
5.040 ms
v _*,
_
/
3.36
ms
v
/_
3.36
ms
3.36
ms
18.48 ms
2.352 ms
END data
FU
DATA Delimt
3.360 ms
J
v
_
3.36 ms
2.352 ms
5.712 ms
(6) When linking
O
I(---
J
Predata
1 Frame
I DATA0orDATA11
35 bit or 31 bit
D I DATA0orDATAll
D
I
DATA 0 or DATA I .........
/
DATA Delimt
When LINKing from the Portable Handset (when becoming STBY to TALK), DATA is transmitted in above format. The
combined portion of DATA 0 and DATA 1 is transmitted in LINK requesting DATA (35bit) format first. Then, when LINK
OK (ACK-OK) DATA (19bit) is returned from the Base Unit, it is sent as LINK from DATA after changing the combination
of DATA 0 and DATA 1. And the DATA Delimt is between each Frame as a stop.
The contents of LINK requesting DATA and LINK form DATA are different depending on each operation.
-169-
O
C
m
-I
O
"Io
m
---I
0
z
KX-F900
(7) Pulse
Dial
_--
Predata
Pulse DATA
I DATA0orDATA1
j
13 bit
D I DATA0orDATA1
END data 1
/
t_____> DATA
Delimt
When executing Pulse Dial,the Pulse Dial DATA is transmitted from the Portable Handset to the Base Unit in above format.
The combination of DATA 0 and DATA 1 are changed by each Dial No. And the DATA Delimt is between each Frame as
a stop. The number of Frame is 2.
(8) Tone Dial
Tone DATA
Pre data
--_
lO T OorOAt
0IO TA0orO
lJ
Tl
I
Continue
13 bit
D I .........
/
DATA Delimt
.........
I Toneend
I
_---_-->
D I Toneend
I
END data
I
7bit DATA
When executing Tone Dial, Tone Dial DATA is transmitted from the Portable Handset to the Base Unit in above format.
The DATA is changed by Dial No. as same as Pulse Dial. When Tone Dialing, DATA (Continue DATA) that the key is pressed
continuously
is sent to the Base Unit during the key is pressed. When depressing the key, the TONE Dial exterminating
DATA (Tone end DATA) is send, and the END data is sent finally.
NOTE
1,000,000 kinds of the security code are available for the
model KX-F900. Each time the portable handset is set on
the cradle of the base unit (for charging), the CPU
automatically change the security code.
13-2. FREQUENCY TABLE (MHz)
CH
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Base Unit TX
Portable Handset RX
902.100 MHz
902.150 MHz
902.200 MHz
902.250 MHz
902.300 MHz
902.350 MHz
902.400 MHz
902.450 MHz
902.500 MHz
902.550 MHz
902.600 MHz
902.650 MHz
902.700 MHz
902.750 MHz
902.800 MHz
Base Unit RX
Portable Handset TX
926.100 MHz
926.150 MHz
926.200 MHz
926.250 MHz
926.300 MHz
926.350 MHz
926.400 MHz
926.450 MHz
926.500 MHz
926.550
926.600
926.650
926.700
926.750
926.800
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
- 170-
CH
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Base Unit TX
Portable Handset RX
902.850 MHz
902.900 MHz
902.950 MHz
903.000 MHz
903.050 MHz
903.100 MHz
903.150 MHz
903.200 MHz
903.250
903.300
903.350
903.400
903.450
903.500
903.550
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
Base Unit RX
Portable Handset TX
926.850 MHz
926.900 MHz
926.950 MHz
927.000 MHz
927.050 MHz
927.100 MHz
927.150 MHz
927.200 MHz
927.250
927.300
927.350
927.400
927.450
927.500
927.550
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
;CIRCUIT
OPERATION
0
0
j
U.
i
X
I
39_VHO
8nS
Z)O
(IINA
39_VHO
4U)
NIV_
i
!
I.-
F-I
1.1.1
00
_°_ (°_H
cO
_°_N_
®H _
o0
u)
UJ
-.I
r.,
nO
o
o,_n_
_ ,r'l
II
'_-7
II
I
I./.
0
,,:(
CE
E3
r_
r7
cc
o
o
cO
n
0
-
m
o.
._c
LO_IA
........
_OSNO
_
v
TX FREQ 902.100 ~ 903.550MHz
_7
RX FREQ 926.100
2ND IF FREQ 450KHz
1ST IF FREQ 10.7MHz
- 927.550MHz
IC301
LPF
BPF
F302
Q304,303
I
I
I
I
l
BPF
F303
10.7MHz
I
I
I
I
I
Q305
+ TMXE
AMP
I
r
l
L
IlVlULTIPRIEFL.
1_ x2
-
I
q
J'l!
450KHz
t
__
..................
PLL
L- I
L
I"
IIREFERENCEI_J
OSC
I
_
I_
BUFFER
AMP
2NDIF
h
I DISCRIMI
AMP
_
NATER
I
_0
I Ai OUT
I
I
I
q/
NOISE
AMP
!_
i
D301,302
L-'IDETECTOR
I
I
I I
_
I
I
-- _._--
GND
,
I
I,..
RX VCO FREQ = 1ST LOCAL FREQ
936.800 - 938.250MHz
', /
IC302
BPF
r
F304
I
I
,
AGC
O
FLS
-o
Pc
I
FREQ
902.100
Q301
N 903.550MHz
.......
[--
:_ T
Q302
I_
AMP
T '\-r-.
I ....
L
I"_ ]
I
_" Ti-
1
_
X3.0_5:M :Z
'
LOOP
F LTER
10302
°3,01
_×v0o,o_o5'0_2'°3°',°_3
_
.xB_w
_-]
TX VCO FREQ
451.050
_
l
UNLOCK
O
_ATA
CLOCK
0
O
RST
O
RXBSW
O
]
+B_.5v
O
TXB SW
O
MOD
O
- 451.775MHz
I
rxvco,c3o2,_o_
_
I
_
I
I
KX-F900
13-4. CIRCUIT OPERATION OF CORDLESS BASE UNIT
(1) Power Circuit
(charging circuit power supply)
Pins 1 and 8 are switcl4ed in the clock period which is determined by capacitor C559 connected to pin 3 of the
switching regulator IC (IC504). The switching output turns Q509 ON or OFF and reduces the 24V voltage to 12V.
Pin 5 of IC504 is the feedback input pin whose input signal is used to stabilize the output voltage.
Circuit Diagram
VT(12V)
+24v
_J502
CN501
0 ANALOG
(1,2)
Q509
L519
O
÷
co
Z
o
_8
I
I
-
IC504
O
nr"
(2) Charge Circuit
When the portable handset is places on the charging stand, Q505 is turned ON, and the charging information is
supplied to MPU pin 37 as a logical high signal. When the charging information is supplied to the MPU, the MPU
sends the ID signal from pin 44. This ID signal switches Q506, and it is supplied to the portable handset via the
charging pin of Q506. In the same way, when the spare battery is inserted into the charging stand, Q508, is
turned ON, and the charging information is supplied to MPU pin 36. When both the portable handset and spare
battery are to be charged, the MPU outputs a logical low signal from pin 27 which turns Q507 OFF and also turns
Q510 OFF, thereby limiting the charging current to the spare battery. When only the spare battery is to be
charged, the MPU outputs a logical high signal from pin 27 which turns Q507 and Q510 ON so that the charging
current is increased.
Circuit Diagram
'.fT
R535
R534
D503vt
I
R539
Q505
C511
D504
R540
R541
44
I
T
T
cs, l
C513
-
(
_-'_Q506
o
R542
7"
D505
,.,
@
l
_
o
'
CN503
_________4
w
C
37
I
R543
MPU
.,_R551
(IC501)
R546
At#
R545
'W_
-I
0
"O
m
27
1'
R599
R548
Q508
"-4
_07
O
Z
D506
"_R550
-173-
R549
I
.....KX-F900
(3) Line Receiving Signal
The signal supplied from the line is input from pin 6 of CN501 through the analog board, and ti is output from
pin 10 of the RF unit via IC502 pins 21,20, 19, 17, 16, 13, 11 and 10 in this order.
Circuit Diagram
MPU
TX MUTE
R553
L507
(6pin)
C571_'-_
6)
R622
C572
VR503
_'R554
_
0
To
C518
I
(4) RX Data Circuit/Hard
'
IC502
Compander
Mute Circuit
The AF signal output from the RF unit is filtered and amplified by a filter amplifier with a 500 Hz cutoff
connected to pins 1 through 4 of IC503. The resulting demodulated data waveform is then input to RX
DATA pin 6 of the MPU.
If there is data from the portable handset during talk operation, the portable handset data is as shown below
to prevent the data from leaking onto the line. Hardware muting is applied as the leading edge of the data
as soon as the data arrives. After this, muting is applied by the MPU.
Circuit
Timing Chart
C550
_J_Bed
--I
eiected at peak level
C5421
_R616
_
C552
i
C551_--_
--:'1
_
R618
I
MPU
_
CCN502(3pin,
i
R60_9 __
HARD MUTE__[
I
RX MUTE
R FAUpIT
Diagram
I
]
RXDATA
.61o
I
/
sc o3
o o31
C547
R608R611_'I_I'--lC574
C541
l-
R612
Q504
+('_'_
Ix,._ D507
t:1607
_
t_
+
_':
E
MPU
RX MUTE
D508
(5) ID Code Setting
When the portable handset is placed on the cordless base unit, the charge detector operates and ID data is
output from pin 44 of the MPU. After passing through data amplifier Q506 and the charge terminal, the data
is sent to the portable handset.
-174-
I
KX-F900
I
13-5. CIRCUIT OPERATION OF RF UNIT
(1) PLL Circuit
The PLL IC comprises two PLL blocks, one for transmission and one for reception, a transmission multiplier
circuit, and a reception first mixer circuit.
The 900 MHz band frequency from the RX VCO, the 450 MHz band frequency from the TX VCO, and the
10.25 MHz reference oscillator frequency are frequency divided by a frequency divider controlled by the CPU
to create the 12.5 kHz comparison frequency. The phase comparator determines the phase difference between the TX and RX frequencies and the reference frequency, and supplies a control voltage via pin 7 or pin
18 to the appropriate VCOs so that the desired TX and RX frequencies are maintained.
The output from the TX VCO is multiplied by 2 internally by the IC, resulting in a 900 MHz band signal that is
then output to pin 2. Also, the RX VCO signal is supplied to the first mixer built into the IC.
Circuit Diagram
i
I
Buffer
_k--'-<_2.
[_
Divider
1
._
I
Divider
Buffer
,_
Phase
Comparator
Phase
Comparator
,
StandardJ
_
RXVCO
T
Buffer
(_
T
.I T
o oi,,a,e
Divider
',
MIXER OUTPUT
M,XER,.PUT
Multiplier[
TXVCO_
,
'@
I
_<--- SI
from CPU
_)<---- RST }
_<---- CPS
Buffer
(2) TX VCO, RX VCO
TX VCO and RX VCO are module as shown below table.
TXVCO
RXVCO
MOD GND OUT
t__J ',....
,__.; ',....
E
Pin Layout
MOD GND OUT
', %_;
]
', ,__;
E
3
I
'---I ;.... : "H:I
CONTROL
GND BiAS
VOLTAGE
VOLTAGE
CONTROL
GND BIAS
VOLTAGE
VOLTAGE
Shield Case side View
Shield Case side View
l---i
_....
i
_---t
o
o
Oscillator
Frequency
Portable Handset
Base Unit
463.05~463.775MHZ
451.05~451.775MHZ
Portable Handset
Base Unit
891.4N892.85MHZ
936.8~938.25MHZ
C:
--I
0
"1o
m
_0
_>
.-I
Output
Level
-6dB +2dB
Control
Voltage
0.5-2.5V DC
- 175--
0
Z
I
KX-F900
(3) Receiver RF Circuit ( ): Portable Handset
The electric wave received from the antenna ia attenuated by the SAW filter F302 (F402) except the received frequency band Then it is amplifier Q304 (Q404) and Q303 (Q403), and supplied to the IC301 (IC401) pin 23
(MIXER input).
Circuit Diagram
R312
IC301
(_327
MIXER IN _
04
ANT
_
I
"
_
:
o
C390
Y
(4) MIXER IF Circuit ( ): Portable Handset
The reception frequency band signal supplied to the pin 23 MIXER input of IC301 (IC401) is converted into a 10.7
MHz first IF signal by the mixer circuit, using the reception local signal. The result is then output to pin 13 MIXO.
The resonator circuit consisting of L304, C336 (L404, C436) resonates at 10.7 MHz. The 10.7 MHz IF signal is filtered by ceramic filter F303 (F403) and then supplied to IF amplifier Q305 (Q405).
Circuit Diagram
IC301
__
C338
I Buffer_
ot
M,xE.%
.,x,.
RX Signal
4<.-.--
-41_
-
_
_
.
-I-
'_MIXEROUT
R320
-176-
1st IF
KX-F900
(5) TX Power Circuit
( ): Portable Handset
After being multiplied by 2 inside IC301 (IC401) to make it a 900 MHz band frequency, the transmission signal
is amplified by Q301 and Q302 (Q401 and Q402) and frequency elements outside of the transmission frequency are attenuated b_t dielectric filter F301 (F401). The signal then passes through a transmission-reception matching circuit and supplied to the antenna terminal.
Circuit Diagram
R302
cO
C303
CD
F301
C354
• ANT
o_E--
8:Z- /
R304[-_'
)Q302
IC301
IN
(6) Second Mixer, Detector, Carrier Sense Circuit ( ): Portable Handset
The 10.7 MHz IF signal from Q305 (Q405) passes through pin 16 of IC302 (IC402) and is input to the second
mixer built into the IC. The reference oscillator frequency from IC301 (IC401) is used as the second local signal. After being converted into a 450 kHz second IF by the second mixer, the signal is wave detected and output to pin 9 as a low-frequency signal. This signal is output as the AF output signal and, at the same time,
used for e(ectric field determination. The FM noise is filtered by a 10 kHz BPF comprising pins 10 and 11 and
then amplified. Then it is rectified by D301 (D401) and D302 (D402), and input to the switching block consisting of pins 12 through 14.
Circuit Diagram
i
SQL<
Carrier Sense
D302
R331
C340
14 Pin
AF<
,
Enable to Electric Field
"L"
Disable to Electric Field
"H"
1st IF
o
o
u
-I
O
"0
m
33
0
z
R337
-177-
0
0 AGC
Q208
I
LC_!
VR2
MAX IMUM DEVIATION ADJUST
VR
MIC SENEITIVlTY
_-0
MOD
_0
AF
_
II
ADJUSTJ-
Q21o,21, Q217
r--1-I--_
I
',
_
',
SPEAKER
VR202
SPK LEVEL ADJUST
j
IME
I
,
I
,
',
0
0
i
_
Q
L ........
F
m
I
MIC MUTE
33
_.
I
O_
.--L
Z
C3
RX V01
SPK MUTE
IC201
Q201
"4
03
l
m
.-4
UNLOCK
CLOCK
DATA
RST
FLS
I
]
TX DATA [
CPU
_
17 CHARGE
D201
CLOCK
DATA
UNLOCK
RST
FLS
5O
l-q,
-
_
_[_
IC204
IC206
16
8
BATrERYLOW
15
POWER down
RX DATA
_AT-_IQ215
Q214
:_
RESET
ALARM VOL
1
ALARM
Q205
4_
_
INTERCOM
Q210,Q211
_R
63
_D210
62
*t_'%D212
1
TX POWER
TALK
TXB
Q208 RF PANT
Q203
_
Q202
_
LIGHTED KEY
IC202,C203
%
_._ D209
÷_
RXB RF PANT
58
•
14
)
L IGHTED
RX POWER
IDIN
CLoGMAIN
K
SUB
CLOCK
3L-,n¢l
t r,J'
3.992MHz
X201
32.68KHz
X202
KEY
D207
+B
33
"-lq
C
TX FREQ
926.100 - 927.550MHz
RX FREQ
902.100
1ST IF FREQ
2ND IF FREQ 450KHz
IO.7MHz
- 903.550MHz
7
IC401
LPF
BPF
F402
Q404,403
AMP
IC402
I
1
I
I
BPF
F403
IO.TMHz
I
I-I 1ST MIXER _-_
04O5
1ST IF
_
2ND
_ULT'P",E__,
! PL
I
x2
J
_-_'
L
I
IJ
AMP
iI_
MIXER
t
--t-t-t-t- t-
I
FREQ
926.100 - 927.550MHz
Q401
AMP
Q402
_-_
AMP
I
k
463.050
I
450KHz
I
I
AMP
LOOP
FILTER
I
,
L
.....
osc I"1
I
BUFFER
AMP
'
J
I
I
I
[_
DISCRIMI
_
NATER
I
/
1
_ Io_.2_MHz
_REFERENCE[_J
F
r
GND
2-_
1=
891.400 ~ 892.850MHz
J
F404
2ND IF
RX VCO FREQ = 1ST LOCAL FREQ
RX VCO
I
BPF
I
I
I A F OUT_
I
I
I
l
©
I
NOISE
AMP
T
0,,01.402
_--IOETEC'O"
/
AGO
o
FL$
0
UNLOCK
0
DATA
CLOCK
0
0
RST
O
X401
10.250MHz
l
T,_
l
RXB
TX VCO FREQ
IC401,Q404,Q403
RXVCO,(_05
~ 463.775MHz
IC402
_VCO,C_02,(_O
o
1
3.9V
0
TXB
0
MOD
o
I NOIlVI:13dO llnOEIIO
Kx:F900
I
13-7. CIRCUIT OPERATION OF PORTABLE HANDSET
(1) Power Supply Ciurcuit
As indicated in Fig.40,
particular has a stable
supply. In the standby
tion signal. In the talk
voltage is supplied separately to each block. In order to ensure that the RF block in
fixed-voltage power supply, the RF block is equipped with a dedicated stabilized power
mode, pin 58 drops at set intervals from high to low level, resulting in an intermittent recepmode, pins 59 and 58are low level and power is supplied to all the circuitry.
Circuit Diagram
RX POWER
1
> RINGER(Q212,Q213)
I
• DATA AMP(Q215,Q214)
IF Part (RF BLOCK )
• CPU (IC201)
sw 1
• RF BLOCK
Q203
T
R_
PU RX POWER
• COMPANDER
TX POWER I
(IC202)
(IC203)
• RF BLOCK, MICAMP(Q208)
> SPK AMP(Q210,Q211)
205
SPK AMP SW
_ )_ CPU TX POWER
(2) Data Reception Circuit
The wave detection signal from the RF block has high frequency elements eliminated by a CR filter consisting of
R258 and C244. Then it is amplified by Q215 and, once again, high frequency elements are eliminated by R255
and C243. After this, the signal is amplified by Q214 and input to pin 50 of the CPU. (The cutoff frequency is 500
Hz.) The data output waveform is a block pulse. To inhibit block pulse noise, the gain of the amplifier is limited
and modulation is clipped at 3 kHz.
Circuit Diagram
1._
_
iQ215_
-
R_57
- 180-
from
RF BLOCK AF Output
KX-F900
(3) Ringer Circuit
If the ringer volume is set to low and the key is entered occurs, an alarm tone is output from pin 45 of the CPU
and input to Q212. This causes Q213 to turn off and results in a softer beep tone.
If the ringer volume is set to high, Q213 turns on and results in a louder beep tone.
Circuit Diagram
C
_CPU
ALARM
CPU ALARM
VOLUME
SPEAKER
(4) Reception Signal Circuit
The receiver circuit comprises expander IC202, side tone control IC IC208, and a speaker amplifier.
After being adjusted to the appropriate level by VR202, the signal passes through a 3 kHz LPF and an expander built into IC202. It is then input to side tone IC IC208. The side tone IC is connected to the microphone
amplifier. If a large input is input to the microphone, the gain control built into IC208 lowers the gain to reduce
the output of the speaker amplifier. If there is no large input being input to the microphone, the amplifier in
IC208 is set to standard gain. Consequently, the sound of the received audio signal becomes fainter when the
user is talking in a loud voice and the side tone level is lowered. When the user talks more softly, the received
audio signal is audible at the standard level.
Also, in addition to the input from the microphone, the ACG signal from the RF block is input to the side tone IC.
When the base unit and portable handset are separated from each other, causing the signal to become weaker,
the DC voltage rises and this voltage is input to pin 5 of IC208. When the DC voltage input to pin 5 rises, the
gain control built into IC208 lowers the gain. Consequently, the reception level is lowered when the reception
signal is weak and there is more noise. This prevents the noise from becoming too noticeable.
The reception signal passes through receiver volume selector switch Q217, and then drives the receiver
speaker.
RXVOL
H
L
:
:
LOW LEVEL
HIGH LEVEL
SPK MUTE
H
L
:
:
SPEAKER ON
SPEAKER OFF
om
_o
-I
O
"10
m
,-4
o
Z
-181--
KX-F900
Circuit Diagram
IC202 EXPANDER
[__
3KHz LPF
RF Part
AF __
I I I
IC208
_
I
Sidetone
-_
_
VR202
Receive level adjust
___JcontrollC
Gain control
I
:0_38
R
R265
SPEAKER
RX VOL
SPK MUTE (_)
SPK MUTE
(5) Sending Signal
The audio signal from the microphone is amplified by Q208 and then passes through a limiter, mute circuit,
compander, and 3 kHz LPF built into IC202. It is then mixed with the TX DATA signal from the CPU, the
maximum modulation is adjusted by VR201, and input to the modulator in the RF block.
Circuit Diagram
CPU
R250
TX DATA _
,_]_o
T
CPU MIC MUTE
VR201
..LR229
R217
LIMITER H_'ICOMPANDER_
_
:
i
=
i
=
IC202
i
i
.............................................................
-- 182-
RF Part
MOD
MAXIMUM
Deviation adjust
KX-F900
(6) ReseUPowe_ uow.luattery
LowilD
When the battery is installed in the portable hm}dset, the reset circuit consisting of R289, C255, and Q204
functions, inputting a reset signal to the CPU. This ensures that the unit will operate normally without the user's
needing to switch the power off and on. When the voltage from the batteries drops to 3.5 V, 3.5 V voltage
detector IC204 operates and inputs a battery low signal to the CPU. This causes the battery low LED to flash
on and off. If voltage continues to drop and reaches 3.2 V, 3.2 V voltage detector IC206 operates and outputs
a power down signal to the CPU. This causes power to be cut off automatically and prevents the battery from
over discharging. Q201 is a charge detector that informs the CPU whether or not the portable handset is
currently being charged. During charging, ID data is sent from the base unit. Q202 receives this ID data and
sends it to the CPU.
Circuit Diagram
R289 C255
D201
'W_,_
I
R286 IC206 _
I
I
r_204_:
"'
:_
RESET
Powerdown
Battery_e_e
[
I---
Q20_
[]
"L _ £
,
R208
@
@
R205
'_' R201 .1_
"_
_2_
R202
-£C204 D213
_>Q
R206
183
Bakery low
Charge
ID
KX-F900
•
FOR SCHEMATIC
DIAGRAM
DC voltage measurements are take,, wLth Ob_;lilo_bUp_:
or tester from ground.
2. The schematic diagram and circuit board may be
modified at any time with the development of new
technology.
1.
v=ca_. It
CathodelJ
General
Cathode/|
Jl
Zenef II
Cathode][
LED
j
IIPhotoDikode
Cathodel/AnOde
-184-
....
;
............
........
llLbpul
[ant
safety ................:
notiou
....
1
I
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (DIGITAL BOARD)
5
I
6
I
7
I
8
2
(Bottom View)
A
R55 R53 R5
C13
•
R56 R54 R52
•
@
C
_9
147
D
\
:
I
G
Note:
1. This circuit shown in L__] on the conductor indicates primea
circuit on the back side of the printed circuit board.
Note:
1.
This oircuit shown in--on
the conductor indicates
circuit on the front side of the printed circuit board.
m
-185-
printed
i........
KX'FO00
....1 1 KX'_,O0--]
PRINTED
i
I
2
I
3
I
I
5
CIRCUIT BOARD (DIGITAL. BOARD)
I
6
I
7
I
8
10
(Component View)
C
D
F
G
H
Note:
Note:
1. This circuit shown in _
on the conductor indicates printed
circuit on the back side of the printed circuit board.
1. This circuit shown in [___1 on the conductor indicates printed
circuit on the front side of the printed circuit boarcr.
-186-
I
11
12
SCHEMATIC
1
3
L
L
4
J_
I
_L_
DIAGRAM
8
I
(DIGITAL
9
CIRCUIT)
[
10
11
I
__
12
13
_
14
16
j
1/
Ib
1u
1
CNI
ivlL, l i LJi
DRIVE
.
+24V
MU
_
_"
_
TH-HEAD
"-4
IHEHMAL
HEAL.) iLMP
_I
\
03
+SV
+SV
-t
÷5v
m
CNB
CN9
R42
(3
Na _
/S_o
I
NA
B
v,
3
2
--
v_
I TX
lo I Do
tt lot
IO !
13
][3 I
!
-- IN2
121 s I
ir_
zt
12 IQ2
I 03
7
D4
I I
I I,I
_Z£1_m_
u u u u u
J
i J_
u
I
, I I
u
5V
MOTOR
s I
4
!.;
I
ic7
C
--
1I .DA+A
Lj
MIBODP
C39
MO. t
"_
I
I I_
It
_TI
_T
I T_
I
+_ B4_
5v
NA
D
A
_)rM(
3
2
!
Io10% iol 7
!_ 16i lil 6
13 16_ i§1 _
l
I
I
-
B_,
R_.,
Ru0.
RX
MOTOR
I
_
4
'
_--L_--4
=
05
R4B
56K
\TTTT
.....
i i
R_V_
0_!
RM0
RM1
RM2
RM3
RXE
NOTml
N/OFF
TP6
, .#
lISt,
ILl ........
<
II_FI_I_FI
/
-
_NC
I/
t2
11
DO
DVDI
+SV/
476
DVA _
DVA _
07
\ AO
*5VF
_DVSS
ADRIO
ADR9
AOR8
AOR7
AOR6
ADR5
ADR4
DVSS
ADR3
ADR2
ADRI
ADRO
DBO
DBt
DB2
OB3
DVSS
DVDD
DB4
DB5
DB6
OB7
IOPI2
IOP13
lOP!4
OVDD
XROMCS
XNOMCS
XANLGCS -XRESCS!
XRESCS2
XORO
JI5P
C43
JI5P
ASICl
ICI
24MHz
\
\
\
\
A4
A5
A6
A7
\ All
\ A12
\RBAO
\RBAt
\
RBA4
12 • AO
At
A2
• A3
B
A4
7
A5
6
A6
5
A7
A8
A9
AiO
25
Art
4
AI2
28
AI3
29
A14
30
It3
DO
DI
02
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
13
14
15
t7
18
19
20
21
O0 /
01 /
02 /
03 /
04 /
D5 /
06 /
[37 /
\
AO
I0
At
A2
21
9
\
\
A3
A4
8
7
\
\
A5
AB
6
26
\
A7
4
AS
A9
5
25
\
AID
23
\
All
24
+SV
PG'--M3t1..___
VPP _
iCE
A15
A16
\RBAO
3
\
\
2
1
RBA!
RBA2
. .
--
__
OE
B!
89
92
SRAM
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Ol
Ol
OI
Ol
01
OI
01
01
19
1B
17
16
15
13
12
11
[
C
[
C
C
C
I
i
i
i
i
i
I
I
*SV
7
RNU
GNn
IC-50CKET
60
59
58
57
56
AO
AI
A2
A3
A4
VCC ! 2B
5
_g _01,___.__
J
94
93
7
A
R35
GND
_
4.7K
64
*5v
"_
pVD2
82
BS,,
oP!!
GP13
GPD;
GP16
C74
,ooo
F1BK Tr71
NO.
_
-
C76
ZO 24 _
•
_
7
R
IC!0
08
IOK _
B .
_
T_"v
__
1oo
Tn"
_
o.,
I
[
T
T
_
7-_
'''
L
I
I I
2
r
OK
_vv',,
_
I
I
__
I
--
. 1oo
_- !°°u
I I !6VRs5
3.3K Ice_ No.1 I
_ _
_
i
,,
_ !lll,i__'-I_+! ....
_
i]m= vvv
41
..Z._. ,._I' _
_lll.
3
-TJ/-/
" b-
GPD!
GP2IGP20TXLDSS"
GPo:GPO'
_
._
TXD
DCLK
DCLKI
I
-
TP1
TP2
0
TP3
0
TP4
0
B6
90
85
O
83
+5V
0
TPD
5V
-_
2_
(]20
99
54
CO7
_
_
I
"_
....
4_
_'_ K330P
w,.=
T
C 11
L
IOu
_
C88
:ZI.D
7
_7
...
_XLDSS2
4O
BYPASS
R7
i
R92 £
_T-'----vvv--
FIg0
r----'-'_
GPD: 2
GP I9
RXD
Q:
52
55
53
_
÷
I
== t40,1
_
÷24V
"
7
"
l C 2
I+ C34
t -Lzo.
I _
22Du
4B
TXLDSSI
: ...........
L i
:1
LC2
/
RXI_ __
_7
L5
i
I
ANALOG-
WE _
14
DAT-B
I00
I
l
I
l C7t
-LZO.
TXDU
63
u
tB___
+5v
I
OYO2
\
\
\
\
\
+5VF
A
T
l
C73
OVO2
ROM
T
1
OVA
44
]c2
+v
--
-
:02
03
D4
ZO. t
AM0
I
I
LC'
0 !
66
i
I
T
I
5D
o, ov,
D5
D6
+5V
VIDEO
(:>
GNO3
TX
€
OVD,23
ApO-e
<
TP9
olsochange.
+,zo.,
!
OVO;I
75
J
G
GN02
5
,,. zo.,
--
RA1 IO0
15
14
TP14
CUT-POS
,
R63
22
......JuuLo
TP7
TP5
.... _._[- !_
___
__F-l__
_J---I__
J---L_
I
LEO-0N/OFF
.o
Ills waveform wili
_'_--_o-i
_l_l_li\-
E
15
TH
HEAD-BUS
[DP21
[DP22
[DP23
[DP24
[DP25
[0P26
[0P27
[OPiO
[OPt!
ALE
RMO
RM1
RM2
l-!
<
TONE!
/
÷=
I
. R\
<
C42
h ,,Jd teliilJui,Jlu
--
,.1
I
LED-ON/OFF
+I
C40
o
......
6
i
D
;IB2T
,<,vU-
124V
GNO!
,
TMU
NS _
z4F-- _
LEO
I
,
2
CNIO
_04
3ENSOR
I I I
I=r
L,
,LAT
+24V
_
IC37
03
I
.......
t'-LJ_,,t.i
R×E
o
}___
....
*5V
o_i_#i_i_i<,,i,,i
IOl/<,,,,
t
oo8 8 8 g o 8 <_
4 7u_
O!
•
+24V
1Uri..
[)RIVE
__
.
+24V
36
AG
+5V
R_
DADUT
B8
W-_
DAIF
ADOUI
ADIF
XCLk
YCLk
35
PORI
67
XTL(
XTL1
69
68
EYEX
EYEY
;YECLK
;CLKINI
_YECLKX
_YESYNC
3YNCINI
3YNCIN2
_CVD
_CVI
ISWGAIND
!SMGAINI
7"_
"
24Mitz
°°'
•Jiooo_
2_L
//
//
NC
NC
NC
L--
NC
ICS
NC
ENB5
NC
/Wt
/
C90
R37
150
J12P
32
c:3x3
t
CO6
41
42
51
L
R3B
J-
_w
0
C91
II
dlBP
J!OOOP
ICll
(ii)
I
_,o_
AQ:Q-_
CCO-ON/OFF
OA+-B
100
T_P_O
+5V
TPI
R29
i
1
R61
!OK
WATCH
_5V
R30
DOG ERROR
4.7K
ANALOG-2
(NORMAL)
__r-.V
_
C65
__
100
_td_
ON2
Do 9 E:rrcr 00;0r)
i
;R59
!OK
C56
NO. I
TONE2/BELL
TONE2
BELL
OP-B
IR60 IOK
+SVP
I
5
OnO0
i
I
06
CCO-ON/OFF
/
•
•
--I
IXSIg,,<.,
,oo ANALOG-3
\
c9
R67
CSI
CBUSY
:ESET
R70 tO0
R72
tO0
_24V
R71
iDO
R73
I_0
°
FII
F2 /
2
FTG /
• R65
D
l
°
CBUSY2
CSD
PI_XRST
o
.@D_0m _0
O0
R
_o
R75
O
C58
MD.I
t
R74
z
D
CCD
" BAT lO
OP-PANEL
M
187-
too
1oo
too
too
tOO
tO0
SOD
tO0
FAX RX Sig:_al
O7
fu
7
8
" g
N0. I
+5V
I-AX
I
0
C57
i
+SV
ARRAY
I
/CS
oo_i
x x .J (-;
+SV
LED
IRD
4
COL-B
CDL-B
66
3
) . Nut
Oboe:
CN3
1
2
3
4
5
CPC
CSI
CCLK
CBUSYI
CSO
CBUSY;
02
D3
04
AO
SCHEMATIC
1
l
2
__
3
__
4
1__
5 ....
j__
_6
_L_
7
_L
8
]
DIAGRAM
9
1
(ANALOG
10
CIRCUIT)
1
11
18
1
*5VD
4
A
POSI0J
Jj_
ILLJACK
JJ2
EXTEL
Olol
I
1
RII6
-_ ......_
-÷_,,
I--T_- .....T
5,6
o=
POt03
_
*5v0
"_
o
N
R28_
C102
I
L-,--
- 'V_-.
Ll05
1
_01
R_i
__
5Al01
__
SA102
N_!
i.SK
4
*5VO
L 106
NCw4
R223
_
_
I
_J_>[
_I
/I
sV
_-_
OV
1
-I
"
I
SELL
R_81
31K
I:1104
_
ll2
o
s_._o,,,_
0
Ll03
^€_¢N-----
4:K
,-,,,_,_,_v
Zl
0
; b_ °,
103 250V
L_04
0.22,
3
DIAL PULSE
+5vo
l102
2
"
EXHOOK2
(i
X
._
PC105
OIAL-P
8ELL
OIAL-p _
EXRO0_
_XHOOK
\
+24V
{
+2_4V
0271
0251
m
LISt
L_ )
LRL_
o
_
i--Iii
.......
CN_.t.
•.v, % II
Z
c
0169
T
+5VA
• _! .....
R252
I
_ ! ) ,_}
i.2RK
-I
Cl70
_
m
+5VA
o
.
I_
o
4,1V
2.2K
R159
CN152
m
8
SPWUTE
SPMUTE
+5VA
-_
÷l;/
w
C157
_
_c
64
L
--
--_
_
EXOUT
L_NE_T
V_EF2
Z z
=_=
69
70
71
72
30
RECPRIN
RECRROUT
LSRXOUT
PLYOUT
PLYIN
74
LST×0UT
76
77
70
TONEINI
TONEIN2
TONEIN3
79
TONEIN4
AOND
d
z
!!
_SPPRIN
SPP_OUT
SPOUT
SPTONE
!
)!
ALCIN
ALCOET
PROUT2
_:_
_"
38
37
K3300P
SP-SIG
CLTONE
_OUT
DVOD
........
P42
P4_
P40
P33
P32
]CtS_
I,_
P3i
FUll
II
_
27
VOL3
R245
ON HOOK:5V
12K
OFF
P23
P22
P2t
Lp20
DOND
/0Vor5V
/
_
_
_
10NE:OV
_ 0
PgRT
_
!5_273
_76
_j_
5V
0V
Portable Handset TX Signal
Portable
Handset
HOOK:0V
HO(
.
*5VD
--188
2.1V
RX
Signal
lO0
+5VD
SH274
27'
V
KX-F900
PRINTED
2
5
I
CIRCUIT
6
KX-F900
BOARD (ANALOG
I
7
I
BOARD)
8
I
j._
,1
(Component View)
B
1029Z
C
I
SAIOL
0
_102
L106
R103
R'N6
ztet
JlSO
EXT TEL
N
G
PCI05 PC101 PC102
H
189-
¢N151
[
IZ
./__
.....
KX_Fg00
1 I KX:FgO_
.....
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (ANALOG BOARD)
I
5
I
0
I
7
I
10
8
11
12
(Bottom View)
B
I
_i_,
....
D101
L103
G
A
_
190
KX-F900
PRINTED
I
..-L._
A
L_
_
__J
I
CIRCUIT
5
I
1
KX-F900
BOARD AND SCHEMATIC
6
I
7
DIAGRAM
I
8
(CCD)
I
10
9
CCD BOARD
11
I
12
CCD CIRCUIT
(Component View)
B
i %s[
__-L_.F-q_.F-L
_H.FL_FLJ3d3d3_
_G_IN
--I F
I........
t.:,_,,,_S___l
L
I
oV
9.216 ms
I
i
9.216 ms
_-SV
C
/
RB03
JO
e3
o
o
--
--
u
@
o
,q
_
1208
% 2
(Bottom View)
0
4
4
_S
5
6
2t
SH
;'
--
o
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
22
I--
o
NC
NC
RB02
2K
R801
G
2K
/
3.5V_
_[ 0.5_0.6V
b
9.216
191 -
ms
_
_BO
DOS
OS
3.5V
o
VDD
VSS
NC
__
E
[
o
COD
l
_
-t
o_
-
I KX-FgOO
11 KX-FO00
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY)
4
I
s
I
o
I
7
(Component View)
I
8
I
10
11
(Bottom View)
A
(_
mmmm
CN31
.....
C
DIOI
D
E
PC102
-.NV-
0102 .
......
PRIMARY
8
CN302
I
:
R202
...........
192-
....
j
12
I....Kx-F90oI
l---K-x-Fg00I
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY)
5
I
6
I
7
I
8
I
J
10
12
11
A
Rlll
Rl13
27K
B
THI01
50V
CN301
100k
H24V
C
D104
-I 0
ZNR102 ZNR103
,/_ C105
, II
5
H24V
4
GND
3
GND
2
GND
1
+5V
0.0047
Z_ C102
C103
4
CN302
C104
3
z_R101
8
P-ON
7
OUT
6
M24V
5
GND
4
GND
3
GND
2
+5V
1
+5V
IC101
0.001F_0.001
2
1a
Z_L101
• rrl_
----@_(N--ZNR101
R127
C124
2.2K
0.047
C101 /_
0.1
F101
G
GND
CN31
-193-
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (OPERATION PANEL BOARD)
i__
4
L
I
s
I
6
I
7
I
8
l1
lO
I
(Component View)
A
C
(Bottom View)
•
•
•
•
[]
o
[]
1,3,5,7,
8,10-14,
I|
1_9,2o,/J
bV
!! o ¸
0V
_t2
''_/
A
194
L
....
12
......
_.L
J
KX-F900
I-
Kx-Fg00
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (OPERATION PANEL CIRCUIT)
5
I
6
I
7
I
8
I
10
11
12
+SV
,by
_bV
+bV
A
o
J LJ LJ L_,v,
. z.
c3_ol
KSL_
KSL2
K5L2
KSLI
KS[
KSLO
$33!
AUTO
#
o
5332
5330
J
RECIVE
$329
R349
8
7
5327
5328
--_
5326
I
KSL0
I
KIN/
I
KIN_
I
KIN5
I
KIN4
I
K]N:_
I
KIN2
I
KIN1
I
KINO
•
XLDI4
OIRECIORY
9
|
I
_eo
LED8
IEOll
17
AO
LED
R$
234
33
32
31
34
35
R340
R348
I
J
05
06
07
4
5
HELP
6
al;l
6
TXO
SCLK
1307
4
180
9
*sv
,_sv LCD
+SV
CONTRAST
1
NO
+5V
27
28
29
+5V
LEO
41
LED|
LEO
LED
LED
38
37
GND
V'v%
R322
XLDI2
--XLD_5
VVV-
180
1309
LEDIO
C
190
1
XLD13
$325
vo0
vo0
:SET
"TXO
RXO
5CL
_TC
TART
_
--
8_
/OV
2 _
,ED 36
START
LED:ON
GND
150
$324
$323
5322
5321
5V
LED:Of:F
R339
R347
FLASH
REDIAL/PAUSE
MUTE
SP-PHONE
EN302
180
$320
5318
5319
_
$317
m
m
'
D
R338
R346
'kA/',,,_
2
V0LURE
3
--
i
v
i!l
180
5316
5315
5314
$3t3
R337
R345
ONE3
LONER
+SV
5TART/COPY/SET
R328
LE0306
IBO
5312
531t
S3tO
AUTO
S309
470
R336
'VV'v---
R344
ONE2
0NE5
R326
180
5308
$307
5306
R325
$305
-----_)
R394
ONE 1
0NE4
5302
OV
(,_
_7
_y'J
_
FOR
LED302
(,G',_
CHECKER
R350
R3gl
SP-PHONE
o
5301
R354
470
R334
R342
8_
LEO304
VOLUNE _
_80
5303
,2,_
LED301
R323
$304
_z
LED303
R335
'VVV
R343
_J)
(_,_)
STOP
m_
_ =
RECEIVE
LED305
f,G_
LEO307
470
R392
+5V
+SV
+5V
leo
+5V
+5V
m
_g
5380
+5V
oct_
R329
G
2_
LOCATORilNTERCOM
$33_
=I30_ 1
4_I30
0304
bl
RESOLUTION
MENU
L_
5333
_o
03o3
DI
PAPER
-195-
SET
PAPER
TOP
(
) : NOt
US,_G
4_
7
0
VOD
VO
RS
R/_
E
V55
D5
D6
D7
f.......
oo
PRINTED
4
CIRCUIT
s
I
I
I KX.FgOO
-¸ ]
BOARD (CORDLESS
6
BASE UNIT)
I
1_
(Component View)
B
C
D
(Bottom View)
!
i
OO []
G
Note:
1. This circuit shown in ___1 on the conductor indicates printed
circuit on the back side of the printed circuit board.
Note:
1. This circuit shown in _
on the conductor indicates printed
circuit on the front side of the printed circuit boarcl.
-196-
IU
1
_L_
;¢Z
_L_
[ Kx:_,oo
1
Kx:_;oo I
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (CORDLESS BASE UNIT)
s
I
0
I
7
I
8
I
-107-
_J_
'°
,_
"
I
12
_L
KX'F900
2
1
,3
I
4
PRINTED
5
I
I
KX-F900-
CIRCUIT BOARD (RF UNIT)
6
I
7
I
_1_
i
........ IL)
_
A
(Component View)
B
(Flow Solder Side View View)
D302
D301
C613e
C612 •
IC 302
C
¢6 i i
ii!iti̧ i
F
G
198
_1
11
12
KX-F900
5
KX-F900
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (RF UNIT)
I
6
I
7
I
10
11
12
Q309
0308
CN301
I
C304
_
_OOOP
Z
D310
C303
IF
5P
9(
,o
L 31B
RX VCO
i..........
2.0
10.25MHz
10.TMHz
R338
o
R320
4"/
I
22
; ;
i
-199-
Pollabie
Handset
AX
Signal
L__
KX-F°00
i I "X-Fg00'
]
PRINTED
I
CIRCUIT
5
I
BOARD (PORTABLE
6
I
7
(Flow Solder Side View View)
A
(Component View)
i
!
G
-
200
HANDSET)
I
8
10
11
i2
KX-F900
SCHEMATIC
J
DIAGRAM
I
6
1
KX-Fg00
(PORTABLE
I
7
J
HANDSET)
I
8
IO
I
L_
R402
1L207
C404
I
L422
C40G
FL401
L421
_ooop _jR404
£_OB
D403
33O
TXVCO
&
R412
R250
L402
:248
R218
o
TXO
M,_IN(
VCC
VCC (
TXB
RXB (
_L s_
IC201
) TX[
,(
) G.D
PD1
PD2
VCC
RST (
X401
C220
L ............
i
}3,o
R212
R432
o
_247
22K
+B
R2G£
1 OK
L400
20dB
C241
1_
C259
1.
u
SP+
t255
C246
o
KX-F900
PRINTED
4
I
CIRCUIT
5
KX-F900
BOARD AND SCHEMATIC
I
6
I
7
DIAGRAM
I
8
(CHARGE)
I
12
11
10
9
CN652
I^IBIclDIEIFIoI,
LEl)651
IAIBIclII2bI41sI61 IsIglAIBIcI__
MAIN
CHARGE
LF)
I,p
.J
tO
.J
C
CN654
CNbb
0---
,DIP
L65"/
J551
EEl--
-
EEF---J652
SP
CHARGE
o
J653
E3
ID
-J
J654
LE0651
R65t
S_CHARGE
LED
270
R652
M_CHARGE
G
LED
,
,/vv
27o
LED652
_
202 -
1
KX-F900
TERMINAL
GUIDE OF IC'S, TRANSISTORS
9
AND DIODES
32
7
15
2_14
14
1
1
_" 16
PQVIBA12003
PQVICX58257C
23
PFWlF900M
PQVITC4066BF
22
5
33_12
44
1
1
1
MN53007QAF
PQVI0008GE12
AN 1431T
PFVINJ2360D
PFVIFA5317P
5
51
60_
80_31
21
81_
.-'_ 30
100
PQVlMM1245BF
AN6183SE1
PQVIMC34119M
PQVlNJM2113V
PQVINJM4558M
PQVlNJM2903M
AN6116FAQ
1
PFVIR96DFXL
7
73
72
24
10_37
12
109<'_'_
1
_"....... 36
144
32
1
PFVIT7D56
AN6165SB
PQVIM64084AF
PQVIS79164FU
8
14
1
PQVITC4069UBF
33
48_17
16
PQVIDBL5018
D
2SK543
4_..--76
64
1
1
PQVIXCC3501 P
PQVlXC3002PR
PQVIXCC3202P
MN 151233KZAB
1
pQk/TFSIOKM10
2SD1858R
2SD1921Q
2SB1322
E
pQVTDTCl14EU
PQVTDTC144E
pQV3-D-I-C143E
pQVTD'IA143EU
PQVTD123J106
PQVTDTB123E
pQVTD123"I"146
pQVTDTC144TU
2SB970A
2SD1819A
2SD601R
2SC4571R77
2SC4226P,24
2SC4227R34
2SC4116
-203-
KX-F900
)
2SA1627
2SC4604
2SC2235
PQVDD2SBA60
PQVDS1ZB40F1
(_
Cat,__h_
PQVDAK04A
PQVDS5688G
PQVDERA1802
PQVDERA81004
PFVDAG01A
3
MA6D49
Cat h°de@Anod
MA165
MA4220
MA4180
e
MA2300
1SS131
hode
Cathod_
Anode
PQVDSLR325MC
PQVDSR325CA47
MA3062
MA7200
Cathode
Anode
RLS71
MAll0
Cathode
ode
MA2Slll
MA8047
PQVDRB751 H4
PQVDPY1112H
PQVDBR1112H
An°de
PQVDSB703Q
204-
lSSl19
MA4075
PQVDHZS2B1
J
TOOLS
PCB3
/
EC3
EC4
ECl
PCB5
o
,EC5
EC2
PCB2
PCB1
EC14
EC11
EC13
PCB8
EC1
6
"""
PCB6-1
EC17
PCB6
-205-
KX-F900
--r_0o.......
I
CABINET , MECHANICAL
AND ELECTRICAL
PARTS LOCATION
1. Operation Panel Section
I
i
t
9
14
12
®
/
/I
//
17
- 206-
J
KX-F900
J
2.Upper Section
65
66
I
/I
/
67
/
62
¢
/
/
68
®
(_) ;
®
55
62-1
/
64
A1
52
/
Note:
49
57
i/
,;40-'
I
- 207-
42
56
Attach the pad
plate to the top
of the cutter
unit as shown
above.
[
KX-F900
3.Lower
Section
147
137
138
108
127
120
(_)
139
PCB5
®
®
(D'
/
140
144
®
@
145
®&
1
&
®
- 208-
I
KX-F900
_. C(.;i3 SecI:io=_
LED AR_
COD CHASSIS 1 POitNT(_
Note; Place the LED Array in the
center of point® as shown above.
172
177
- 209 --
(_
I
KX-F900
1
5. PORTABLE
HANDSET
206
E902
208-1
204_
E903
205
208
208
201
A2
20;-
-210-
I
6. ACTUAL
SIZE OF SCREWS
AND WASHER
Part No.
Figure
(_)
XTW3+Sl
OP
(_
XTW3+W6P
(_
PJHE5065Z
(_)
XSN3+W6FZ
[_]]]]]]]
(_
XYC3+CF6
_]]]]]
(_
XSB4+6
(_
XYN2+C8
(_
XWC4B
(_
XYN3+FIO
(_)
XTB3+ 12G
(_)
XTW3+CS12P
(_
XTB26+8J
(_
XTW26+12F
(_)
XTB3+ 10G
I_
_
_]]]]_]_
0]]]]]_
{_]_333_
• 211-
KX-F9O0
_-....
KX-Fg_00
I
ACCESSORIES
AND PACKING MATERIALS
A2_,'
Battery
(KX-A92)
P6
P3
P5
A6, A7, A9
P1
P4
Note: The rechargeable Ni-Cd battery
KX-A92 are available through sales
route o4 Panaso_c-
-212-
1
KX-F900
REPLACEMENT
PARTS LIST
This replacement parts list is for U.S.A. version only. Refer to the simplified manual (cover)for otherareas.
:_ef. No.
Notes:
Part Name & Description
2. UPPER
1. RTL (Retention Time Limited)
The marking (RTL) indicates that the Retention Time is limited for this item.
After the discontinuation of this assembly in production, the item will continue
available for a specific period of time. The retention period of availability is
_O
_0-1
Type
ERD:
Carbon
ERC:Solid
PQRD: Carbon
Watta_le
IERG:
Metal Oxide
[ERX: Metal
Film
IER0: Metal Film
_ERS:
Fusible Resistor
IPQ4R:Carbon
_ERF: Cement Resistor
110.16:f/sw 114,25:f/4w 112:t/2w
*Type &Voltage
It: 1w
I
12:2w
13:3wI
of Capacitor
Type
ECFD: Semi-Conductor
ECQS: Styrol
PQCUV: Chip
ECQMS: Mica
Volta_le
ECQ Type
ECQG
ECQV Type
1H: 50V
05: 50V
2A: 100V
1: 100V
2E: 250V
2: 200V
2H: 500V
Part No.
CABINET,
IECCD, ECKD, ECBT, PQCBC: Ceramic
IECQE, ECQV, ECQG: Polyester
_ECEA, ECSZ: Electrolytic
|ECQP: Polypropylene
Others
I ECSZ Type
I
I OF:
ItA:
I 1V:
I 0J:
3.15V
10V
35V
6.3V
0J: 6.3V
I
1C: 16V
1A: t0V
1E, 25: 25V
1J: 63V
I 50, 1H: 50V
2A: 100V
iV: 35V
I
Part Name & Description
I
MECHANICAL
AND ELECTRICAL
PARTS
1. OPERATION
I
Pcs
PANEL SECTION)
1
1-1
1-2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PFYGF900M
PFGP1025Z
PFGG1008X2
PFUS1025Z
PFGV 1002Z
PFGD1004Z
PFBXl011Z1
PFGP1017Z
PFBX1013Xt
PFBX1012Y2
PFBC1004Z1
)PERATION
LCD PANEL
GRILLE
10
11
12
13
14
PQDR9685Z
PFAVLMG161C8
PFJSf0R21Z
PFDE1020Z
PFDE1019Z
PFUS1027Z
PFYC2F780M
PFHX1081Z
PFUS1026Y
PQDR 10005Z
ROLLER, SUPPORT
LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY
1
GRILLE ASS'Y
S
SPRING, ROLLER
TRANSPARENT
PLATE (for TEL. CARD)
TEL. CARD
BUTTON, DIAL
LED COVER
BUTTON, FUNCTION
BUTTON, DIALER
BUTTON, START/COPY/SET
HEAD SECTION)
to be
Unless otherwise specified,
All resistors are in ohms ( _ ) K=1000_, M=1000K_
All capacitors are in MICRO FARADS ( pF ) P= I_I_F
*Type &Wattage of Resistor
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
JPPER CABINET
"APE
ASS'Y
_2
_3
_4
_5
_6
_7
_8
t9
PFYM1 F900M
PFHS1010Z
PFBD1002Z2
P FUS 1022Y
P FUS 1042Z
PFUS1039Y
PFJS09R22Z
PFMH1021Y
PFDG1004Z
PFDJ1007Z
PFDN1006Z
_0
il
_2
Y3
$4
_5
_6
_7
_8
_9
PFJS6R23Z
PFDG1003Z
PFDJ1006Z
PFDN1005Z
PFDE1008X
PFDE1007X
PFDG1013Z
PFDJ1005Y
PFDN1003Z
PFJHS004Z
CONNECTOR,
30
30-1
31
32
32-1
33
34
35
36
36-1
37
38
39
PFZEF780M
PFHG1025Z
PFHD1003Y
PFYG3F900M
PFHX1098Z
PFJT1001Y
PFUG1006Z
PFKSl006Z2
PFYC1F900M
PFQT1134Z
PFKR1004Z2
PFKRt005Z2
PFUS1034Z
CUTTER ASS'Y
PAD PLATE
70
i'1
72
PFDG1002Z
73
74
PFJS18R31Z
PQSA 10047Z
PFGP1027Z
PFYFF900M
GEAR, DOCUMENT GUIDE
CONNECTOR, 18 PIN
ANTENNA
LED COVER
BOTTOM CABINET ASS'Y
75
PFKM1009Z2
UPPER CABINET(for
KNOB, FRONT LID OPEN
SPRING, EARTH
SPRING, THERMAL HEAD
SPRING, EARTH
CONNECTOR, 9 PIN
COVER, PAPER GUIDE
GEAR, DOCUMENT FEED ROLLER
SPACER, ROLLER
ROLLER, DOCUMENT FEED
6 PIN
GEAR, DOCUMENT FEED
SPACER, ROLLER
ROLLER, DOCUMENT FEED
GUIDE, HEAD (RIGHT)
GUIDE, HEAD (LEFT)
GEAR, RECORDING PAPER ROLLER
SPACER, PLATEN
ROLLER, RECORDING
THERMAL HEAD
20
21
22
23
24
CONNECTOR, 10 PIN
LEVER, READ DETECTION
LEVER, DOCUMENT DETECTION
SPRING, DOCUMENT LEVER
OPERATION GRILLE COVER ASS'Y
COVER (READING SHEET)
SPRING, SUPPORT ROLLER
ROLLER, SUPPORT EXIT PRINT
PFDF1005Z
SHAFT, SUPPORT
RLLER
PFHR1019Z
PFUS1024Z
PFUSt023Y
PFHG1020Z
PFHR1018Z
LEVER, SEPARATE SPRING ADJUST
SPRING, SEPARATION
SPRING, DOCUMENT FEED
RUBBER, SEPARATION
SEPARATION
RUBBER HOLDER
PAPER
REVET, HEADER PIN
CUTTER LOWER GUIDE ASS'Y
SPACER (CUTTER SHEET)
BATTERY CHARGE TERMINAL
GUIDE, CUTTER
TRAY, DOCUMENT
ROLL COVER ASS'Y
CAUTION LABEL
GUIDE, DOCUMENT (LEFT)
GUIDE, DOCUMENT (RIGHT))
SPRING, DOCUMENT
(for Handset Cradle)
Handset Cradle)
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
3. LOWER CABINET
15
16
16-1
17
18
19
Pcs
CABINET/
THERMAL
dependent on the type of assembly, and in accordance with the laws governing
pert and product retention.
After the end of this period, the assembly will no longer be available.
2. Important safety notice
Components identified by the Z_ mark special characteristics
important for safety.
When replacing any of these components, use only manufacturer's
specified parts.
3. The S mark indicates service standard parts and may differ from production parts.
4. RESISTORS & CAPACITORS
Ref. No 1
Part No.
Model KX-F900
SECTION)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
100
101
102
lO3
104
105
1
1
1
1
106
107
108
109
110
1
1
111
1
1
1
112
113
114
115
-213-
PQJM128Z
PQHG556Z
PQJS02Q62Z
PFHG1024Z
PFAS50PTC01Z
PFJS02R20Z
PFUS1029Y
PFDE1010Z
AICROPHONE
RUBBER, MIC COVER
CONNECTOR, 2 PIN
SPACER, SPEAKER
SPEAKER
CONNECTOR,
2 PIN
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PFDE1009Y
PFDE1011Z
PFZLF780M
SPRING, SPEAKER
LEVER, OPEN SENSOR
LEVER, JAM SENSOR
LEVER, PAPER SENSOR
LOCK LEVER ASS'Y
PFDJ1007Z
PFDN1004Z
PQUS10014Z
PFDG1012Z
XUC2FY
SPACER, ROLLER
ROLLER, SEPARATION
SPRING, ONE WAY
GEAR, SEPARATION
ROLLER
RETAINING RING
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
I-
KX'FgO0
I
This replacement parts list is for U.S,A. version only.
:tel. No.
Part No.
Part Name & Description
Refer to the simplified manual (cover)for
Pcs
Ref. No. I
Part No.
0the; areas.
_1
Part Name & Description
Pcs
I
116
117
PFJQ1003Z
PFJS05R24Z
118
119
PFUA1002Z
PFUS1018X
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
PFDG1008Z
PFDG1009Z
PFDG1005Z
PFUS1019Z
PFDE1014Z
PFDG1010Z
PFDG1006Z
PFDE1015Z
PFJS02R25Z
PQST2A04Z
130
131
PFJQ1004Z
PFJS05R27Z
132
133
134
135
PFUA1003Z
PFDG1011Z
PFMD1006Z
PFDE1017Z
136
137
PFDE1016Z
PFDE1028Z
138
139
PQFN51Z
PQHMl12Z
140
141
142
143
144
PQJP03S07Z
PQJS02Q59Y
PFUS1040Z
PFUS1017Y
PFDG1007Z
145
146
147
PFHA1001Z
PFGT1135Z
PFUS1043Z
TX MOTOR
1
CONNECTOR, 5 PIN
CHASSIS, TX GEAR
SPRING, STATIC ELECTRIC
1
1
1
GEAR, IDLER
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ACCESSORIES
A1
PQKK 10065Z1
:PFYC4F900M
A2
GEAR, IDLER
GEAR, CHANGEOVER
SPRING, TH RUST
' _,RM, CHANGEOVER
SEAR, IDLER
SEAR, CUTTER
ARM, CUTTER
CONNECTOR, 2 PIN
SEESAW SWITCH
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
RX MOTOR
CONNECTOR, 5 PIN
CHASSIS, RX GEAR
GEAR, IDLER
FRAME, BOTTOM
ARM, CUTTER
ARM, CUTTER
LEVER, REMOVE
WASHER
CLAMPER
CONNECTOR,
AC IN LET
CONNECTOR, 2 PIN
SPRING, EARTH
SPRING, STATIC ELECTRIC
GEAR, IDLER
RUBBER, LEGS
NAME PLATE
SPRING,
COVER OPEN SENSOR
AND PACKING MATERIALS
BATTERY
COVER
1
(for HANDSET CRADLE)
BATTERY COVER ASS'Y
(for HANDSET)
RECYCLE LABEL
POWER CORD
.Ah
ITELEPHONE CORD
• S
PAPER STACK
QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE
INSTRUCTION
BOOK
RECORDING
PAPER
ADVANTAGE PROGRAM SHEET
A2-1
A3
:A4
'_.5
_6
A7
A8
A9
PQQT11236Y
PQJA200Z
PQJA59V
PQUS10136Z
P FQW 1087Z
PFQXl060Z
PQH P 10023Z
PQQV 10276Z
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
PFPHIOO4Z
PFPK1139Z
PFPN1045Z
PFPNlO56Z
PQPPIOOO5Z
PROTECTION
GIFT BOX
ACCESSORY
COMPLETED
PROTECTION
BOX
PAD
COVER
P6
XZB10X15A04
PROTECTION
(for PRINTED MATERS
COVER
DIGITAL
PCB1
PFWP1F900M
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
COVER (tor UNIT)
(for BATTERY
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
COVERS
BOARD PARTS
DIGITAL P.C.BOARD
ASS'Y (RTL)
(ICS)
ICl
IC2
IC3
IC7
IC8
IC9
IC10
ICll
4. CCD SECTION)
170
170-1
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
PFWLF780M
PFVDSLA30222
PFOG10OIZ
PFUS1021Z
PFOL10OlZ
PFHE1004Z
PFJS08R26Z
PFMD1007Z
PFUS1028Z
PFOM1003Z
PFOM1001Z
_FOM1002Z
(5. PORTABLE
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
208-1
208-2
209
PQAX2P04Z
pQJT10112Z
pQJT10113Z
PQSA10048Z
PQSX10043Z
PQSX10045Z
PQHR10486Z1
PQKF10183Z1
PFYM2F900M
PFGT1163Z
PFQT1205Z
PQHS10293Z
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
CHASSIS ASS'Y
LED ARRAY
TARGET GLASS
SPRING, LENS
LENS
NUT
CONNECTOR, 8 PIN
COVER, CHASSIS
SPRING, MIRROR
MIRROR, SMALL
MIRROR, LARGE
MIRROR, MIDDLE
HANDSET
SPEAKER
CHARGE TERMINAL
CHARGE TERMINAL
ANTENNA
KEYBOARD SWITCH
KEYBOARD SWITCH
SPEAKER HOLDER
CABINET COVER
FRONT CABINET
qAME PLATE
-'AX REMOTE
COVER
LABEL
6
1
1
1
PFVIT7D56
PFWIF900M
PQVICX582570
PQVIBA 12003
PQVIBA12003
PQVIMM1245BF
PQVINJM4558M
PQVIR96DFXL
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
s
s
s
(TRANSISTORS)
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
(36
Q7
Q8
SECTION
2SB1322
PQVTDTC114EU
2SB1322
PQVTDTC114EU
PQVTDTA143EU
PQVTDTC114EU
2SD1819A
1
3
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-214-
TRANSISTOR(SI)
TRANSISTOR(SI)
TRANSISTOR(SI)
TRANSISTOR(SI)
TRANSISTOR(Sl)
TRANSISTOR(Sl)
TRANSlSTOR(Sl)
S
S
S
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
(DIDES)
D1
D2
D3
RLS71
RLS71
MA7200
D4
MA7200
S
1
1
1
S
1
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(Sl)
---Kx-Fg00This replacement parts list is for U.S.A.
version only.
.........................................
Ref. No.
Part No.
Part Name & Description
Pcs
Part No.
(BATTERY)
BAT10
PQPCR2032H09
PRIMARY
I
Refer to the simplified manual (cover) for other areas.
Ref. No.
Value
Pcs
(RESISTORS)
BA'I-FERY
1
R3
R4
R5
ERJ3GEYJ473
47K
47K
47K
100
100
1
1
1
1
1
PQ4R10XJ101
PQ4R10XJ101
PQ4R10XJ101
PQ4R10XJ101
PQ4R10XJ101
PQ4R10XJ101
PQ4R10XJ101
PQ4R10XJ101
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R28
R29
ERJ3GEYJ101
PQ4R10XJ472
PQ4R10XJ101
100
4.7K
100
1
1
1
R30
R31
R32
R33
R34
R35
R36
R37
R38
PQ4R10XJ472
PQ4R10XJ224
PQ4R10XJ102
PQ4Rt0XJ102
PQ4R10XJ102
PQ4Rt0XJ103
PQ4R10XJ472
PQ4R10XJ151
POARt0XJ000
4.7K
220K
1K
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R40
R41
R42
R43
R44
R45
R46
R47
R48
R49
PQ4R10XJ393
PQ4R10XJ563
PQ4R10XJ562
PQ4R10XJ821
ERD25TJ222
PQ4R10XJ821
ERD25TJ222
PQ4R10XJ223
PQ4R10XJ563
PQ4R10XJ473
39K
56K
5.6K
820
2.2K
820
2.2K
22K
56K
47K
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R50
R51
R52
R53
R54
R55
R56
R57
R58
R59
PQ4R10XJ101
PQ4R10XJ101
PQ4R10XJ101
PQ4R10XJ101
PQ4R10XJ101
PQ4R10XJ101
PQ4R10XJ101
PQ4R10XJ270
PQ4R10XJ105
PQ4R10XJ103
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
27
1M
10K
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R60
R61
R62
R63
R65
R66
R67
PQ4Rt0XJ103
PQ4R10XJ103
PQ4R10XJ000
ERD25TJ220
PQ4R10XJ000
PQ4R10XJ000
PQ4R10XJ000
10K
10K
1
R70
R71
PQ4R10XJ101
PQ4R10XJ101
R72
R73
R74
PQ4R10XJ101
PQ4R10XJ101
PQ4R10XJ000
R75
R76
R77
R78
PQ4R10XJ000
PQ4R10XJ222
PCHR10XJ105
PQ4R10XJ000
R6
R7
ERJ3GEYJ473
ERJ3GEYJ473
ERJ3GEYJ101
ERJ3GEYJ101
(CONNECTORS)
CN 1
CN 2
PQJP11A19Z
PQJP11A19Z
CN3
CN 5
CN 6
CN 7
CN 8
CN 9
CN 10
CN11
PQJP07A19Z
PQJP10G30Y
PQJP8G30Y
PQJP02G100Z
PQJP2G30Z
PQJP5G30Y
PQJ P05G 100Z
PQJP09G100Z
CONNECTOR,
CONNECTOR,
CONNECTOR,
CONNECTOR,
CONNECTOR,
CONNECTOR,
CONNECTOR,
CONNECTOR,
CONNECTOR,
CONNECTOR,
11 PIN
11 PIN
7 PIN
10 PIN
8 PIN
2 PIN
2 PIN
5 PIN
5 PIN
9 PIN
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
(COILS)
L4
L6
PQLQR 1ET
PQLQR1ET
COIL
COIL
R79
R80
R81
R82
R83
R84
PQLQR2BT
PQLQR2BT
PQLQR2BT
PQLQR2BT
PQLQR2BT
PQLQR2BT
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
1
1
s
s
s
s
s
s
CRYSTAL
X1
X2
X3
PQVCJ2400N5Z
PQVCL3276N6Z
PQVCJ2400N5Z
CRYSTAL
CRYSTAL
CRYSTAL
EXRVSVl01JV
EXRVSV101JV
EXRVSVl01JV
RA4
EXRVSV101JV
OSCILLATOR
OSCILLATOR
OSCILLATOR
COMPONENTS
COMPONENTS
COMPONENTS
COMPONENTS
(CERAMIC
LC1
EXCEMT222D
CERAMIC
R18
R19
R22
'PQ4R10XJ101
1K
1K
10K
4.7K
150
JUMPER,
0_
OSCILLATIONS)
(COMPONENTS
RA1
RA2
RA3
1
1
1
1
1
1
Rll
R12
R13
R14
R15
R16
R17
1
1
1
COMBINATIONS)
COMBINATION
COMBINATION
COMBINATION
COMBINATION
1
1
1
1
FILTER)
FILTER
1
-215-
1
JUMPER,
22
0Q
JUMPER,
JUMPER,
JUMPER,
0_
0_
OQ
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
100
100
100
1
1
100
--
JUMPER,
JUMPER,
2.2K
1M
0_
0_
1
1
JUMPER,
OQ
1
1
1
i KX-F,o
I
This replacement
Ref. No.
parts list is for U.S.A. version
only.
Value
Part No.
R85
R86
R87
R88
PQ4R10XJ000
PQ4R10XJ000
PQ4 R 10X J000
PQ4R10XJ000
JUMPER,
JUMPER,
JUMPER,
JUMPER,
R90
R91
R92
R93
R94
R95
R96
R97
R98
PQ4R10XF1802
PCHR 10X F8662
PQ4R10XJ103
ERJ6ENF4752
PQ4 R 10XJ473
PQ4R10XJ332
PQ4R 10X F8662
PQ4R10XJ164
PQ4R10XJ224
18K
86.6K
10K
47.5K
47K
3.3K
86.6K
16OK
220K
L7
PQ4R18XJ000
JUMPER,
Refer to the simplified manual (cover) for other areas.
Pcs
0_
0_
0_
0_
C64
C67
PQCUV1E104MD
PQCUVIE104MD
I
I
C68
C69
PQCUV1E104MD
PQCUV1E104MD
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C70
C71
C72
C73
C74
C75
C76
377
C78
C79
PQCUVlE104MD
PQCUV 1E104MD
PQCUV1E104MD
PQCUV1E104MD
PQCUV 1EIO4MD
PQCUV1H102J
PQCUVlE224MD
PQCUV1E104MD
PQCUV 1H331JC
PQCUV1E104MD
38O
981
382
383
385
386
388
C89
PQCUV 1H 105JC
PQCUV 1H331JC
PQCUV 1E104MD
PQCUV 1H102J
PQCUV 1H102J
PQCUV 1H102J
PQCUV 1H105JC
ECUVlE105ZF
C90
C91
C92
C93
C94
C95
PQCUV1H120JC
ECEAOJK221
220
S
1
C11
C13
C14
C15
C16
C17
C18
C19
ECEA1CKS100
ECUV1 H101JCV
ECUV1 H101JCV
ECUVl H101JCV
ECUVlH101JCV
ECUV1 H101JCV
ECUV1 H101JCV
ECUV I H 101JCV
10
;100P
100 P
100P
100P
100P
100P
100P
S
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
C31
C32
C33
C34
C35
C36
C37
C38
C39
PQCUV1H220JC
PQCUV1H220JC
ECEA1CK101
ECEAOJK221
PQCUV1 E104MD
ECEA1 VKS4R7
PQCUV1H 182KB
PQCUV1H222KB
PQCUV 1E 104M D
22P
22P
100
220
0.!
4.7
0.0018
0.0022
0.1
S
S
S
1
1
1
C40
C41
PQCUV1E104MD
PQCUV1E104MD
S
S
C42
C43
PQCUV1H150JC
PQCUV1 H150JC
0.1
0.1
15P
15P
0,1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
1
1
1
0.1
0.1
0.1
5P
5P
0.1
0.1
S
S
S
C46
C47
PQCUV1E104MD
PQCUV 1E 104MD
C48
C49
PQCUV1 E104MD
PQCUV1 E104MD
C51
C52
C53
C54
C55
PQCUV1 E104MD
PQCUV 1 E104MD
PQCUV 1E104MD
PQCUVlH050DC
PQCUV1H050DC
C56
C57
C58
PQCUV1E104MD
PQCUVt E104MD
PQCUV1E104MD
Part Name & Description
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PCB2
PQCUV 1H 180JC
PQCUV1E104MD
PQCUV 1E 104MD
PQCUV1E104MD
PQCUV1E104MD
PFWP3F900M
Pcs
& Value
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
S
1
S
S
S
1
1
1
0.1
S
S
S
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.001
1.22
S
S
S
S
0.1
330 P
0.1
0_
C 8
PQCUV1E104MD
PQCUV1E104MD
Part No.
I
I
(CAPACITORS)
C44
C45
Ref. No.
S
S
S
S
S
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
S
S
S
S
1
1
1
1
1
1
ASS'Y (RTL) z_
1
130P
0.1
0.001
O.O01
0.001
12P
18P
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
ANALOG
BOARD PARTS
ANALOG
P.C.BOARD
(ICS)
IC101
IC109
IC110
IC151
IC201
IC202
PQVINJM2903M
PQVIS79164FU
PQVITC4066BF
AN6116FAQ
PQVINJM4558M
PQVITC4066BF
IC241
PQVlMC34119M
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
S
S
S
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
(TRANSISTORS)
C60
_.R1
PQCUVlE 104MD
PQCUVl H t03KB
0.1
S
S
S
0.1
0.01
S
S
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-216-
Q101
Q102
Q103
Q106
2251
Q252
Q253
Q271
2SA1627
2SD1819A
2SC2235
PQVTDTC143E
2SD1921Q
2SD1921Q
2SD 1858R
PQVTDTC 143 E
TRANSISTOR(SI)
TRANSISTOR(SI)
TRANSISTOR(SI)
TRANSISTOR(SI)
TRANSISTOR(SI)
TRANSISTOR(SI)
TRANSISTOR(SI)
TRANSISTOR(S0
S
S
S
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
KX-F900
This replacement
Ref. No
Pad No.
I
)101
)102
)151
)152
)201
)202
)271
)290
)291
_D101
_D102
_D103
parts list is for U.S.A. version only.
Refer to the simplified manual (cover) for other areas.
Pcs
Part Name & Description
Ref. No.
Part No.
(DIODES)
PQVDSIZB40F1
1SS119
1SSl19
1SSl19
Pcs
& Value
VARISTORS)
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
1
1
1
1
1SSl19
1SS119
I RLS71
1SSl19
1SSl19
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
1
1
1
1
1
MA4180
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
1
1
1
PQVDHZS2B1
MA7120
Part Name & Description
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
;A101
;A102
PQVDDSS301L
PFVDRA102M
VARISTOR
VARISTOR
1
1
(TRANSFORMERS)
101
"102
PQLT8E7A
PQLT8E6A
TRANSFORMER
TRANSFORMER
1
1
(OTHERS)
.106
_OS101
;1L101
tAR1
(JACKS)
IJ1
IJ2
PFJJ1T01Z
PFJJ1T01Z
JACK, TELEPHONE
JACK, TELEPHONE
EXCELDR35
PQRPBC120N
PQSL119Z
PQVDVR61B
COMPONENTS
THERMISTOR
RELAY
VARISTOR
COMBINATION
s
1
1
1
1
1
1
LINE
LINE
(RESISTORS)
(CONNECTORS)
;N152
;N153
;N241
;N251
;N271
;N272
;N273
PQJP2G30Z
PFJP18A02Z
PQJP02G100Z
!PQJP08BtlZ
PQJS11A10Z
PQJStlA10Z
PQJS07A10Z
CONNECTOR,
CONNECTOR,
CONNECTOR,
CONNECTOR,
CONNECTOR,
CONNECTOR,
CONNECTOR,
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2PIN
18PIN
2PIN
8PIN
11PIN
11PIN
7PIN
:1102
:1103
:1104
:1106
:1107
:1109
PQ4R18XJ000
ERDS1TJ330
ERDS1TJ473
ERDS2TJ152
ERDS1TJ473
PQ4R10XJ104
JUMPER,
33
47K
1.5K
47K
100K
:1111
:1112
;1113
;1114
;1115
;1116
;1117
;1118
PQ4R10XJ472
PQ4R10XJ393
PQ4R10XJ103
PQ4R10XJ682
PQ4R10XJ822
ERDS2TJ5R6
PQ4R10XJ123
PQ4R10XJ562
4.7K
39K
10K
_.8K
{120
0_
1
1
1
1
1
1
12K
5.6K
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
I
PQ4R10XJ391
ago
1
{130
{131
{132
1133
{134
{135
{136
{138
{139
ERJ3GEYJ332
ERJ3GEYJ 102
ERJ3GEYJ223
ERJ3GEYJ104
ERJ3GEYJ512
ERJ3GEYJ563
ERJ3GEYJ102
ERJ3GEYJ333
ERJ3GEYJ333
3.3K
1K
22K
100K
5.1K
56K
1K
33K
33K
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1140
1141
{142
;1143
:_144
:_145
R146
R147
R148
R149
ERJ3GEYJ333
PQ4R10XJ220
ERJ3GEYJ681
ERJ3GEYJ123
ERJ3GEYJ275
ER33GE'YJ223
ERJ3GEYJ273
ERJ3GEYJ 114
ERJ3GEYJ104
ERJ3GEYJ513
33K
22
68O
12K
2.7M
22K
27K
110K
100K
1
1
1
1
1
R150
ERJ3GEYJ224
ERJ3GEYJ222
ERJ3GEYJ222
!e.2K
5.6
(SWITCHES)
;W271
;W272
;W273
;W274
PFSH1A02Z
PFSH1A02Z
PFSH1A02Z
PQSS2A27Z
SWITCH,
SWITCH,
SENSOR
SENSOR
I
I
SWITCH,
SWITCH,
SENSOR
DIALING MODE
I
I
(COILS)
103
104
PQLQR 1E32A07
PQLQR 1E32A07
.105
PFLE003
COIL
COIL
COIL
1
1
1
(PHOTO COUPLERS)
PC101
PC102
PC103
PC105
PQVIPC814K
PQVITLP627
PQVIPC817CD
PQVIPC814K
PHOTO ELECTRIC
PHOTO ELECTRIC
TRANSDUCER
TRANSDUCER
zt
Z_
PHOTO ELECTRIC
PHOTO ELECTRIC
TRANSDUCER
TRANSDUCER
Z_
1
1
I
1
R158
R159
-217-
HK
_)20K
2.2K
2.2K
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
KX-F900
This replacement parts list is for U.S.A. version only.
1. N_
;0
;1
;2
,4
;5
_6
Pa_ No.
E RJ3GEYJ !03
Value
JUMPER,
10K
10K
100K
19
E RJ3GEYJ103
ERJ3GEYJ104
E RJ3GEYJ103
ERJ3GEYJ683
E RJ3GEYJ103
'0
'1
E RJ3GEYJ683
ERJ3GEYJ104
'2
'3
'5
'6
'7
'8
'9
E RJ3GEYJ123
ERJ3GEYOR00
ERJ3GEYJ334
ERJ3GEYJ223
ERJ3GEYJ103
ERJ3GEYJ274
ERJ3GEYJ682
68K
100K
12K
}0
ERJ3GEYJ433
ERJ3GEYJ153
ERJ3GEYJ473
ERJ3GEYJ183
ERJ3GEYJ184
E RJ3GEYJ103
_2
_4
L5
}6
}7
38
39
ERJ3GEYJ124
ERJ3GEYJ223
ERJ3GEYJ155
1
1
0(1
275
276
277
1
1
1
1
1
278
279
1
1
1
1
0Q
1
1
10K
270K
6.8K
1
1
1
43K
15K
47K
18K
180K
10K
120K
22K
1.5M
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1M
1K
100
1
1
1
1K
1
!56K
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
)0
)1
PQ4R10XJ105
)2
PQ4R18XJ101
)1
)2
)3
)4
)5
36
)7
)8
)9
ERJ3GEYJ102
ERJ3GEYJ563
ERJ3GEYJ223
ERJ3GEYJ563
ERJ3GEYJ822
ERJ3GEYJ184
ERJ3GEYJ682
PQ4 R 10XJ 184
ERJ3GEYJ224
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
ERJ3GEYJ393
ERJ3GEYJ224
PQ4R10XJ104
PQ4R10XJ104
PQ4R10XJ224
ERJ3GEYJ222
ERJ3GEYJ332
ERJ3GEYOR00
39K
220K
100K
100K
220K
2.2K
20
21
22
PQ4R10XJ 104
ERJ3GEYJ682
ERJ3GEYJ472
100K
ERDS2TJ102
;tef. No. i
Pcs
10K
68K
10K
JUMPER,
330K
22K
Refer to the simplified manual (cover) for other areas.
22K
56K
&2K
180K
&8K
180K
220K
3.3K
JUMPER,
:
Pa_ No.
' PQ4R10XJ!02
ERJ3GEYJ101
PQ4Rt0XJ472
I PQ4R10XJ101
ERJ3GEYJ101
Value
P°s
I
1K
100
4.7K
100
100
28O
281
282
284
ERJ3GEYJ333
ERJ3GEYJ 182
ERJ3GEYJ473
ERJ3GEYJ473
33K
1.8K
47K
47K
29O
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
PQ4R 10XJ 000
ERJ3GEYJ473
ERJ3GEYJ563
ERJ3GEYJ152
iERJ3GEYJ473
IERJ3GEYJ104
ERJ3GEYJI02
ERJ3GEYJI03
JUMPER,
47K
56K
1.5K
47K
100K
1K
10K
108
ERDS2TJ681
680
104
105
ERJ3GEYOR00
ERJ3GEYOR00
JUMPER,
JUMPER,
O_
OQ
1
1
250
252
PQ4R10XJ000
PCHR10XJ000
JUMPER,
JUMPER,
O_
0_
1
1
270
271
272
!JUMPER,
IJUMPER,
0_
0Q
1
1
275
276
ERJ3GEYOR00
ERJ3GEYOR00
ERJ3GEYOR00
ERJ3GEYOR00
ERJ3GEYOR00
ERJ3GEYOR00
E RJ3GEYOR00
JUMPER,
JUMPER,
JUMPER,
JUMPER,
JUMPER,
0_
0_
0Q
0_
0O
1
1
1
1
1
;193
E RJ3GEYOR00
JUMPER,
0_
1
273
274
0_
!
'
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0_
(CAPACITORS)
41
42
43
44
45
PQ4R10XJ4R7
ERJ3GEYJ103
ERJ3GEYJ102
ERJ3GEYJ153
ERJ3GEYJ123
'51
_52
_54
t55
-)56
._57
PQ4R10XJ221
ERDS1TJ122
PQ4R10XJ103
PQ4R10XJ563
PQ4R10XJ123
_)71
272
273
ERJ3GEYJ 102
ERJ3GEYJ 101
ERJ3GEYJ102
274
IPQ4R10XJ101
PQ4R10XJ222
6.8K
1
1
4.7K
1
1
1
1
1
1
4.7
10K
1K
15K
12K
220
1.2K
10K
56K
12K
2.2K
1
1
1
1
1
1
1K
100
1K
100
1
1
1
L
1
-218-
;101
;102
;103
;104
;105
;106
) 107
;108
3109
ECKD2H681KB
ECKD2H681KB
3110
3111
3112
ECEAICKS100
C 130
C131
C132
C133
C134
C135
ECQE2E224JZ
ECEA1HN3R3S
ECQE2E104KZ
PQCUV1H103KB
ECEA1CKS221
ECEA1CKS100
ECEA1HKS4R7
PQCUV1E333MD
PQCUV1H 105JC
680P
680P
0.22
3.3
0.1
0.01
220
10
4.7
10
0.033
1
ECUV1C683KBV
ECEA1HKS010
0.068
PQCUVlC224ZF
ECUV1H561JCV
ECEA1CKS470
ECEA1HKS4R7
1.22
;60P
47
4.7
I
S
S
1
I
I
I
S
I
I
I
I
s
s
S
S
I
I
I
I
I
S
s,
I
I
I
sl
1
KX-F900
This replacement parts list is for U.S.A. version only.
_ef. No.
Pan No.
Value
Refer to the simplified manual (cover) for other areas.
PCS
Ref. No.
Part No.
Value
Pcs
ECEAOJK221
ECEA1HKS4R7
ECUV1C473KBV
ECUV1H223KBV
220
4.7
0.047
0.022
s
S
1
1
;257
ECEA1HU330
33
1
1
1
:265
ECUVIHIO4ZFV
0.1
1
S
330
0.0022
0.22
0.047
1
2.2
0.033
s
s
;271
;272
;273
;274
;276
;277
;278
;146
ECEAOJSJ331
PQCUV1H222KB
PQCUVlC224ZF
ECUV1C473KBV
ECEA1HKS010
ECEA1HKS2R2
PQCUV1H333JC
;279
ECUV1H103KBV
PQCUV1H103KB
PQCUV1H103KB
PQCUV1H103KB
ECUV1H103KBV
ECUV1H104ZFV
PQCUV1C334ZF
ECUV1H330JCV
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.1
0.33
33P
;155
;156
;157
;158
;159
ECUV1H221JCV
ECEAOJKS101
ECUV1H332KBV
ECUV1C683KBV
ECUVlCl04KBV
220P
100
0.0033
0.068
0.1
;290
;291
ECUVIC104KBV
ECUV1H103KBV
0.1
0.01
;161
;162
;166
PQCUV1H105JC
PQCUV 1H 10550
PQCUV 1H 105JC
1
,_171
_172
_173
_.174
_176
_.177
_178
_.179
PQCUV1H105JC
ECEAOJKS101
ECUVIC104KBV
ERJ3GEYOR00
ECUV1C473KBV
ECUV1H101JCV
ECEAOJKSl01
ECUV1C104KBV
1
100
0.1
JUMPER,
0.047
100P
100
0.1
;180
;181
;182
;183
.3184
.3186
.3187
ECUV1H331JCV
330P
0.1
220P
0.0068
0.1
0.0033
3.1
3.0033
0.0033
S
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
S
1
1
1
1
1
1
:136
',137
;138
',139
;140
;141
:142
;143
;144
;145
S
s
s
1
1
1
1
1
s
s
s
1
1
.3188
;189
PQCUV1E104MD
ECUV1H221JCV
ECUV1H682KBV
ECUVlCl04KBV
ECUV1H332KBV
ECUVlCl04KBV
ECUV1H332KBV
ECUV1H332KBV
.3201
.3202
.3203
.3204
.3205
.3206
.3207
-3208
.3209
PQCUV1 H102J
ECEA1 HKS4R7
PQCUV1 E104MD
ECUV1H680JCV
PQCUV1 E104MD
PQCUV1H101JC
PQCUV1 E104MD
ECUV1H101JCV
ECUV1H 103KBV
0.001
4.7
C).1
B8P
0.1
100P
.3210
.3211
.3212
.3213
.3214
.3217
.3218
ECEA1HKS100
ECEA1CKS100
ECEA1HKS100
ECUV1C104KBV
ECUVlCl04KBV
ECUVlCl04KBV
PQCUV1C224ZF
C241
ECEAOJKS101
C242
C243
C244
C245
ECUV1H 102KBV
PQCUV 1H 105JC
PQCUV1H 105JC
PQCUVlE273MD
C251
C252
C253
C254
C255
C256
PQCUV1H 104ZF
ECEA1HU330
ECEA 1HU330
PQCUV1E104MD
ECEA1EU101
).1
33
33
IPQCUV1H 104ZF
).1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0_
0.1
100P
1
1
0.01
1
10
10
10
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.22
1
1
100
3.001
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
S
1.027
0.1
100
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-219-
s
s
s
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
I
X--F90O
]
This replacement parts list is for U.S.A. version only.
Refer to the simplified manual (cover) for other areas.
!
Ref. No. I
ef. No.
Part No.
I
Part Name & Description
OPERATION
PFLP1058M
Part No.
P.C.BOARD
'cS
& Value
I Pcs
BOARD PARTS
)PERATION
Part Name & Description
(PHOTO COPLERS)
301
302
ASS'Y (RTL)
CNA1006N
;NA1006N
PHOTO ELECTRIC
PHOTO ELECTRIC
1
1
TRANSDUCER
TRANSDUCER
Ic)
MN53007QAF
IC
(RESISTORS)
(DIODES)
1SS131
1SS131
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
PQVDR325CA47
PQVDR325CA47
PQVDSLR325MC
LED
LED
LED
1
1
1
_,07
_08
_09
_Q4R10XJ181
PQ4R10XJ181
PQ4R10XJ181
180
180
180
1
1
H0
_,11
312
PQ4R10XJ181
PQ4R10XJ181
PQ4R10XJ181
180
180
180
1
1
1
320
322
323
328
329
PQ4R10XJ680
PQ4R10XJ222
PQ4R10XJ471
PQ4R10XJ471
PQ4R10XJ102
68
2.2K
470
470
1K
1
1
1
1
1
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
PQ4R10XJ472
PQ4R10XJ331
PQ4R10XJ331
PQ4R10XJ563
PQ4R10XJ181
PQ4R10XJ181
PQ4R10XJ181
PQ4R10XJ181
PQ4R10XJ!81
PQ4R10XJ181
4.7K
330
330
56K
180
180
180
180
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
34O
341
PQ4R10XJ181
PQ4R10XJ181
180
180
1
1
35O
351
352
353
354
PQ4R10XJ181
PQ4R10XJ181
PQ4R10XJ103
PQ4R10XJ103
PQ4R10XJ471
180
180
10K
10K
470
1
1
1
1
1
392
PQ4R10XJ000
1
SWITCHES)
PQSH1A105Z
PQSH1A105Z
PQSH1A105Z
PQSH1A105Z
PQSH1A105Z
F'QSH 1A 105Z
PQSH1A105Z
PQSH1A105Z
PQSH1A105Z
PQSH1A105Z
PQSH1A105Z
PQSH1A105Z
PQSH1A105Z
PQSH 1A 105Z
PQSH 1A105Z
PQSH1A105Z
PQSH1A105Z
PQSH 1A105Z
PQSH1A105Z
PQSH1A105Z
PQSH 1A105Z
PQS H 1A 105Z
PQSH 1A105Z
PQSH1A105Z
PQSH1A105Z
PQSH1A105Z
PQSH 1A105Z
PQSH1A105Z
PQSH1A105Z
PQSH1A105Z
PQSH1A105Z
PQSH1 A105Z
SWITCH,
SWITCH,
SWITCH,
SWITCH,
SWITCH,
SWITCH,
SWITCH,
SWITCH,
SWITCH,
SWITCH,
SWITCH,
SWITCH,
SWITCH,
SWITCH,
SWITCH,
SWITCH,
SWITCH,
SWITCH,
SWITCH,
SWITCH,
SWITCH,
SWITCH,
SWITCH,
SWITCH,
SWITCH,
SWITCH,
SWITCH,
SWITCH,
SWITCH,
SWITCH,
SWITCH,
SWITCH,
VOLUME
ONE-TOUCH
ONE-TOUCH
STOP
ONE-TOUCH
ONE-TOUCH
START/COPYtSET
LOWER
ONE-TOUCH
VOLUME
DIAL "3"
DIAL "2"
DIAL "1"
SP-PHONE
MUTE
REDIAL/PAUSE
FLASH
HELP
DIAL "6"
DIAL "5"
DIAL "4"
DIRECTORY
DIAL "9"
DIAL "8"
DIAL "7"
AUTO RECEIVE
DIAL "#"'
DIAL "0"
DIAL" _ "
MEMU
RESOLUTION
LOCATOR/INTERCOM
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
CONNECTOR,
CONNECTOR,
JUMPER,
!
1
0£
1
1
1
1
(CAPACITORS)
1
1
1
1
1
(CONNECTORS)
pQJP10G43Y
pQJS10X59Z
180
180
10 PIN
10 PIN
-220-
;301
;302
;305
;307
3308
3309
PQCUV1 E104MD
ECEA1AKS101
PQCUV1H 122KB
PQCUk/1 _4331JC
PQCUV 1 H331JC
PQCUV 1H331JC
3310
3314
C316
C318
C319
PQCUV1H331JC
PQCUV1E104MD
PQCUVlE104MD
PQCUV 1E104MD
PQCUV 1E104MD
1
1
1
0.1
100
).0012
33oP
330P
30P
_30P
1.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
1
1
1
s
s
s
1
1
1
1
1
I
This replacement parts list is for U.S.A. version only.
KX-F900
I
Refer to the simplified manual (cover) for other areas.
Re,
No
I Pa INo
Pa Name,Oesori
IPcs
on,Vaue
I
Ref. No. I
CCD BOARD
I PFWP2F780M
TRANSISTOR(SI)
TRANSISTOR(SI)
TRANSISTOR(SI)
2SD1819A
(CONNECTOR)
CONNECTOR,
PFJS08R26Z
EVNDXAA03B23
1
ASS'Y (RTL)
S
S
S
1
1
1
1
8 PIN
_101
;)201
I
Part Name & Description
POWER
PQVTFS10KM10
SUPPLY
SUPPLY
I
Pcs
BOARD PARTS
P.C.BOARD
,,'h
ASS'Y (RTL)
1
(ICS)
IC
IC
IC
S
1
1
1
(TRANSISTORS)
1
TRANSISTOR(SI)
TRANSISTOR(SI)
1
(OTHERS)
VARIABLE
SPACER
RESISTOR
2SC4604
1
1
2K
2K
10
2.4K
2.7K
2.4K
2.7K
470
470
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
680
100
100
1
1
1
i PQAR10XJ47t
I PQ4R 10XJ681
I PQ4Rt0XJ101
PFVlFA5317P
AN1431T
PFVINJ2360AD
(RESISTORS)
I
I
I
I
I
I
_101
C201
3202
]
POWER
PFLP1038MM1
PQHR5135Z
PQ4R10XJ202
PQ4R10XJ202
PQ4R 10XJ 100
PQ4R 10XJ242
PQ4R10XJ272
PQ4R 10XJ242
PQ4R 10XJ272
PQ4R 10XJ47t
SWITCHING
_CB5
(TRANSISTORS)
2SB1218A
2SB1218A
Part No.
I
PARTS
CCD P.C.BOARD
I
)101
)102
)103
)104
)105
)106
)201
)202
)203
)204
)205
PQVDD2SBA60
PQVDERA1802
PFVDAG01A
MA165
MA4220
MA165
MA6D49
MA2300
PQVDERA81004
MA4075
(DIODES)
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
MA165
(CONNECTORS)
;N31
;N301
;N302
PQJP2D98Z
I PQJP6G100Z
I PQJS08A36Z
CONNECTOR,
CONNECTOR,
CONNECTOR,
1
1
1
2PtN
6PtN
8PIN
i PQ4RIOXJt01
I PQ4R 10XJ000
JUMPER,
0_
1
PQ4 R 18X J000
PQ4R 10X J000
PQ4R 10X J000
JUMPER,
JUMPER,
JUMPER,
0_
0_
0_
1
1
1
(COILS)
1801
1802
1803
.101
.102
-201
ELF18D290
ELF18D290
PQLQXL471K
COIL
COIL
COIL
z_S
•_S
1
1
1
(VARISTORS)
(CAPACITORS)
.3801
.3803
3804
PQCUV1E104MD
ECEA1CKS101
PQCUV1E104MD
0.1
100
0.1
1
1
S
_NR101
ZNR102
ZNR103
1
i
-221 -
ERZV10DK471U
ERZV10DK182U
ERZV10DK751U
VARISTOR
VARISTOR
VARISTOR
,,k_
,_S
,._S
1
1
1
I.....
Kx. ,oo
....1
This replacement parts list is for U.S,A. version only.
Ref. No.
Pan No.
Part Name & Description
(COMPONENTS
L103
I..203
EXCELDR35
EXCELDR35
Refer to the simplified manual (cover) for other areas.
Pcs
& Value
PC101
ON3131S
ON3131S
Pa_ No.
Part Name & Description
COMBINATIONS)
COMPONENTS
COMBINATION
COMPONENTS
COMBINATION
,PHOTO ELECTRIC
PHOTO ELECTRIC
TRANSDUCER
TRANSDUCER
Pcs
& Value
(CAPACITORS)
S
(PHOTO COUPLERS)
PC 102
Ref. No.
z_
,_
C101
C102
C103
C104
C105
C106
C107
C108
C109
ECQU2A104MV
ECQU2A104MV
ECKDRS102MB
ECKDRS102MB
ECKDKC472KB
EETLD2D151
ECKD3A221 KBP
ECKD3A102KBP
ECA1 VHG330
0.1
0.1
0.001
0.001
0.0047
150
220P
0.001
33
C121
C122
C123
C124
ECUV1H221KBM
ECUV1C224KBX
ECUV1H561KBM
'ECUV1H473KBW
220P
0.22
560P
0.047
1
1
1
1
C201
C202
C204
C221
C223
EEUFA1V103
ECKD3A102KBP
PQCEA 10B1000
ECUV1HIO4KBW
ECUV1H271KBM
0.001
0.001
1000
0.1
270P
1
1
1
1
1
z_
1
1
z_,
,_
1
1
1
1
1
1
(OTHERS)
F101
TI01
THI01
VR201
RL201
PQBA1C50NBKL
PFLTR297101
PFRTM8R207C
EVNDJAA03B53
PQSLG5P1
FUSE
TRANSFORMER
THERMISTOR
VARIABLE RESISTOR
RELAY
z_
z_
S
S
S
1
t
1
1
1
(RESISTORS)
1
ERDS2FJ150
ERDS2TJ273
IM
39K
39K
10
0.22
I1
22
15
'27K
Rl10
R111
Rl12
Rl13
Rl14
ERG1SJ104
ERDS2TJ273
ERDS2TJ273
ERDS2TJ273
ERDS2TJ220
tOOK
27K
27K
27K
22
1
1
1
R121
R122
R124
R125
R126
R127
PQ4R10XJ103
PQ4R10XJ471
PQ4R10XJ181
PQ4R10XJ101
PQ4R10XJ562
PQ4R10XJ222
t0K
470
1
1
180
100
5.6K
2.2K
1
1
1
1
R20t
R202
R204
R205
ERG1SJR33
ERDS2TJ121
ERDS2TJ563
ERDS2TJ103
,0.33
120
56K
10K
1
1
1
1
R221
PQ4R10XJ222
PQ4R10XJ222
PQ4R10XJ101
RIO1
R102
R103
R104
R105
R106
R107
R108
R109
'ERDSIFJt05
E R DS2TJ393
ERDS2TJ393
ERG1SJU100
ERX2SJR22
ERDS2TJ0t0
ERDS2TJ220
R222
R223
R224
R225
R227
_228
J12
J13
PQ4R10XJ273
PQ4R10XJ332
PQ4R10XJ392
PQ4R10XJ122
PQ4R18XJ000
PQ4R10XJ000
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2.2K
2.2K
100
27K
3.3K
3.9K
1.2K
JUMPER,
JUMPER,
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0Q
0_
1
1
- 222-
CORDLESS
PCB6
PFLPt056M
BASE BOARD PARTS
CORDLESS
BASE P.C.BOARD
1
ASS'Y (RTL
(ICS)
IC501
IC502
C503
IIC504
PFVI0008GE12
AN6165SB
PQVITC4069UBF
PQVINJ2360D
IC
IC
IC
IC
1
1
1
1
(TRANSISTORS)
C}502
Q503
Q504
Q505
Q506
Q507
Q50B
Q509
Q510
C}511
Q512
2SD601R
2SD601R
2SD601R
2SB970A
PQVTDTC144E
PQVTDTC144E
2SB970A
_SB1416
2SB1322
2SK543
PQVTDTC144E
TRANSISTOR(SI)
TRANSISTOR(SI)
TRANSISTOR(SI)
TRANSISTOR(SI)
TRANSISTOR(SI)
,TRANSISTOR(SI)
TRANSISTOR(SI)
TRANSlSTOR(SI)
TRANSISTOR(Sl)
TRANSISTOR(Sl)
TRANSISTOR(SI)
1
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
This replacement
parts list is for U.S.A. version
Part Name & Description
_ef. No. I
513
N50i
N502
N503
G
G
Pcs
PCS
0_
1
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(S0
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(S0
VARISTOR
_PQVDSBT03Q
I1SS131
IMA110
I1SS131
IMA110
IMA110
IMA110
IPQVDS5688G
IPQVDAK04A
IMA4075
1
1
52O
521
PQ4R 10X J000
PQ4R 10XJ000
O_
0_
1
1
1
1
1
1
522
523
524
525
526
PQ4R
PQ4R
PQ4R
PQ4R
PQ4R
JUMPER,
JUMPER,
220K
220K
JUMPER,
JUMPER,
JUMPER,
0_
0_
0_
1
1
1
530
534
535
539
PQ4R10XJ000
ERDStTJ560
JUMPER,
56
47
100K
OQ
1
1
540
:541
;542
;543
;544
1545
;546
',548
;549
PQ4 R 18XJ332
',550
1553
:554
1
1
1
1
1
I PQVDDSS301L
/
(CONNECTORS)
/ PFJP18A02Z
I PQJP 12B44Z
I PQJP8G30Y
PQJP18Z
] PQJP18Z
CONNECTOR,
CONNECTOR,
CONNECTOR,
CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
18 PIN
12 PIN
8 PIN
LEAD
LEAD
1
1
1
1
1
(COl LS)
PQLQR1KT
PQLQR1KT
PQLQR1KT
PQLQR1KT
PQLQR1KT
PQLQZM2R2K
! PQLQXH152J
PQLQRtKT
COIL
COIL
1
1
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
1
1
1
1
1
1
(OTHERS)
'CB6-1
i601
PQLP10179M
PQHR10484Z
RF UNIT P.C.BOARD
HOLDER tor RF UNIT
1
1
'R501
'R502
'.501
EVNDXAA03B24
EVNDXAA03B54
VARIABLE RESISTOR
VARIABLE RESISTOR
;ERAMIC FILTER
1
1
1
PQVBT3.99G
1
(RESISTORS)
R510
R511
R512
R518
Value
JUMPER,
I
_501
_502
_503
_504
_505
R506
Part No.
PQ4R10XJ000
I
506
507
508
517
519
520
:{ef. No.
519
(DIODES)
I
501
502
Refer to the simplified manual (cover) for other areas.
Part No.
I
501
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
& Value
only.
KX-F900- ............
]
PQ4R10XJ102
PQ4R10XJ102
PQ4R10XJ000
PQ4R10XJ102
PQ4R10XJ102
PQ4R10XJ102
PQ4R10XJ104
PQ4R10XJ105
PQ4R10XJ104
PQ4R10XJ000
1K
1K
JUMPER,
1K
1K
0Q
1K
1 O0K
1M
10OK
JUMPER,
0_
1
1
1
1
1
1
I,
1
1
1
10XJ224
10XJ224
10X J000
10X J000
10X J000
ERDS1TJ470
PQ4R10XJ104
1
1
1
1
3.3K
5.6K
10K
220
220
100
56
100K
10K
1
10K
5.6K
10K
;557
;558
PQ4R10XJ103
PQ4R10XJ562
PQ4R10XJ103
PQ4R10XJ000
PQ4R10XJ000
JUMPER,
JUMPER,
0_
0Q
1
1
1
1
1
;561
;562
;563
L564
_565
t567
t568
t569
PQ4Rt0XJ000
PQ4R10XJO00
PQ4R10XJ154
PQ4R10XJ105
PQ4R10XJ154
PQ4R10XJ333
PQ4R10XJ563
PQ4R10XJ123
JUMPER,
JUMPER,
150K
1M
150K
33K
56K
12K
0_
0_
_570
T571
T572
_573
1574
T575
_576
1577
1578
1579
PQ4R10XJ123
PQ4R10XJ223
PQ4R10XJ000
PQ4R10XJ333
PQ4R10XJ333
PQ4R10XJ000
PQ4R10XJ822
PQ4R10XJ153
PQ4R10XJ153
PQ4R10XJ123
12K
22K
JUMPER,
33K
33K
JUMPER,
8.2K
15K
15K
12K
_580
_581
;t582
:1583
:1584
:1585
_587
_588
:_589
PQ4R10XJ563
PQ4R10XJ472
PQ4R10XJ682
PQ4R10XJ102
PQ4R10XJ102
PQ4R10XJ154
ERX2SJR82
ERDS2TJ101
ERDStTJ102
56K
4.7K
6.8K
1K
1K
150K
0.82
100
1K
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
_590
R591
EROS2TKF8661
EROS2TKF1001
PQ4R10XJ223
PQ4R10XJ103
PQ4R10XJ332
PQ4R10XJ823
8.66K
1K
22K
1OK
3.3K
82K
470
12K
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R592
R593
R594
R595
R596
R598
R599
-223-
PQ4R10XJ562
PQ4R10XJ103
ERDS2TJ221
ERDS2TJ221
ERDS1TJ101
ERDS1TJ560
PQ4R10XJ104
PQ4R10XJ103
PQ4R10XJ471
PQ4R10XJ123
PQ4R10XJ562
5.6K
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0_
1
1
1
1
1
0_
1
,I
1
1
1
1
1
I
i Kx--Fgoo
....j
This replacement
Ref. No.
_600
_601
9602
9603
R604
R605
R606
Refer to the simplified manual (cover) for other areas.
parts list is for U.S.A. version only.
Value
Pa_ No.
PQ4R10XJ563
PQ4R10XJ000
PQ4R10XJ000
Pcs
56K
JUMPER, 0_
JUMPER, 0_
47K
3.3K
JUMPER, 0Q
12K
4.7K
39K
R607
R608
R609
PCHR10XJ473
PQ4R10XJ332
PO4R10XJ000
PQ4R10XJ123
PQ4R18XJ472
PQ4R10XJ393
PQ4R10XJ683
R610
R611
R612
R613
R614
R615
R616
R617
R618
R619
PQ4R10XJ394
PQ4R10XJ564
PQ4R10XJ183
PQ4R10XJ104
PQ4R10XJ124
PQ4R10XJ000
PQ4R10XJ474
PQ4R10XJ683
PQ4R10XJ474
PQ4R10XJ102
390K
560K
18K
100 K
120K
R620
R621
R622
PQ4R10XJ103
PQ4R10XJ000
PQ4R10XJ563
10K
JUMPER,
56K
0_
[-505
PQ4R10XJO00
JUMPER,
0_
68K
JUMPER,
470K
68K
470K
1K
ReL No.
0_
C538
C539
0.1
0.1
0.047
22
0.033
0.68
0.22
0.1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0.1
1
C536
C537
C540
PQCUV1E 104MD
iC541
3542
0545
0546
.3547
C548
C549
PQCUV1E 104MD
PQCUV1 E473MD
ECEA1HU220
PQCUV1 E333MD
C550
C551
C552
C553
C554
C555
C556
C558
C559
PQCUV 1 H221JC
PQCUV1 E473MD
PQCUV 1 H221JC
PQCUV 1H 105JC
ECEA1HU100
ECEA1HU010
PQCUVlC683MD
ECEA1VGE101
ECCD1H151JC
C560
C561
C564
C568
0569
C570
C571
C572
C573
C574
ECQV1H684JM
PQCUV1C224ZF
PQCUV1E104MD
Pcs
Part Name & Description & Value
PQCUVt E104MD
PQCUV 1H 105JC
ECEA1CK101
PQCUVt C474ZF
1
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Part No.
S
S
100
0.47
S
S
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
220P
0.047
220P
1
1
1
S
S
1
1
1
1
1
150 P
S
1
ECEA1CKS221
PQ4R18XJ000
PQCUV1H101JC
PQCUV1H105JC
PQCUV1EIO4MD
220
0
lOOP
1
S
S
S
1
1
1
1
0.1
S
1
PQCUV1EIO4MD
PQCUV1E104MD
PQCUV1 E104MD
PQCUV1 H222KB
PQCUV1H331JC
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.0022
330P
S
1
1
1
1
1
10
1
0.068
100
(CAPACITORS)
C501
C502
C503
C504
3507
3508
C509
PQCUV1H 103KB
PQCU Vl E 104MD
PQCUVl E104MD
PQCUV 1H 105JC
IECEA1EU470
ECEA 1 EU470
ECEAOJU 102
C510
C511
C512
C513
C5!4
C515
C516
C518
PQCUV1E104MD
C520
C522
C523
C524
3525
C526
C527
C528
C529
S
S
S
S
S
S
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
RF UNIT PARTS
PCB6-1
PQCUV1H 152KB
0.1
0.01
D.01
0.01
L01
0.01
0.01
).0015
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ECEA1HU220
PQCUV 1H105JC
ECEA1HU4R7
ECEA1HU100
PQCUV 1H272KB
ECEA1EU101
PQCUV1H151JC
PQCUV1H 123MD
PQCUV1H392KB
22
1
4.7
10
3.0027
100
150P
0.012
0.0039
S
S
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PQCUV1H 103KB
PQCUV1H 103KB
PQCUV1H 103KB
PQCUV1H 103KB
PQCUV1H103KB
PQCUV1H103KB
C531
C532
ECEA1HU100
ECEA1HU4R7
PQCUV1H391JC
C533
C534
PQCUV1H123MD
PQ4R10XJ000
C530
0.01
0.1
0.1
1
47
47
1000
PN_I
IV1 HR??KB
10
4.7
S
S
S
S
390P
S
0 012
0.0082
1
1
1
1
1
1
-224-
PQLP10179M
RF UNIT P.C.BOARD
ASS'Y (RTL)
Ics)
IC301
IC302
PQVlM64084AG
PQVIDBL5018V
IC
IC
(TRANSISTORS)
Q301
Q302
Q303
Q304
Q305
Q308
Q309
Q310
2SC4571R77
2SC4571R77
2SC4226R24
2SC4226R24
2SC4116
'2SD601A
PQVTD123J106
PQVTD123J106
TRANSISTOR(SI)
TRANSISTOR(SI)
TRANSISTOR(SI)
TRANSISTOR(SI)
TRANSISTOR(SI)
TRANSISTOR(SI)
TRANSISTOR(SI)
TRANSISTOR(SI)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
I
This replacement
I
PartName & Description
el. No, I
',ef. No. I
I PQV DRB751 N4
I PQVDRB751 H4
IMA110
IMAl10
IMA2S111
IMA110
310
I MA8047
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(Sl)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
DIODE(SI)
1
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
I
(RESISTORS)
301
I ERJ3GEYJ333
302
303
_04
305
306
307
308
IERJ3GEYJ470
IERJ3GEYJ101
IERJ3GEYJ333
IERJ3GEYJ821
IERJ3GEYJ681
IERJ3GEYJ223
I ERJ3GEYJ153
309
I ERJ3GEYJ153
I
391
IMAl10
W301
"PQJS12A99Z
I
.301
.302
_303
_304
CONNECTOR,
(CERAMIC
PQVSM903Cl 0L
PQVS705CE927
PQVFSFE107MJ
PQVFCFH450B1
1
310
_,11
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
I ERJ3GEYJ222
I ERJ3GEYJ223
I ERJ3GEYJ223
I ERJ3GEYJ470
I ERJ3GEYJ470
I ERJ3GEYJ681
I ERJ3GEYJ153
IERJ3GEYJt 53
ERJ3GEYJ223
ERJ3GEYJ474
1
I
t
1
320
321
323
324
325
327
328
329
ERJ3GEYJ470
ERJ3GEYJ391
ERJ3GEYJ474
ERJ3GEYJ102
ERJ3GEYJ104
ERJ3GEYJ824
ERJ3GEYJ472
ERJ3GEYJ334
(CONNECTOR)
CERAMIC
CERAMIC
CERAMIC
CERAMIC
12PIN
FILTERS)
FILTER
FILTER
FILTER
FILTER
(COILS)
Y01
|02
303
304
322
PQLQR1RM601
PQLQR1 RM601
MQLRE10NJF
PQLQR2N3 R3KT
PQLQR1 RM601
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
1
1
1
1
1
389
PQLQR1RM601
COIL
1
(CRYSTALS)
x vco
_(vco
PQV030Z
PQV031Z
CRYSTAL
CRYSTAL
OSCILLATOR
OSCILLATOR
1
1
(OTHERS)
650
651
305
'C301
1R301
(301
PQMC 10214Z
PQMC 10215Z
PQLI2B201
F_CRLA010A53R
EVN5ESX50B54
PQVCJ 1025NOZ
MAGNETIC SHIELD COVER
MAGNETIC SHIELD COVER
I.F. TRANSFORMER
TRIMMER CAPACITOR
/ARIABLE RESISTOR
ARIABLE CAPACITOR
I
I
Pcs
Part No.
I
(DIODES)
301
302
303
304
305
306
Value
_CS
Part No.
I
]
Refer to the simplified manual (cover) for other areas.
parts list is for U.S.A. version only.
I
KX-F900
1
1
1
1
1
1
33K
47
100
33K
820
680
22K
15K
15K
1
1
1
2.2K
22K
22K
47
47
58O
15K
15K
22K
470K
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
47
390
470K
1K
100K
820K
4.7K
330K
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
150K
820
1K
2.2K
2.2K
10K
22
2.2K
2.2K
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2.2K
100
820
2.2K
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
330
331
E RJ3G EYJ 154
:ERJ3GEYJ821
332
334
335
336
337
338
339
ERJ3GEYJ102
ERJ3GEYJ222
ERJ3GEYJ222
ERJ3G EYJ 103
ERJ3GEYJ220
ERJ3GEYJ222
ERJ3GEYJ222
340
342
350
353
356
357
ERJ3GEYJ222
ERJ3GEYJ101
E RJ3G EYJ821
ERJ3GEYJ222
ERJ3GEYJ000
ERJ3GEYJ392
358
359
ERJ3GEYJ222
ERJ3GEYJ680
360
ECUVlH040CCV
4P
361
362
ERJ3GEYJ000
ERJ3GEYJ680
JUMPER,
58
306
317
318
ERJ3GEYJ000
ERJ3GEYJ120
ERJ3GEYJ220
JUMPER,
12
22
',630
;632
ERJ3GEYJ470
ERJ3GEYJ000
47
JUMPER,
0Q
1
1
47
JUMPER,
0o
1
1
JUMPER,
3.9K
2.2K
68
0_
0Q
I
I
I
0_
1
1
1
I
I
I
;312
.3394
ERJ3GEYJ470
ERJ3GEYJOO0
I
L
-225-
I
KX-F900
I
This replacement parts list is for
U.S.A. version only,
..........................................................
Ref. No.
Value
Part No.
Refer to the simplified manual (cover) for other areas.
Ref. No,
Pcs
(CAPACITORS)
C302
C303
C304
C305
C306
C308
C309
ECUV 1HOR5CCV
ECUV 1H050CCV
ECUV 1H 102KBV
ECUV 1H020CCV
ECUV 1H102KBV
ECUV 1H030CCV
ECUVlH030CCV
1
1
1
1
1
1
0.5
5P
0.001
2P
0,001
3P
3P
1
S
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
C310
C311
C313
C314
C315
C317
C318
C319
ECEA1CKS470
ECUVlH102KBV
PQCUVlC224ZF
ECUV1H682KBV
ECUV1H332KBV
ECUV1H820JCV
ECUV1H430JCV
ECUVlH080DCV
47
0,001
0.22
0.0068
0.0033
82P
43P
8P
C320
C321
,_322
C323
C324
C325
C327
C328
C329
ECUV1H103KBV
ECUV1H020CCV
ECUV1H030CCV
ECUV1H102KBV
ECUV1H102KBV
ECUV1H102KBV
ECUVlH102KBV
ECUV1H060DCV
ECUV1H040CCV
0.01
2P
3P
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
6P
:4P
C330
C331
C333
C334
C336
C337
C338
C339
ECUV1H 103KBV
ECEA1CKS470
ECUV1H223KBV
PQCUVlC224ZF
ECUV1H680JCV
ECUVlH103KBV
ECUV1H220JCV
PQCUV1C224ZF
0.01
47
0.022
0.22
68P
0.01
22P
0.22
C340
C341
C342
C343
C345
C346
C348
,C349
ECUVlH101JCV
ECUV1H333KDV
ECUV1H102KBV
ECUV1H102KBV
ECUV1H472KBV
ECUV1H020CCV
ECUV1H103KBV
ECUV1H103KBV
100P
0.033
0.001
0.001
0.0047
2P
0.01
0.01
C350
C351
C352
C354
ECUV1H103KBV
0.01
1
0.01
6P
C376
ECUV1H102KBV
3.001
1
C380
C381
C385
C386
C387
C388
C389
ECSTOJX336
ECUV1H1R5CCV
33O
.5
100P
0.001
0.001
100P
2P
1
1
C390
C392
C393
C395
C398
C399
ECUV1H020CCV
ECUV1H102KBV
ECUVlH103KBV
ECEAlCKS100
ECUV1H101JCV
ECUV1A105ZFV
2P
0,001
1
1
1
PQCUV1H105JC
ECUV1H103KBV
ECUV1H060DCV
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
S
& Value
Pcs
100P
100P
100P
100P
100P
100P
1
1
1
1
1
1
100P
1
100P
t00P
100P
100P
100P
100P
100P
1
1
C613
C615
C616
C617
C618
ECUV1H101JCV
ECUV1H101JCV
ECUV1H101JCV
ECUV1 H101JCV
ECUV1H101JCV
ECUV1 H101JCV
ECUVlH101JCV
ECUVl H101JCV
C620
C621
C622
C623
C624
C625
ECUV1H101JCV
ECUV1H101JCV
ECUV1H101JCV
ECUV1H101JCV
ECUV1H 101JCV
ECUV1 H101JCV
100P
100P
100P
100P
100P
100P
1
1
C603
;604
C605
C606
C607
C608
ECUV1H101JCV
ECUV1H101JCV
ECUV1H101JCV
ECUV1H101JCV
C610
C611
C612
PCB7
ECUV1H101JCV
ECUV1H101JCV
PQWP1TC910BR
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
HANDSET
PORTABLE
BOARD PARTS
HANDSET
P.C.BOARr
ASS'Y (RTL)
1
(ics)
1
S
Part Name & Description
PORTABLE
1
1
1
1
1
t
1
1
S
S
Pa_ No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
IC201
IC202
IC203
IC204
IC205
IC206
IC207
IC208
MN151233KZAB
AN6165SB
AN6183SE1
PQVIXCC3501P
PQVIXC3002PR
PQVIXCC3202P
PQVIXC3002PR
PQVINJM2113V
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC401
IC402
PQVIM64084AG
PQVIDBL5018V
IC
IC
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
S
(TRANSISTORS)
Q201
C600
C601
_02
ECUV1H101JCV
ECUV1H102KBV
ECUV1H102KBV
ECUV1H101JCV
ECUV1H020CCV
ECUV1H101JCV
ECUV1H101JCV
I::PI
t\l I I-1IN
1 .I(_,V
0.01
10
100P
1
100P
100P
[INNP
1
1
1
1
1
S
1
1
1
1
1
1
-226-
Q202
Q203
Q204
Q205
Q206
Q208
Q209
Q212
Q213
Q214
3215
3217
2SD1819A
2SD1819A
PQVTDTB123E
2SD1819A
PQVTDTA 143EU
PQVTDTB123E
2SD1819A
PQVTDTC143E
PQVTD 123T 146
PQVTD123J 106
2SD1819A
2SD1819A
PQVTDTC144TU
1
1
1
1
TRANSISTOR(SI)
TRANSISTOR(SI)
TRANSISTOR(SI)
TRANSISTOR(SI)
TRANSISTOR(SI)
TRANSISTOR(SI)
TRANSISTOR(S0
TRANSISTOR(SI)
TRANSISTOR(SI)
TRANSlSTOR(SI)
TRANSlSTOR(SI)
TRANSISTOR(SI)
TRANSISTOR(SI)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Q401
2SC4571R77
TRANSISTOR(St)
S
1
Q402
2SC4571R77
TRANStSTOR(SI)
S
1
1
Q403
2SC4226R24
TRANSISTOR(SI)
Q404
2SC4227R34
TRANSISTOR(SI)
Q405
2SC4116
TRANSISTOR(SI)
1
1
I
replacement
Ref. No.
parts list is for U.S.A. version only.
Part No.
Part Name & Description
Refer to the simplified manual (cover) for other areas.
Pcs
Ref. No.
Pa_ No.
(DIODES)
D201
D202
D206
D207
D208
D209
D210
D212
MA110
PQVDRB751H4
PQVDPY 1112H
PQVDPY | 112H
PQVDPY1112H
PQVDPY1112H
PQVDPY 1112H
PQVDBR1112H
D213
D214
MAll0
MA3062
D215
D217
D401
D402
D403
DA
DF
MA110
MA110
PQVDRB751H4
PQVDRB751 H4
MA110
MA110
MA110
KX-F900
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(St)
DIODE(SI)
1
I
RXVCO
TXVCO
PQV032Z
PQV033Z
(CRYSTALS)
CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR
CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR
X201
X202
PQVBTCC3.99M
PQVCE3276N9Z
CRYSTAL
CRYSTAL
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Part Name & Description
& Value
POS
OSCILLATOR
OSCILLATOR
(OTHERS)
E901
E902
E903
E904
PQMC10217Z
PQMC 10218Z
PQEFBDB111GP
PQJM122Z
MAGNETIC SHIELD
MAGNETIC SHIELD
BUZZER
MICROPHONE
COVER
COVER
L405
VC401
X401
PQLI2B201
ECRLA010A53R
PQVCJ 1025N0Z
I.F. TRANSFORMER
TRIMMER CAPACITOR
VARIABLE CAPACITOR
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
(COILS)
L201
L202
I..203
PQLQR3ER 10K
PQLQR3ER10K
PQLQR3ER10K
COIL
COIL
COIL
1
1
1
L400
L401
L402
L404
L406
PQLQR1RM601
PQLQR1RM601
PQLQR1RM601
PQLQR2N3R3KT
MQLRE2N7DF
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
I
I
I
I
L413
L414
PQLQR1RM601
PQLQR1RM601
COIL
COIL
L415
L416
L417
L418
L419
PQLQR1RM601
PQLQR1RM601
PQLQR1RM601
PQLQR 1RM601
MQLRE6N8JF
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
L420
L421
L422
MQLRE10NJF
MQLRE15NJF
MQLRE6N8JF
COIL
COIL
COIL
1
1
1
J206
PQLQR2TR10K
COIL
(CERAMIC
FL401
FL402
FL403
FL404
PQVSM927C11L
PQVS705CF903
PQVFSFE107MJ
PQVFCFH450B1
EVN5ESX50B15
EVN5ESX50B54
EVM1YSX50B52
EVN5ESX50B54
FILTERS)
CERAMIC
CERAMIC
FILTER
FILTER
CERAMIC
CERAMIC
FILTER
FILTER
(VARIABLE
VR201
VR202
VR203
VR401
I
VARIABLE
1
1
1
1
RESISTORS)
RESISTOR
VARIABLE RESISTOR
VAR ABLE RESISTOR
VARIABLE RESISTOR
1
1
1
1
(RESISTORS)
R201
R202
R203
R205
R206
R207
R208
R209
ERJ3GEYJ 103
ERJ3GEYJ332
ERJ3GEYJ473
ERJ3GEYJ473
ERJ3GEYJ473
ERJ3GEYJ473
ERJ3GEYJ224
ERJ3GEYJ473
10K
3.3K
47K
47K
47K
47K
1
1
1
1
1
1
220K
47K
1
1
R210
R211
R212
R213
R214
R215
R216
R218
R219
ERJ3GEYJ681
ERJ3GEYJ222
ERJ3GEYJ103
ERJ3GEYJ103
ERJ3GEYJ222
ERJ3GEYJ274
ERJ3GEYJ472
ERJ3GEYOR00
ERJ3GEYJ124
680
2.2K
10K
10K
2.2K
270K
4.7K
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R220
R221
ERJ3GEYJ104
ERJ3GEYJ683
R222
R223
R224
R225
R226
R227
R228
R229
ERJ3GEYJ104
ERJ3GEYJ153
ERJ3GEYJ153
ERJ3GEYJ683
ERJ3GEYJ104
ERJ3GEYJ273
ERJ3GEYJ273
ERJ3GEYJ473
100K
68K
100K
15K
R230
R231
R232
R233
R234
R235
R236
ERJ3GEYOR00
ERJ3GEYJ123
ERJ3GEYJ472
ERJ3GEYJ823
ERJ3GEYJ563
ERJ3GEYJ823
ERJ3GEYOR00
R237
R239
ERJ3GEYJ101
ERJ3GEYJ823
R240
R241
R243
R245
ERJ3GEYJ393
ERJ3GEYJ105
ERJ3GEYJ333
ERJ3GEYJ100
-227-
JUMPER,
120K
0Q
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
15K
68K
100K
27K
27K
47K
1
1
JUMPER,
12K
4.7K
82K
56K
82K
0Q
I
I
1
1
I
I
JUMPER,
100
0Q
I
I
82K
I
39K
1M
33K
10
1
1
1
1
I
KX-F900
I
This replacement
parts list is for U.S.A. version only.
Refer to the simplified manual (cover) for other areas.
I
_el. No.
Value
PaM No.
Value
Pcs
tef. No. I
I
_>48
._49
ERJ3GEYJ 124
ERJ3GEYJ223
ERJ3GEYJ223
ERJ3GEYJ 103
120K
22K
22K
10K
1
1
1
1
250
251
ERJ3GEYJ124
ERJ3GEYJ103
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
ERJ3GEYJ100
ERJ3GEYJ221
ERJ3GEYJ562
ERJ3GEYJ153
ERJ3GEYJ102
ERJ3GEYJ474
ERJ3GEYJ823
ERJ3GEYJ563
120K
10K
10
220
5.6K
15K
1K
I
I
I
I
I
I
260
264
265
_>46
247
470K
82K
56K
1
ERJ3GEYJ472
ERJ3GEYJ101
ERJ3GEYJ103
4.7K
1
100
10K
I
273
ERJ3GEYJ394
390K
I
280
282
283
286
288
289
ERJ3GEYJ271
ERJ3GEYJ224
ERJ3GEYJ103
ERJ3GEYJ331
ERJ3GEYOR00
ERJ3GEYJ473
270
220K
10K
330
I
I
I
I
I
I
JUMPER,
47K
I
0_
10
1K
330
330
330
1
1
1
1
1
1300
1303
1306
I307
1308
ERJ3GEYJ331
ERJ3GEYJ391
ERJ3GEYJ333
ERJ3GEYJ222
ERJ3GEYJ103
330
390
33K
2.2K
10K
1
1
1
1
1
1401
1402
1403
1404
1405
1406
1407
1408
1409
ERJ3GEYJ223
ERJ3GEYJ470
ERJ3GEYJ101
ERJ3GEYJ333
ERJ3GEYJ821
ERJ3GEYJ681
ERJ3GEYJ153
ERJ3GEYJ153
ERJ3GEYJ153
22K
47
100
33K
820
680
15K
15K
15K
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
_410
_411
_412
_413
:1414
_415
_416
t417
t418
ERJ3GEYJ222
ERJ3GEYJ183
ERJ3GEYJ183
ERJ3GEYJ470
ERJ3GEYJ470
ERJ3GEYJ681
ERJ3GEYJ153
ERJ3GEYJ153
ERJ3GEYJ223
2.2K
18K
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:1420
_421
R423
ERJ3GEYJ470
ERJ3GEYJ101
ERJ3GEYJ474
R424
R425
R427
R428
R429
ERJ3GEYJ152
ERJ3GEYJ104
ERJ3GEYJ564
ERJ3GEYJ472
ERJ3GEYJ334
I
47
100
470K
1.5K
100K
560K
4.7K
330K
439
IERJ3GEYJ222
440
441
I ERJ3GEYJ222
IERJ3GEYJ222
442
IERJ3GEYJI01
453
456
457
458
IERJ3GEYOR00
IERJ3GEYOR00
I ERJ3GEYJ822
I ERJ3GEYOR00
459
IERJ3GEYJ680
460
461
|ERJ3GEYOR00
|ECUV1HO40CCV
462
/ ERJ3GEYJ680
/ ERJ3GEYOR00
330K
820
1K
2.2K
2.2K
12K
2.2K
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2.2K
2.2K
100
1
1
1
22
2.2K
JUMPER,
JUMPER,
8.2K
0_
0_
1
1
JUMPER,
68
0_
1
1
1
JUMPER,
4P
68
OQ
1
1
1
JUMPER,
JUMPER,
JUMPER,
0_
0_
0_
1
4
8
JUMPER,
JUMPER,
0_
0_
1
1
i
27K
ERJ3GEYJ104
IERJ3GEYJ222
;494
:527
ERJ3GEYJ273
ERJ3GEYJ100
ERJ3GEYJ102
ERJ3GEYJ331
ERJ3GEYJ331
ERJ3GEYJ331
t419
438
_00
/ PQ4 R 18XJ0O0
202~2051ERJ3GEYOR00
290
:291
;294
1297
1298
1299
680
15K
15K
22K
100 K
IERJ3GEYJ334
IERJ3GEYJ821
IERJ3GEYJ102
I ERJ3GEYJ222
IERJ3GEYJ222
IERJ3GEYJ123
I ERJ3GEYJ220
I
1
18K
47
47
430
431
432
434
435
436
437
208-15
Pcs
Part No.
ERJ3GEYOR00
ERJ3GEYOR00
(CAPACITORS)
I
[
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
I
- 228-
;201
:202
:203
;204
;205
;206
;207
;208
PQCUV1H103KB
PQCUV1H103KB
ECUV1H103KBV
ECUV1 H103KBV
ECUV1H103KBV
ECUVlCl04KBV
ECEAOJKA331
ECEAlCKSl00
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.1
330
10
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
;213
;214
;215
;217
;218
;219
ECUV1H101JCV
ECUVlCl04KBV
ECUV1H391JCV
ECUV1H104ZFV
ECUVlA105ZFV
ECUV1H104ZFV
100P
0.1
390P
0.1
1
0.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
;220
ECUV1H 104ZFV
;221
;222
;223
;224
3225
3226
D227
3228
ECUV1H102KBV
ECUV1H472KBV
ECEA1VKS4R7
PQCUV 1 H 105JC
ECUV1H223KBV
ECUVlH472KBV
ECUV1H471JCV
ECEA1CKSIO0
0.1
0.001
3.0047
4.7
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
C230
C231
C232
C233
C234
ECEAlCKS100
ECEA1VKS4R7
ECUV1HIO4ZFV
ECUV1H822KBV
ECUV1A105ZFV
_C235
iECUV1R104ZFV
0.022
0.0047
470P
10
10
4.7
0.1
0.0082
1
0.1
S
S
S
s
S
S
S
,
S
1
I
1
1
1
I
This replacement
Ref. No.
parts list is for U.S.A. version only.
Part No.
Part Name & Description
Ref. No.
Part No.
Part Name & Description
Pcs
& Value
1
1
1
C446
C448
C449
ECUV1H020CCV
ECUV1C104KBV
ECUVlH103KBV
2P
1
1
1
1
1
1
C450
C451
C452
ECUVlCl04KBV
PQCUV1H105JC
ECUV1H103KBV
0.1
1
0.01
C476
ECUV1H102KBV
0.001
S
1
C482
C486
ECUV1HOR5CCV
ECUV1H102KBV
C487
C488
C489
ECUV1H102KBV
ECUV1H101JCV
ECUV1H010CCV
S
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0.5
0.001
0.001
100P
1P
C491
C492
ECUV1H030CCV
ECUV1H102KBV
3P
0.001
C495
C498
C499
ECEA1CKS470
ECUV1H101JCV
ECUV1H101JCV
47
100P
100P
1
1
1
C500
C501
C502
C503
C504
C505
C506
C507
C508
C509
ECUV1H101JCV
ECUV1H101JCV
ECUV1H101JCV
ECUV1 H101JCV
ECUVlH101JCV
ECUVlH101JCV
ECUV1H101JCV
ECUVl H101JCV
ECUV1 H101JCV
ECUV1 H101JCV
100P
100P
100P
100P
100P
100P
100P
100P
100P
100P
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
C510
C511
C512
C513
C517
C518
ECUVlH101JCV
ECUV1H101JCV
ECUV1H101JCV
ECUV1H101JCV
ECUV1H101JCV
ECUV1 H101JCV
100P
100P
100P
100P
100P
100P
1
1
1
1
1
C525
ERJ3GEYJ470
47
C237
C238
C239
ECUV1H 102KBV
ECUV1C104KBV
ECUVlA105ZFV
0.001
0.1
1
C240
C241
C242
C243
C244
C246
C248
ECEA1CKS470
ECUVlA105ZFV
ECEA1CKS470
ECUV1H 103KBV
ECUVlH 182KBV
ECUVlCl04KBV
47
1
47
0.01
0.0018
D.1
S
ECEAOJK221
220
C250
C251
C252
C253
C254
C255
C256
C256
C259
ECUVIC104KBV
ECSTOJX226
ECUV1H 180JCV
ECUV1H 180JCV
ECUV1H104MD
ECUV1C104KBV
ECSTOJX226
ECUV1A105ZFV
ECUVlC104KBV
0.1
220
18P
18P
0.1
0.1
220
1
0.1
C261
C262
C263
C264
C265
C266
C267
ECUV1H104ZFV
ECUVlH 104ZFV
ECUV1H104ZFV
ECUVIH104ZFV
ECUV1H104ZFV
ECUV1H182KBV
;ECUV1H104ZFV
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.0018
0.1
C402
C404
C405
C406
C407
C408
0409
ECUV1HOR5CCV
ECUV1H102KBV
ECUV1H020CCV
ECUV1H102KBV
ECUVlH040CCV
ECUV1H020CCV
ECUV1H1R5CCV
0.5
0.001
2P
0.001
4P
2P
1.5
._410
0411
0412
0413
0,414
C415
0417
C418
C419
ECEA1CKS470
ECUVlH103KBV
ECUV 1H040CCV
PQCUVlC224KB
ECUV1H332KBV
ECUV1H332KBV
ECUV 1H820JCV
ECUV 1H430JCV
ECUV1H080DCV
47
0.01
_4P
).22
D.0033
0.0033
82P
43P
8P
C420
C422
C423
C424
C425
C427
C428
C429
ECUV1H103KBV
ECUV1H030CCV
ECUV1H102KBV
ECUVlH102KBV
ECUV1H102KBV
ECUV1H102KBV
ECUVlH060DCV
ERJ3GEYJ470
0.01
3P
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
6P
47
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
C430
C431
C432
C433
0434
_436
0437
ECUV1H103KBV
ECEA 10KS470
ECUV1H562KBV
ECUV 1H562KBV
PQCUV1C224KB
ECUV1H680JCV
ECUV1H103KBV
0.01
47
0.0056
0.0056
).22
68P
0.01
1
C438
C439
ECUV1H220JCV
PQCUVlE104MD
22P
0.1
C440
C441
C442
C443
C445
ECUV1H680JCV
ECUV1H333KDV
ECUV1H821KBV
ECUV1H821KBV
ECUV1H472KBV
68P
0.033
820P
820P
0.0047
S
S
S
S
S
S
1
1
1
1
1
1
S
1
1
1
1
1
I
1
1
S,
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
S
S
S:
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
S
1
BOARD PARTS
CHARGER
P.C.BOARD
ASS'Y (RTI
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
S
PFLP1057M
1
1
1
0.1
0.01
CHARGER
PCB8
L_
I
Refer to the simplified manual (cover) for other areas.
Pcs
& Value
KX-F900
1
1
(DIODES)
D651
D652
D653
MA4220
MA4220
MA4220
DIODE(St)
DIODE(SI)
DIODE(SI)
LED651
LED652
PQVDR325CA47
PQVDR325CA47
LED
LED
1
1
1
1
1
-229-
1
1
1
S
S
1
1
KX-Fg00
I
This replacement
Ref. No.
Part No.
parts list is for U.S.A.
version only.
.............................
Pa_ Name & Description
& Value
Refer to the simplified manual (cover) for other areas.
Pcs
(CONNECTORS)
CN651
PFJS08R26Z
CONNECTOR
1
CN652
CN653
CN654
PQJT10119Z
PQJT10119Z
PQJT10119Z
BATTERYTERMINAL
BATTERYTERMINAL
BATTERY TERMINAL
1
1
1
[COILS)
L651
L652
L653
L654
PQLQZK330K
PQLQZK330K
PQLQZK330K
PQLQZK330K
L655
PQLQZK330K
1
1
1
1
1
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
(RESISOTRS)
R651
R652
ERDS2TJ271
ERDS2TJ271
270
270
FIXTURES
AND TOOLS
PQZZ2K12Z
PQZZ2K6Z
PFZZ8K23Z
PQZZ6K14Z
PQZZ2Kt3Z
PQZZ9K7Z
PQZZt1K8Z
PQZZ5K6Z
PFZZ5K13Z
EXTENTION
EXTENTION
CORD, 2 PIN
CORD, 2 PIN
EXTENTION
EXTENTION
EXTENTION
EXTENTION
EXTENTION
EXTENTION
EXTENTION
CORD,
CORD,
CORD,
CORD,
CORD,
CORD,
CORD,
8 PIN
6 PIN
2 PIN
9 PIN
11 PIN
5 PIN
5 PIN
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
PQZZ2K6Z
PQZZ10K4Z
EXTENTION CORD, 2 PIN
EXTENTION CORD, 10 PIN
EXTENTION CORD, 8 PIN
EXTENTION CORD, 2 PIN
EXTENTION CORD, 7 PIN
EXTENTION CORD, 18 PIN
EXTENTION CORD, 8 PIN
EXTENTION CORD, 10 PIN
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CCD ADJUSTMENT TOOL
SPRING HEIGHT TOOL
IC TOOL (for STATUS CHECKING)
[Refer to page 57:
1
1
1
PQZZ8K18Z
PQZZ2K12Z
PFZZ7K15Z
PFZZ18K4Z
PFZZ8K24Z
PQZZ10K11Z
PFZZfF780M
PFZZ2F780M
PFZZ3F900M
/
otes:
1. Tools (EC20-EC22) and Extension Cords (Ref. No. EC12, EC13)
are necessities for servicing.
2. Extension Cords (Ref. No. EC1-EC 17, EC14-EC
for servicing.
(They make servicing
easy.)
I
17) are useful
I
- 230-
Y (Q)
KXF900
Printed in Japan
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.2 Linearized : No Page Count : 230 Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseNone Producer : Goby Monitor Application version 3, 2, 1, 4 Create Date : Sat Sep 29 11:25:12 2007 Author : Title : Subject :EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools